Bairstow Rigging

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CATALOG BLP-04
PRODUCTS
Twin-Path Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Synthetic Wear Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Synthetic Sling Hardware . . . . . .10-12, 22, 41 Polyester Roundslings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Nylon Web Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-27 Wire Rope Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-35 Spreader Beams & Lifters . . . . . . . . . . .36-37 Alloy Chain Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-44 Wire Mesh Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Wire Rope Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46-63 Aircraft Cable S/S & Galvanized . . . . . .64-65 Cable Crimpers & Cutters . . . . . . . . . . .66-68 Rigging Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69-97 Blocks, Balls & Sheaves . . . . . . . . . . .98-113 Chain & Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114-119 Binder Chains & Gear . . . . . . . . . . . .120-121 Web Tie Downs & Gear . . . . . . . . . . .122-127 Rope: All Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128-133 Fall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134-147 Chain Hoists & Pullers . . . . . . . . . . . .148-153 Cable Come-A-Longs . . . . . . . . . . . . .154-155 Suspended Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158-161 Plate Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Beam Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Training, General Info, Map Contact Info & Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164-168
SAFE USE & INSPECTION

Twin-Path Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-17 Synthetic Sling Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Polyester Roundsling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Nylon Web Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-27 Wire Rope Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-35 Chain Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-43 Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-63 Wire Rope Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-71 Shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Eye Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88-89 Swivel Hoist Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Wedge Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108-113 Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Chain Load Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Web Load Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Fiber Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131-133 Fall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144-147 Plate Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Instruction Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165-166 Bairstow Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
SEE US ONLINE AT WWW.BAIRSTOW.COM
TOLL FREE: 800-241-8990 PHONE: 404-351-2600
TWIN-PATH EXTRA LIFTING SLINGS w/HIGH PERFORMANCE FIBERS & TELL-TAILS

TWIN-PATH EXTRA SLINGS
TPXC This is the worlds first truly ergonomic sling. It has a bulked nylon outer cover for superior abrasion resistance. These are made in sizes up to 300,000 lbs. vertical rated capacity. Larger capacity slings are available on special order. Extra Heavy Duty Covermax is standard on 70,000 lb. vertical capacity and higher. These slings have overload tell-tails,, inner red cover, and are used worldwide in place of wire rope slings for heavy lifts. They are about 10% of the weight of a steel sling. These products are repairable. The Twin-Path patented design provides the rigger with two connections between the hook and the load for redundant back-up protection. These slings have 1% stretch at rated capacity compared to braided polyester round slings which can stretch up to 9%. If ergonomics, productivity and safety are important, then these slings are the only choice. This is the lightest and strongest sling on the market today with KSpec the longest lasting load bearing core yarn, backed by independent testing. All slings have fiber optic internal inspection system.
RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.) CHOKER BASKET HITCHES (Horizontal Angles
OPTIC FIBER TELL-TAILS AND TELL-TAIL TAGS LET YOU KNOW WHEN THE SLING HAS BEEN OVERLOADED OR DAMAGED.
Proudly made in our shop in Atlanta, Georgia
VERTICAL CODE NO.
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT APPROXIMATE (lbs. Per Ft.) BODY WIDTH (Bearing-Bearing) (inches)
TPXC 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .31 3 TPXC 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .40 3 TPXC 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .55 3 TPXC 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .65 4 TPXC 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .80 4 TPXC 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 1.12 5 TPXC 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,139 70,700 1.50 5 TPXC 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.60 5 TPXC 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.68 6 TPXC 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.85 6 TPXC 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 2.20 6 TPXC 12500 125,000 100,000 250,000 216,500 176,500 3.00 8 TPXC 15000 150,000 120,000 300,000 259,800 212,100 3.36 8 TPXC 17500 175,000 140,000 350,000 303,100 247,450 4.00 10 TPXC 20000 200,000 160,000 400,000 346,400 282,800 4.37 10 TPXC 25000 250,000 200,000 500,000 433,000 353,500 5.50 12 TPXC 27500 275,000 220,000 550,000 476,300 388,850 6.90 12 TPXC 30000 300,000 240,000 600,000 519,600 424,200 7.50 12 US. Patent 4,850,629 Canadian Patent 1,280,458 NOTE: Capacities shown include both paths and are for one complete sling. Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width. Metric capacities available. Do not exceed rated capacity.
NOTE: See pages 15-17 for Safe Use Information
Capacities up to 500,000 lbs. Vertical 1,000,000 lbs. Basket Available on Request
Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoid sharp edges and exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 180F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.
WARNING
BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com
TWIN-PATH EXTRA SLINGS SAVE TIME AND MONEY

LIGHTWEIGHT REDUCES PERSONAL INJURIES EASY STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION ADVANCED SAFETY FEATURES HELP PREVENT ACCIDENTS TWIN-PATH CAN BE MADE AND DELIVERED QUICKLY DRASTICALLY REDUCES RIGGING TIME SOFT SLING WONT MAR LOAD
EASILY REPAIRABLE AND MADE TO EXACT LENGTH
MADE EXTRA TOUGH AND EXTRA SOFT

TWIN-PATH slings are actually 2 complete slings in one, each making separate connections between hook and load. TWINPATH slings have double-layered covers for extra protection. This back-up system could help maintain control of the load should damage occur. Its the same kind of redundancy described in the lifting regulations for nuclear plants.
EXTENDED USE MAKES THEM MORE ECONOMICAL

Wear points can be shed so that TWIN-PATH slings last longer than many other types of slings . . . resistant to most acid conditions.
SOFT AND FLEXIBLE FOR ADDED LOAD PROTECTION

TWIN-PATH slings adapt easily to vertical, basket or choker lifts . . . shape easily to fit hooks or shackles that might be too small for other slings . . . and gives the widest possible bearing contact with the load. Their flexibility makes them both easy to handle and easy to store in a restricted space.
EASY TO INSPECT
Double-layered, color-coded covers make them easy to inspect. When the outer cover is cut, the red inner layer shows through. This tells the inspector to remove the sling from service.
UNIQUE SAFETY FEATURES
Fiber optic Tell - Tails for inspection
Repair Patch
Tell-Tail Tags Retract When Sling Is Overloaded
Side By Side Roundslings For Backup Protection
Two Cover Jackets of Different Colors for Protection and Spotting Wear
RIGGING PRODUCTS
FIBER OPTIC TELL-TAILS
FIBER OPTIC INSPECTION FOR ALL TWIN-PATH SLINGS

Twin-Path slings have the Fiber Optic inspection system. The condition of the internal core yarn can be inspected just by checking the continuity of the fiber optic cable. If crushing or cutting, heat or chemical damage, has occurred then the damage to the fiber optic cable will destroy its ability to transmit light from one end to the other giving the inspector a reason to remove the sling from service and send it in for repair evaluation.The fiber optic cable will conduct light using natural, overhead or flashlight sources. The inspector simply covers and removes his finger from one end and watches the other end for blinking which indicates that the sling is OK to use for another lift.
TWIN PATH POLYESTER SLINGS

TWIN-PATH POLYESTER CORE YARN SLINGS WITH COVER MAX
Canadian Patent 2,280,458. U.S. Patent 4,850,629. Please note: capacities shown include both paths and are for one complete sling. Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width. Do not exceed rated capacity. Metric capacities available.
VERTICAL CODE NO. CHOKER RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.) BASKET HITCHES APPROX. APPROX. WEIGHT BODY (LBS. PER FT.) WIDTH (Bearing-Bearing) (Inches)
TPC 200 TPC 300 TPC 450 TPC 600 TPC 750 TPC 900 TPC 1200 TPC 1400 TPC 1700 TPC 2200 TPC 2600 TPC 3200 TPC 5000 TPC 6000
2,000 3,000 4,500 6,000 7,500 9,000 12,000 14,000 17,000 22,000 26,000 32,000 50,000 60,000
1,600 2,400 3,600 4,800 6,000 7,200 9,600 11,200 13,600 17,800 20,800 25,600 40,000 48,000
4,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000 24,000 28,000 34,000 44,000 52,000 64,000 100,000 120,000
3,464 5,196 7,794 10,392 12,990 15,588 20,784 24,248 29,440 38,104 45,032 55,424 86,600 103,920
2,828 4,242 6,383 8,484 10,605 12,726 16,968 19,798 24,038 31,108 36,784 45,248 70,700 84,840
.28 .30 .45 .48 .65 .70 .90 .95 1.20 1.40 1.70 1.90 2.70 3.00
2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6
Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoid sharp edges and exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 180F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.
WARNING
TWIN PATH EYE & EYE SLING

TWIN-PATH EYE & EYE SYNTHETIC SLING
TPXCEE & TPCEE Slings are made to be an eye and eye sling only. They have a loop at each end and single tube body (still divided into two separate paths). This sling is light, strong and less expensive than a roundsling with a sleeve. It can be manufactured using either K-Spec core yarn or polyester. Riggers have told us that they have some applications where they want only an eye and eye sling. This is the one with all of the Twin-Path features in a strictly eye and eye product.
1) U.S. Patent #5,727,833 and #4,850,629 2) Capacities shown include both paths and are for one complete sling. Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width. 3) Metric capacities available. Do not exceed rated capacity. 4) Larger capacities on request. 5) Polyester slings also available
VERTICAL CODE NO.
RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.) CHOKER BASKET HITCHES
APPROX. APPROX. WEIGHT BODY (LBS. PER FT.) WIDTH (Bearing-Bearing) (Inches)
TPXCEE 1000 TPXCEE 1500 TPXCEE 2000 TPXCEE 2500 TPXCEE 3000 TPXCEE 4000 TPXCEE 5000 TPXCEE 6000 TPXCEE 7000 TPXCEE 8500 TPXCEE 10000 TPXCEE 12500 TPXCEE 15000
10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 85,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
8,000 12,000 16,000 20,000 24,000 32,000 40,000 48,000 56,000 68,000 80,000 100,000 120,000
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 80,000 100,000 120,000 140,000 170,000 200,000 250,000 300,000
17,320 25,980 34,640 43,300 51,960 69,280 86,139 103,920 121,240 147,220 173,200 216,500 259,800
14,140 21,210 28,280 35,350 42,420 56,560 70,700 84,840 98,980 120,190 141,400 176,500 212,100
.31 .40 .55 .65 .80 1.12 1.50 1.60 1.68 1.85 2.20 3.00 3.36
4 4 4 5 5 6 6 8 8 10 10 12 12
TWIN PATH TWO-LEG BRIDLES

TWIN-PATH TWO-LEG BRIDLES
TPXCTL & TPCTL slings are simply the lightest and strongest synthetic bridles in the world today. these are perfect to replace existing chain and, wire rope bridles. The Twin-Path synthetic bridle with K-Spec core yarn is less than half the weight of any steel assembly and is the ergonomic bridle of the future, here today. The loop at the top goes on the crane hook and there is no heavy steel ring to deal with. If you need a four leg bridle, just order two Twin-Path Two Leg bridles. Please specify the loop size required at the top and any hardware such as hooks for the bottom of each leg. Hooks or other hardware can be removed if attached with G-link connectors or roundsling shackles rather than being made into place.
TWIN-PATH 2-LEG BRIDLES WITH K-SPEC

STOCK NUMBERS TPXCTL 1000 TPXCTL 1500 TPXCTL 2000 TPXCTL 3000 TPXCTL 4000 TPXCTL 5000 VERTICAL 10,000 15,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 HORIZONTAL ANGLES 60 45 8,500 7,000 12,750 10,500 17,000 14,000 25,500 21,000 34,000 28,000 42,500 35,000 WT. PER FT. (POUNDS) .34 .44 .61 .88 1.23 1.65 EYE (WIDTH) 3" 3" 3" 4" 5" 5"
1) U.S. Patent #5,727,833 and #4,850,629. 2) Capacities shown are both legs used together. 3) Larger capacities on request. 4) Polyester slings also available.
Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoid sharp edges and exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 180F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.
WARNING
5
RIGGING PRODUCTS
TWIN-PATH ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE TPXA (with K-Spec ), TPA (with polyester)
The Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle is the ultimate multiple use rigging tool. It can be used in applications where a standard two-leg or four leg bridle is used with the added advantage of self-adjustment to awkward loads. The Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle self-adjusts over the center of gravity to find the lifting point. The Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle can also be used as a complete rigging tool for choker, vertical, or basket hitches. The use of two or more Twin-Path Adjustable Bridles facilitates lifts with multiple lifting points.
TWIN-PATH ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE SPECIFICATIONS

TPA CODE SINGLE ADJUSTABLE RING DIMENSIONS BRIDLE APPROX. RING MAIN HOOK RING CAPACITY SLING STOCK AREA AREA (LBS.) WIDTH DIAMETER (WIDTH) (LENGTH) SHACKLE DIMENSIONS NOMINAL SHACKLE TONNAGE SIZE (W.L.L.) SLING WEIGHT (LBS.) APPROX. APPROX. 3 FOOT ADDER BASE PER FOOT
TPA 6 TPXA 12 TPXA 20 TPXA 40 TPXA 60 TPXA 90
6,000 12,000 20,000 40,000 60,000 90,000
2 3 4 5 5 6
1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/4
2-1/2 3 4 5-1/4 7 8
2-1/2 3 4 5-1/4 7 8
5/8 7/8 1-1/4 1-3/4 2 2-1/4
3-1/4T 6-1/2T 12T 25T 35T 55T
4.40 6.80 13.60 31.10 60.00 86.00
1.35 1.95 2.70 4.20 5.70 8.10
PLEASE NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN INCLUDE BOTH PATHS AND ARE FOR ONE COMPLETE ASSEMBLY.
CHOKER
VERTICAL
BASKET
WARNING
RIGGING PRODUCTS
TWIN-PATH ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE FOR OFF-CENTER LOADS
The Twin-Path Adjustable Sling is a multi-purpose rigging tool and its important that it is used properly. The adjustment ring has a double sling on one side and a single sling on the other side.
If the lifting points are an equal distance from the center of gravity then the Twin-Path Adjustable can be hooked-up with the double or single sling on either lifting point.
If the lifting points are an equal distance on either side of the center of gravity, but one is higher, then the double sling should be attached to the higher lifting point.
If one of the lifting points is closer to the center of gravity, then attach the double sling to this lifting point. It will have the highest weight concentration. If the Twin-Path Adjustable is attached so that the single sling is nearest the center of gravity, it will not allow the lift to be made.
Never use the Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle in situations where the sling-tohook angle is greater than 45. Always connect above the center of gravity. If connections are made below the center of gravity, then the load may turn when lifted.
SPARKEATER SLING
TWIN-PATH SPARKEATER SLING FOR HOT LOADS
SE When you have a hot environment up to 3000f, use a Sparkeater to lift the load without marring the surface of the lifted piece. Also, when doing stage rigging order this products for the protection it gives from exposure to fire, heat, sparks and pyrotechnics. Just specify black color for the theater or yellow for all other applications. These slings are made from Nomex for the cover and Aramid high performance core yarns. Available in capacities of 2,000 to 30,000 lbs. When lifting heated steel. wire rope or chain slings might scratch the load causing expensive rework. Fire exposure testing was performed by the Offshore Certification Bureau and the product was identified as being as good as wire rope or chain for use in off shore applications in the oil industry.
RATED CAPACITIES VERTICAL APPROXIMATE WEIGHT (LBS. PER FT.) (Bearing-Bearing)
CHOKER SLING WIDTH STOCK NUMBER
BASKET
TPSE 200 TPSE 400 TPSE 600 TPSE 1000 TPSE 2000 TPSE 3000
2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 4
1,600 3,200 4,800 8,000 16,000 24,000
2,000 4,000 6,000 10,000 20,000 30,000
4,000 8,000 12,000 20,000 40,000 60,000
.20 .24 .28 .31 .55 .80
PLEASE NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN INCLUDE BOTH PATHS AND ARE FOR ONE COMPLETE SLING.
Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoid sharp edges and exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 300F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. This warning is for sparkeater slings only.
WARNING
7
WEAR PADS
SYNTHETIC WEAR PADS
Covermax Wear Pads (Style CM)
Wear Pads protect loads and slings. CM Wear Pads are cut resistant and can be made ready to use in any length or width. They fit wire rope, chain, nylon webbing or any regular rope or sling product. These pads can also be made into long lengths which the customer can cut into suitable sizes on the job. Double or triple thickness provide cut resistance for the most severe conditions.
SL-SLEEVE TYPE
CM-SL (Sliding Type)

CM-SL Pads are sliding wear pads that wrap around the sling body with sewn seams along both edges or seamless tubulaR design that can then slide into position to protect the sling. they can also be used in the sling eye.
CM-RM (Removable Sliding Type)

CM-RM Pads is a removable wear pad with a hook & loop fastener on one edge and the other edge sewn shut.
CM-EE (Sleeve to make an Eye & Eye sling)

SEW-SEWN ON PAD
CM-EE sleeves are used to enclose both legs of a Twin-Path or roundsling so that it looks and functions like an eye & Eye sling. (Note: Remove sleeve after use to inspect sling and change wear points.)
CM-RMT (Removable Sliding Tubular Pad)

CM-RMT ads are made to wrap around a small items like rope, wire rope, or chain. They have hook & loop fasteners on one side.
CM-SEW (Single Ply Sewn into Place)

CM-SEW Pads are single plies of covermax sewn into place on one side of a web, round or Twin-Path sling or eye.
Performance Pad Wear Pads (Style PK)

RM-SLEEVE TYPE
PK style wear pads are the same as CM pads except that they are made from extra tough, high performance and very cut resistant felt type material that is white and 3/8" thick. PK-SL (Sliding Type) PK-RM (Removable Sliding Type) PK-EE (Sleeve to make an Eye & eye Sling) PK-RMT (Removable Sliding Tubular Pad) PK-SEW (Single Ply Sewn into Place)
Nylon Web Wear Pads (Style NW)

NW Pads are the same as CM pads except that they are made from yellow nylon web sling material about 7/32" thick and are not as cut and abrasion resistant. NW-SL (Sliding Type) NW-RM (Removable Sliding type) NW-EE (Sleeve to make Eye & Eye Sling) NW-RMT (Removable Sliding Tubular Pad) NW-SEW (Single Ply Sewn into Place)
RMT-ROUND TYPE
NOTE: Please Specify Length of Pads and Sling Width, Thickness or Diameter.
CORNERMAX WEAR PADS

CORNERMAX WEAR PADS
PATENT PENDING
NEW
Covermax wear pads are good for abrasion protection but a different type of wear pad is best to protect the sling from corners and edges. The new CornerMax wear pad forms a tunnel between the pad and the edge, greatly reducing the possibility of contact and cutting. These pads can have fixed loops or hook & loop attachments for easy installation on the sling at the point of contact. They can protect the sling from loads up to 100,000 lbs.
Easily attaches to the sling with hook & loop containment straps SAVE YOUR SLING FROM EDGES Part Number CornerMax 4 CornerMax 8 CornerMax 12 Description Fits 2", 3", 4" Wide Slings Fits 5", 6", 8" Wide Slings Fits 10", 12" Wide Slings
The photo shows the formation of a tunnel
SHACKLE PIN-PAD WEAR PADS

SHACKLE PIN-PADS
The pin area of a shackle can cause synthetic slings to cut and placing synthetic slings on the pin should be avoided. Even a new shackle can have a sharp edge where the threaded pin goes through the shackle ear. If the sling is exposed to this area, it can cut and fail. The Shackle Pin-Pad is the latest SLINGMAX SOLUTION in the constant effort to ensure the ultimate rigging safety of our customers. If you must rig on the pin, protect your sling with a SLINGMAX Pin-Pad.
NEW
Easy Attachment with hook & loop straps
Protects Sling from cutting
Part # PIN-PAD + Shackle Size (example 112" shackle = PIN-PAD 112)
G-LINK CONNECTORS
G-LINK CONNECTORS
NEW! A multi-use coupler specifically designed for connecting hardware to web, round or Twin Path slings. This versatile patentpending coupler can be used to connect two slings together, as a sliding choker hook or as a two leg bridle! Always use G-Links of correct width and rated capacity. Two G-links used together will double the rated capacity of one G-Link.
PRODUCT FEATURES:
Couples web, round or Twin-Path slings with hardware (oblongs or hooks). Splices two slings into longer length. Connects two slings with oblong and two hooks into bridle sling. Allows sling to be used as sliding choker sling. Two G-Link connectors used together will double the rated capacity of one G-Link connector. Conforms with ASME B30.9 web and round sling specifications.
Patent #5,651,573 VERT. RATED CAP. TONS 2-1/2 5 7-1/2 15 25 CHOKER RATED CAP. TONS 2 3 4 8 12 SLING SIZE (IN.) 2 3 4 *5 *6
MODEL NUMBER SC200L SC300L SC400L SC500L SC600L
WGT. (LBS.) 2 3-1/2 7 15 29
DIMENSIONS:
MODEL SC200L SC300L SC400L SC500L SC600L A 2 3 4 5 6 B 5/8 11/16 13/16 1-1/16 1-1/4 C 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 2 2-1/4 D 5/8 11/16 13/16 1-1/16 1-1/4 E 1-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/2 3 4 F 1-15/16 2-7/16 2-7/8 3-3/4 5 G 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 2 2-1/4 H 5.0 6.62 7.5 9.75 12.5 J 1-13/16 2-1/2 2-3/4 3-3/4 4-3/4 O 1/2 9/16 3/4 1 1-1/4 R .5 .75 .75 1.0 1.0 T .5 .75 1.0 1.25 1.5 W 3.5 5.0 6.0 8.0 9.38
Connect Two Slings Connect Hook or Oblong to Sling Choker Sling
Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.
WARNING
10
GUNNEBO WEB & ROUNDSLING HARDWARE

WEB ROUND SLING CONNNECTOR - SKR
MODEL SKR-7/8-8 SKR-7/8-8 SKR-10-8 SKR-13-8 SKR-16-8 SKR-18/20-8 SKR-22-8 SKR-26-8 CHAIN SIZE IN 9/32 1/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 WORKING LOAD LIMIT *(LBS) 3,500 4,500 7,100 12,000 18,100 28,300 34,200 47,700 L 1.4 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.4 2.8 4.3 5.1 DIMENSIONS (INCHES) B K 1.6 .71 1.6 .71 1.9 .95 2.1 1.1 2.6 1.4 3.2 1.7 4.9 1.9 5.9 2.3 S .95 .94 1.1 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.7 3.4 WEIGHT EACH (LBS) .46 .46 .84 1.5 2.6 4.4 11 18.7
SLING HOOKS - SKN WITH HALF LINKS & LATCH
CHAIN SIZE MODEL SKN-7/8-8 SKN-7/8-8 SKN-10-8 SKN-13-8 SKN-16-8 SKN-18/20-8
WORKING LOAD LIMIT IN 9/32 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4
*(LBS) 3,500 4,500 7,100 12,000 18,100 28,300
L 3.5 3.5 4.5 5.6 6.5 7.4
DIMENSIONS (INCHES) L1 B 4.6 1.3 4.6 1.3 5.8 1.6 7.3 1.9 8.5 2.2 9.8 2.6
B1 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.7 1.9 2.3
G .71 .71 .91 1.1 1.3 1.7
H .83 .83 1.1 1.4 1.7 2.0
WEIGHT EACH (LBS) 1.2 1.2 2.3 4.8 8.6 13.7
Design Factor 4:1 Proof tested and certified.
OPEN MASTER LINKS - SKO WITH HALF LINKS
CHAIN SIZE MODEL SKO-7/8-8 SKO-7/8-8 SKO-10-8 SKO-13-8 SKO-16-8 SKO-18/20-8 IN 9/32 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 MM 7 7 10 13 16 20
WORKING LOAD LIMIT *(LBS) L 3,500 4,500 7,100 12,000 18,100 28,300 3.9 3.9 5.0 5.7 6.9 8.0
DIMENSIONS (INCHES) L1 B 5.0 2.0 5.0 2.0 6.3 2.6 7.4 2.8 8.9 3.2 10.5 4.1
G .55 .55 .71 .87 .99 1.2
B1 .59 .59 .79 .99 1.2 1.4
WEIGHT EACH (LBS) .84 .84 1.8 3.1 5.1 8.2
ALLOY ROLLER BEARING SWIVEL SYSTEMS INSULATED SKLI
MODEL SKLI-7/8-8 SKLI-7/8-8 SKLI-10-8 SKLI-13-8 SKLI-16-8 SKLI-18/20-8
CHAIN SIZE IN 9/32 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4
WORKING LOAD LIMIT *(LBS) 3,500 4,500 7,100 12,000 18,100 28,300
DIMENSIONS (INCHES) L D 3.0 1.9 3.0 1.9 3.8 2.3 4.7 3.0 5.4 3.5 6.3 4.1
WEIGHT EACH (LBS) 1.5 1.5 3.1 6.4 10.8 15.9
SAFETY HOOKS - BKB FOR WEB SLINGS (EYE TYPE)
MODEL BKB-10-8
CHAIN SIZE IN 3/8
WORKING LOAD LIMIT *(LBS) 7,100
L 6.7
B 1.5
DIMENSIONS (INCHES) D E F 2.8 1.3 .5
G 1.3
H 1.7
WEIGHT EACH (LBS) 5.3
Design Factor 4:1 Proof tested and certified. Particularly suitable for use with Web/round slings.
See Pages 22 & 41 for other Hardware
Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.
WARNING
11
CROSBY SYNTHETIC SLING HARDWARE

Recommended Application Chart
Application
Web Slings, connect to Pad eye, Eye Bolt, or Lifting Lug. S-281 Sling Saver Web Sling Shackle
Use
Comments
Round Sling, conenct to Pad eye, Eye Bolt, or Lifting Lug.
S-253 or S-252 Sling Saver Shackle
Connect two S-252 or S-253 Sling Saver shackles together
S-256 Link Plate
To keep the load centered on the Pin, thus keeping the sling positioned correctly in the shackle bow.
S-255 Spool
Web Slings or Round Slings connecting to Master Links, rings, or Crosby 320N Eye Hooks.
S-280 Sling Saver Web Connector with spool
Web Slings or Round Slings connecting to Grade 8 Chain.
S-282 Sling Saver Chain connector with spool.
High Strength, High Capacity Round Slings
Always Insure Rated Working Load Limits are greater than the load placed on the fitting.
WS-320A Web Sling Hook.
Choking with Web Slings or Round Slings
S-287 Sliding Choker Hook
DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION FOR ROUNDSLING SHACKLES

WEB SLING NOMINAL SIZE (IN.) ROUND WORKING SLING LOAD LIMIT SIZE (NO.) (TONS) S-252 BOLT TYPE S-252 WEIGHT STOCK NO. EA. (LBS.) S-253 SCREW TYPE S-253 WEIGHT STOCK NO. EA. (LBS.) DIMENSIONS (IN.) A B C D E F
See Page 22 & 41 for other Hardware
1 1&2 3-1/4 1020485 1.4 1020575 1.4 0.88 0.62 1.38 0.75 1.50 0.44 3.38 3.68 1.12 1.50 1.5 3&4 6-1/2 1020496 2.4 1020584 2.2 1.25 0.75 1.75 0.88 1.88 0.50 4.15 4.25 1.31 1.81 2 5&6 8-3/4 1020507 4.1 1020593 3.8 1.38 0.88 2.25 1.00 2.81 0.56 5.50 4.72 1.50 2.09 3 7 & 8 12-1/2 1020518 8.0 1020602 7.3 1.62 1.12 3.25 1.25 3.06 0.75 6.34 5.88 1.88 2.62 4 9 & 10 20-1/2 1020529 16.9 1020611 15.2 2.12 1.38 4.50 1.50 5.75 0.88 9.75 7.19 2.25 3.12 5 11 & 12 35 1020540 35.0 1020620 30.8 2.50 1.75 5.50 2.00 6.34 1.12 11.50 9.31 3.00 4.19 6 13 50 1020551 57.5 1020629 52.0 3.00 2.12 6.50 2.25 7.70 1.25 13.75 10.38 3.38 4.75 *NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2=-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
0.75 2.69 3.22 1.00 3.38 4.03 1.12 4.19 4.50 1.38 5.62 5.59 1.75 7.50 6.88 2.25 9.19 8.66 2.75 11.00 10.22
0.44 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.75 1.00 1.22
1.00 1.19 1.44 1.81 2.13 2.88 3.19
12
POLYESTER ROUNDSLINGS
SINGLE PATH POLYESTER ROUNDSLING
Our Roundslings are constructed of 100% polyester load bearing internal yarns. The load bearing yarns are protected by a SEAMLESS polyester cover. Due to the tubular design of the protective cover, the Roundsling is made without seams, thus, there is no weakening in the strength of the covering materials and no edges to contend with. Each sling has a durable tag permanently attached. This tag contains load capacities and all information currently required by the various regulatory agencies. CAUTIONSlings are subject to cutting when lifting on sharp edges. Edges in contact with the sling must be padded with material of sufficient thickness to prevent damage to the sling.The sleeve is sewn around the cover of the Roundsling so that it can be positioned to the area where it is needed. (see page 26 for additional information on sleeves.)
ROUNDSLING FEATURES
Hook, and load contact points can continually be rotated to further extend not only the wear life of the protective outer cover, but the overall service cycle of the sling. The load bearing yarns never come into contact with the load.There is no wear to them as long as the protective outer cover remains intact. Wide variety of sling lengths and load capacities. Protects not only the load, but the users hands. Adapts to all types, sizes and load configurations. SEAMLESS COVERno edges to wear out. Lightweighteasy to handle, store and clean Excellent resistance to ultraviolet light, rot and mildew. Only 3% elongation. Maximum temperature exposure 180F. No loss of strength in water. Soft and pliable. Conforms to load.
RATED CAPACITY FOR POLYESTER ROUNDSLINGS

NORMAL APPROXIMATE MEASUREMENTS JACKET VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET 45 BASKET BODY WIDTH WEIGHT PER MINIMUM CODE NO. SIZE COLOR POUNDS POUNDS POUNDS POUNDS UNDER LOAD FOOT LBS. LENGTH FT.
E30 1 Purple 2,600 2,100 5,200 3,700 E60 2 Green 5,300 4,200 10,600 7,500 E90 3 Yellow 8,400 6,700 16,800 11,900 E120 4 Tan 10,600 8,500 21,200 15,000 E150 5 Red 13,200 10,600 26,400 18,700 E180 6 Orange 16,800 13,400 33,600 23,800 E240 7 Blue 21,200 17,000 42,400 30,000 E250 8 Orange 25,000 20,000 50,000 35,400 E360 9 Orange 31,000 24,800 62,000 43,800 E400 10 Orange 40,000 32,000 80,000 56,600 E600 11 Orange 53,000 42,400 106,000 74,900 Larger sizes on request. Also see Twin-Path Polyester on page 4.
1-1/8 1-1/2 1-7/8 1-1/8 1-1/4 2-1/2 3 3-1/4 3-3/4 4-1/4 4-5/8
.3 .4 .5 .6 .8 .9 1.2 1.5 2 2.8 3.6
3 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 7 7
WARNING
13
ROUNDSLING SAFE USE & INSPECTION

RECOMMENDED OPERATING PRACTICES FOR ROUNDSLINGS
MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS
1) Determine weight of the load. 2) Select proper polyester roundsling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment. only polyester roundslings with legible identification tags shall be used. 3) Polyester roundslings shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacity. Consideration shall be given to the angle from the horizontal (load to roundsling angle) which affects rated capacity. 4) Polyester roundslings with fittings which are used in a choker hitch shall be of sufficient length to assure that the choking action is on the polyester roundsling and never on the fitting. 5) Polyester roundslings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced to prevent slippage. 6) Polyester roundslings shall not be dragged on the floor or over an abrasive surface. 7) Polyester roundslings shall not be twisted or tied into knots, or joined by knotting. 8) Polyester roundslings shall not be pulled from under loads when the load is resting on the sling. 9) Polyester roundslings shall be used with lifting devices that are compatible with roundslings. 10) Polyester roundslings shall always be protected from being cut by sharp corners, sharp edges, protrusions or abrasive surfaces. 11) Do not drop polyester roundslings equipped with metal fittings. 12) The opening in fittings shall be the proper shape and size to insure that the fitting will seat properly in the hook or other attachments. 13) Polyester roundsling protective covers that are cut, exposing the load bearing yarn, shall be removed from service. 14) Consideration shall be given to the fittings radius in that it shall be compatible to that of the crane hook on which it is to be used. 15) Consideration shall be given to the distribution of load weight on a multi-legged lift.
BASIC RULES OF HITCHING

1) RATED CAPACITY: Be sure the polyester roundsling you intend to use is strong enough for the job (refer to identification tag on the polyester roundsling). 2) WARNING! Rated capacities are affected by the Angle of Lift (roundsling to load angle) when used in multi-legged polyester roundslings or basket hitches. 3) CONTROL AND BALANCE: Use a hitch that will keep the load under control at all times, and be sure the lifting device is directly over center of gravity (CG). 4) PREVENT DAMAGE: Use corner protectors on sharp or abrasive corners and edges. 5) LIFTING LOAD: Lift load carefully, accelerating smoothly. Avoid shock loading. 6) CONDITIONS OF POLYESTER ROUNDSLINGS: Inspect roundslings and their parts carefully before each lift and at regular intervals. Remove the polyester roundsling from service if any conditions cause doubt as to the strength of the roundsling.
POLYESTER ROUNDLSLING INSPECTION

1) INSPECTION RECORDS a) Written inspection records should be established and kept on file for each polyester roundsling. This record should include all the information taken from the polyester roundslings identification tag (type, reach, rated capacity), along with its location. These records should be updated after each inspection. b) Polyester roundslings shall be visually inspected by a designated person handling the polyester roundsling before each use. These visual observations shall be concerned with the identification tag and discovering damage. Polyester roundslings shall be removed from service if there is any doubt as to the condition of the polyester roundsling. 2) TYPE OF INSPECTION a) Initial Inspection Before any polyester roundsling is placed into service it shall be inspected by a designated person to ensure that the correct polyester roundsling is being used, as well as to determine that the polyester roundsling meets the requirements of the manufacturers specification. b) Frequent Visual Inspection This inspection shall be made by the person handling the polyester roundsling each time the roundsling is used. c) Periodic Inspection This inspection shall be conducted by a designated person. Frequency of inspection should be based on: 1. Frequency of use. 2. Severity of service conditions. 3. Experience gained on service life of polyester roundslings used in similar applications. 4. Periodic inspections should be conducted at least monthly. 3) REMOVAL FROM SERVICE A polyester roundsling shall be removed from service if any of the following is visible: a) If polyester roundsling identification tag is missing or unreadable. b) Melting, charring or weld spatter on any part of the polyester roundsling. c) Holes, tears, cuts, embedded particles, abrasive wear, or snags that expose the core fibers of the polyester roundsling. d) Broken or worn stitching in the cover which exposes the core fibers. e) Fittings when damaged, stretched or distorted in any way. f) Polyester roundslings that are knotted. g) Acid or alkali burns on the polyester roundsling. h) Any conditions which cause doubt as to the strength of the polyester roundsling.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
1) Polyester roundslings should be stored in a cool, dry, and dark place to prevent loss of strength when not in use through exposure to ultra-violet rays. Polyester roundslings shall not be stored in chemically active areas. 2) Chemically active environments can affect the strength of synthetic polyester roundslings in varying degrees ranging from little to total degradation.The polyester roundsling manufacturer or a qualified person shall be consulted before polyester roundslings are used in chemically active environments.
ACIDS
1) Polyester is resistant to many acids, but is subject to degradation ranging from little to moderate in some acids. 2) Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following: a. Type of acid b. Exposure conditions c. Concentration d. Temperature
ALKALIS
1) Polyester is subject to degradation in alkalis, ranging from little to total degradation. 2) Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following: a. Type of alkali b. Exposure conditions c. Concentration d. Temperature 3) Polyester roundslings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 194F (90C), or at temperatures below minus 40F (-40C). 4) Polyester roundslings incorporating aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of alkalis and/or acids are present.
14
WEB & ROUNDSLING HARDWARE SAFE USE
TWIN-PATH CARE, USE AND INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS

9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 In Twin-Path Slings Tell-Tails should extend past the tag area of each sling. If both Tell-Tails are not visible, remove the sling from service. If the Tell-Tails show evidence of chemical degradation, remove the sling from service. Send to manufacturer for repair evaluation. Slings should be inspected for evidence of cutting or tearing of the outer cover. Slings with cuts should be removed from service and sent back to the manufacturer for repair evaluation. Damage to the cover may indicate core damage. Inspect slings for evidence of heat damage. Slings with polyester or Cordura covers should not be exposed to temperatures above 82C/180F Nomex covered Aramid Sparkeater Slings should not be exposed to temperatures over 149C/300F. Slings with Spectra Olefin cores should not be exposed to temperatures above 65C/150F. K-Spec Core Slings should not be exposed to temperatures above 82C/180F. Cold temperature exposure down to minus 40C/minus 40F do not affect the strength of the products. Other temperatures should be referred to the manufacturer. Slings using aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, or mists of alkalis or acids are present. Twin-Path Lifting Slings, Roundslings, and any fittings attached should be the subject of frequent and regular inspections. In addition to the initial inspection by a competent person and frequent written inspections, the slings should be visually inspected before each use. Written inspections should be performed each 30 days and documents of such inspections by a competent person shall be kept on file in the safety department of the plant or site where used. Inspections may be done more often based on frequency of use, severity of conditions, experience of past service life. Slings should be examined throughout their length for abrasion, cuts, heat damage, fitting distortion or damage, tag legibility, and if any doubts are held by the inspector, the sling should be removed from service. Core integrity is determined by hand inspection of the entire sling or by fiber optic light transfer if this type of tell-tail is installed in the sling. If a deterioration is found, the sling must be removed from service and returned to the manufacturer for evaluation. Slings removed from service that are not capable of repair should be destroyed and rendered completely unfit for future use. Abrasion, heat damage or cuts to the cover may indicate a loss of strength to the load core and these slings should not be used until evaluated by the manufacturer. At area of damage, cover should be opened and the core yarns counted and visually inspected. Proof Testing Procedures for Complete Twin-Path Sling Products. Complete slings shall be tested using pins of at least 2 diameter or larger material. Proof tests shall consist of pulling the slings to twice their rated capacity as shown in the appropriate tables. Slings shall be held at the proof test limit for a period of 15 seconds and then the tension may be released.
9.1.4 9.1.5 9.1.6 9.1.7
9.1.8 9.1.9 10.0 10.1.1 10.1.2
15

SECTION 6.2 MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 Determine the weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the sling. Select a sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment. Slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity. Consideration shall be given to angle of lift which may affect the lifting capacity. Diameters of pins and sharp edges also may affect the capacity of the lifting sling. Slings used in a choker shall not be forced to tighten around the load by pounding with hammers or other objects. Choker hitches are the least effective way to use a sling based on capacity. Two chokers should be used to balance the load. One choker in the center of the load may create an unbalanced situation which could lead to an accident. Slings used in a basket hitch must have the load balanced to prevent slippage and accidents. Slings used with fittings shall be compatible with the fittings used. The lifting capacity shall be rated at the lower of the fitting or sling. Fitting openings shall be of the proper shape and size to assure that the sling will seat properly. Slings shall be protected from cutting and sharp edges. All sharp protrusions and abrasive surfaces will be kept from contact with the sling. Where poor situations develop padding shall be interjected between the sling and the load. Slings should not be attached to the pin area of shackles. This practice leads to bunching and cutting of the sling and premature failure. Slings shall not be dragged on the floor or across other surfaces which may damage the sling. Slings shall not be twisted or tied in knots to shorten. Slings shall not be pulled from under loads resting on the sling. Do not drop objects on slings or run over them with vehicles. Slings which are damaged shall not be used. Sling hitches must provide control of the load. Portions of the human body shall be kept from between the sling and the load and from between the sling and any attachment to lifting devices such as hooks. Personnel shall stand clear of suspended loads. Personnel shall not ride on the sling or suspended loads. Avoid snatch or shock loading. Twisting and kinking of the legs of the sling shall be avoided. It is important to rotate the sling bearing points to prevent cover and core damage from extended wear. Rotating sling bearing points will greatly increase sling life. Loads applied to the hook should be centered in the bowl of the hooks. Do not point load the hook. Hooks must be shaped to properly support the sling without bunching. 6.2.21 During lifting with or without the load, all personnel shall be alert for possible snagging. FIGURE 1 Typical Stress-Strain Curves of Representative DuPont Industrial Yarns 6.2.22 The slings should contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity so that the load will not tilt when the load is lifted. 6.2.23 Slings shall be of the proper length so that the angle of the sling to the load does not reduce the rated capacity below the capacity needed to safely lift the load. 6.2.24 Only legibly marked or labeled slings should be used. If the tag is not legible, or missing, the sling should not be used. 6.2.25 Keep labels or tags away from the load, the hook and the angle of choke. 6.2.26 All Slings should be inspected each time before each lift.
6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7
6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15 6.2.16 6.2.17 6.2.18 6.2.19 6.2.20
7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

7.1.1 When not in use, slings should be stored in a clean dry place. Heat sources and non-ventilated places should be avoided. 7.1.2 Chemically active environments can affect the strength of Lifting Slings. Different chemicals will react with different exposure to CoverMax Bulkd Nylon, Dacron Polyester, Kevlar Aramid, Nomex Aramid, and Spectra Olefin. Please see the enclosed tables for reactions of specific chemicals. Aramids are resistant to most ketones, alcohols, dry cleaning solvents and many other organic solvents. Its acid resistance is superior to that of nylon but is not as good as that of polyester. Aramids shows good resistance to alkalis at room temperature, but is degraded by strong alkalis at higher temperatures. Aramids are compatible with fluorine-containing elastomers, resins, and refrigerants at high temperatures, and is resistant to fluorine compounds in concentrations usually encountered in stack gases from metallurgical and rockprocessing operations.
16

The resistance of Aramids to oxides of sulphur at temperatures above the acid dew point is superior to that of polyester. Below the dew point, concentrated sulphuric acid may condense on the fiber and cause a progressive loss in strength. In moderate to strong acid or alkali environments, evaluation of Aramids should be made to ensure that the yarn will perform acceptably before use. Polyester and nylon are not significantly affected by most compounds of the following classes: Alcohols Dry Cleaning Solvents Halogenated Hydrocarbons Ketones Soaps and Synthetic Detergents Water (Including Sea Water) Polyester also shows good to excellent resistance to: Aqueous solutions of most weak acids at the boil, and to most strong acids at room temperature, but is disintegrated by concentrated (95%) sulphuric acid at room temperature. Aqueous solutions of strong alkalis at room temperature, but is degraded at the boil. Oxidizing agents, and is not degraded by bleaching treatments ordinarily used for textiles.
PERCENT STRENGTH RETENTION AFTER 6 MONTHS IMMERSION SPECRA 900
Nylon is not significantly affected by most aldehydes, alkalis, ethers, or hydrocarbons, but is deteriorated by dilute acids (e.g., hydrochloric acid and sulphuric acid in 10% concentrations at room temperature cause a noticeable loss in breaking strength in 10 hours). Solvents for nylon include: Concentrated formic acid Phenolic compounds at room temperature Calcium chloride in methanol at room temperature Hot solutions of calcium chloride in: Glacial Acetic Acid Ethylene Chlorohydrin Ethylene Glycol Hot solutions of zinc chloride in methanol Benzyl alcohol at the boil Aramids are resistant to most weak acids and alkalis, ketones, alcohols, hydrocarbons, oils and dry cleaning solvents. Strong acids and bases and sodium hypo-chlorite bleach attack aramids, particularly at high temperatures of high concentrations. Spectra has excellent chemical resistance.
AGENT
Sea Water 10% Detergent Solution Hydraulic Fluid Kerosene Gasoline Toluene Perchlorethylene Glacial Acetic Acid 1M Hydrochloric Acid 5M Sodium Hydroxide Ammonium Hydroxide (29%) Hypophosphite Solution (10%) Clorox
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 91
8.0 FIBER CHARACTERISTICS

(Using Nylon as a basis of 1.0)
GENERIC FIBER TYPE NYLON POLYESTER POLYPROPYLENE HDPE OLEFIN ARAMID K-SPEC
2.7 2.75 1.26 1.01 .10 .10 10.12 .10 Chars At Chars At Melting Point 460F 480F 330F 297F 800F 297F Critical4 Temperature 180F 180F 180F 150F 300F 180F Cold-Flow (Creep) Negligible Negligible Negligible to High Negligible to High Negligible Negligible 1 Bulk Strength is defined as strength per circumference squared. 2 Working is defined as rope actually in use under a cycling load. 3 Co-efficient of friction is based on reluctance to slip or slide. 4 Critical temperature is defined as the point at which degradation is caused by temperature alone. Cold-Flow (Creep) is defined as a fiber deformation (elongation) due to molecular slippage under a constant steady static loading situation. Fibers that have this inherent characteristic will display extremely low or negligible creep if minor fluctuations occur in the rate and/or frequency of load levels. In rope form, this would apply to polypropylene, and HDPE Olefin Fibers. BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com
Bulk Strength1 1.0 Weight 1.0 Working2 Elastic Elongation 1.0 Co-efficient3 of Friction .10-.12
.9-1.1 1.21 .60 .12-.15
.55 .80 .80 .15-.22
2.8 .85 .10 .08
17
EYE & EYE NYLON WEB SLINGS

TWISTED EYE TYPE 4 (EE) STANDARD STOCK STYLE
TYPE 4 Type 4 slings are the same as Type 3 Slings except the eyes are twisted before sewing. This twisting allows for a better choker hitch and lets the eyes of the sling nest together better on a crane hook when it is used in a basket hitch. Rated capacities in lbs.
EYE & EYE TYPE 3 (EE) SPECIAL ORDER

Type 3 slings are furnished with an eye or loop sewn on each end of the sling in a flat configuration to allow for passage through narrow spaces. Type 3 Slings 3 or wider have tapered eyes unless specified otherwise. TYPE 3
VERTICAL CODE NO. WIDTH () PLY CHOKER BASKET HITCH NOMINAL NOMINAL EYE EYE LENGTH WIDTH L () W ()
EE1-901 EE1-902
1 2 3 4 6 8 1 2 3 4 6 8 1 2 3 4 6 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4
1,600 3,200 4,800 6,400 9,600 12,800 3,200 6,400 8,900 11,500 16,300 19,200 5,000 10,000 14,900 19,800 29,800 39,700 1,200 2,400 3,600 4,800 2,400 4,800 6,700 8,600 4,200 8,000 12,000 16,000
1,200 2,400 3,600 4,800 7,200 9,600 2,400 4,800 6,500 8,700 12,200 14,400 3,800 7,500 11,100 14,800 22,300 29,700 900 1,800 2,700 3,600 1,800 3,200 4,900 6,500 3,200 6,000 9,000 12,000
3,200 6,400 9,600 12,800 19,200 25,600 6,400 12,800 17,800 23,000 32,600 38,400 10,000 20,000 29,800 39,600 59,600 79,400 2,400 4,800 7,200 9,600 4,800 9,600 13,300 17,300 8,400 16,000 24,000 32,000
2,800 5,500 8,300 11,100 16,600 22,200 5,500 11,100 15,400 20,000 28,300 33,600 8,700 17,500 26,000 34,600 52,100 69,400 2,100 4,200 6,200 8,300 4,200 8,300 11,500 15,000 7,300 14,000 21,000 28,000
2,300 4,500 6,800 9,000 13,600 4,500 9,000 12,600
1,600 3,200 4,800 6,400 9,600 3,200 6,400 8,900
9 9 12 12 12 18 9 9 12 12 15 18 12 12 15 15 18 24 9 9 12 12 9 9 12 12 12 12 15 15
1 2 1-1/2 2 2 3 1 2 1-1/2 2 2 3 1 2 1-1/2 2 3 4 1 2 1-1/2 2 1 2 1-1/2 2 1 2 1-1/2 2
ONE PLY Heavy Duty
EE1-903 EE1-904 EE1-906 EE1-908 EE2-901 EE2-902
18,100 12,800
TWO PLY Heavy Duty
EE2-903 EE2-904 EE2-906 EE2-908 EE4-901 EE4-902
16,300 11,500 23,100 16,300 26,800 19,200 7,000 5,000 14,000 10,000 20,800 14,900 24,200 19,800 41,700 29,800 55,500 39,700 1,700 3,400 5,100 6,800 3,400 6,800 9,400 12,200 5,800 11,200 1,200 2,400 3,600 4,800 2,400 4,800 6,700 8,600 4,200 8,000
FOUR PLY Heavy Duty
EE4-903 EE4-904 EE4-906 EE4-908 EE1-601
ONE PLY Light Duty
EE1-602 EE1-603 EE1-604 EE2-601
TWO PLY Light Duty
EE2-602 EE2-603 EE2-604 EE4-601
FOUR PLY Light Duty
EE4-602 EE4-603 EE4-604
16,800 12,000 22,400 16,000
WARNING: Horizontal sling angles less than 30 shall not be used. NOTE: 1) Slings 3 and wider have tapered eyes unless otherwise specified. 2) See Ordering and Measuring Details on page 20. 3) All slings are made with yellow treated nylon web unless otherwise specified. 4) Please specify length.
WARNING
18
ENDLESS NYLON WEB SLING

ENDLESS SLING TYPE 5
Type 5 Slings are the strongest, most versatile, and least expensive slings for general usage available. They are simple in construction, consisting of an endless loop of webbing overlapped and sewn together, and they have a wide variety of uses and hitch configurations. Rated capacities in lbs.
VERTICAL CODE NO. WIDTH () PLY CHOKER BASKET HITCH TAPER EYE EYE LENGTH WIDTH L () W ()
EN1-901
1 2 3 4 6 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 31 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3,200 6,400 8,600 11,500 16,300 6,100 12,200 16,300 20,700 28,600 8,000 16,000 24,700 28,700 40,700 2,400 4,800 7,200 9,600 4,800 9,600 11,700 15,500
2,500 5,000 6,900 9,200 13,000 4,900 9,800 13,000 16,500 23,000 6,400 12,800 19,800 23,000 32,500 1,900 3,800 5,200 6,900 3,800 7,700 9,400 12,400
6,400 12,800 17,200 23,000 32,600 12,200 24,400 32,600 41,400 57,200 16,000 32,000 49,400 57,400 81,400 4,800 9,600 14,400 19,200 9,600 19,200 33,400 31,000
5,500 11,100 15,000 20,100 28,500 10,600 21,300 28,200 36,200 50,000 14,000 28,000 42,800 50,200 71,200 4,200 8,300 12,500 16,600 8,300 16,600 20,300 27,100
4,500 9,000 12,000
3,200 6,400 8,600
1 1-1/2 2 2 1 1-1/2 2 3 * * * * 1 1-1/2 2 1 1-1/2 2
9 12 12 15 9 12 12 15 * * * * 9 12 12 9 12 12
ONE PLY Heavy Duty
EN1-902 EN1-903 EN1-904 EN1-906 EN2-901 EN2-902 EN2-903 EN2-904 EN2-906 EN3-901 EN3-902 EN3-903 EN3-904 EN3-906 EN1-601
16,100 11,500 22,800 16,300 8,500 6,100 17,000 12,200 23,000 16,300 28,900 20,700 40,000 28,600 11,200 8,000 22,400 16,000 34,900 24,700 40,100 28,700 56,900 40,700 3,400 6,800 10,200 13,600 6,800 13,600 2,400 4,800 7,200 9,600 4,800 9,600
TWO PLY Heavy Duty
THREE PLY Heavy Duty
ONE PLY Light Duty
EN1-602 EN1-603 EN1-604 EN2-601
TWO PLY Light Duty
EN2-602 EN2-603 EN2-604
16,500 11,700 21,700 15,500
WARNING: Horizontal sling angles less than 30 shall not be used. NOTE: 1) Please specify when sling is to be tapered at hook contact area. 2) Three ply slings are tapered by special request only. 3) Wider Endless slings are available for special applications. 4) Please specify length.
See Wear Pads Pages 8, 9

WARNING
19
TRIANGLE AND CHOKER WEB SLINGS

TRIANGLE AND CHOKER SLING TYPE 1 (TC)
Type 1 Slings can be used in a choker hitch or a basket hitch, and will give extended life where damage to the ends of a sling is a problem.
TRIANGLE AND TRIANGLE SLING TYPE 2 (TT)

Type 2 Slings are the same as Type 1 Slings except that they have metal triangles on both ends and are limited to vertical or basket hitches. Rated capacities in lbs.
VERTICAL CODE NO. WIDTH () PLY CHOKER** BASKET HITCHES
1-902 1-903 **Choker rated capacities apply to Type 1 slings only. Steel fittings are standard on both 1-ply and 2-ply slings. Aluminum fittings are available up to 6: in 1-ply capacities. 1-904 1-906 1-908 1-910 1-912 2-902 2-903
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 2 3 4 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
3,200 4,800 6,400 9,600 12,800 16,000 19,200 6,400 8,900 11,200 16,300 20,500 24,000 26,900 2,400 3,600 4,800 4,800 6,700 8,600
2,400 3,600 4,800 7,200 9,600 12,000 14,400 5,000 6,900 9,000 13,100 16,400 19,200 21,500 1,900 2,900 3,800 3,800 5,300 6,900
6,400 9,600 12,800 19,200 25,600 32,000 38,400 12,800 17,800 22,400 32,600 41,000 48,000 53,700 4,800 7,200 9,600 9,600 13,300 17,300
5,500 8,300 11,100 16,600 22,200 27,700 33,200 11,100 15,400 19,400 28,300 35,500 41,600 46,500 4,200 6,200 8,300 8,300 11,500 15,000
4,500 6,800 9,000 13,600 18,100 22,600 27,100 9,000 12,600 15,800 23,100 29,000 33,900 38,000 3,400 5,100 6,800 6,800 9,400 12,200
3,200 4,800 6,400 9,600 12,800 16,000 19,200 6,400 8,900 11,200 16,300 20,500 24,000 26,900 2,400 3,600 4,800 4,800 6,700 8,600
ONE PLY Heavy Duty
FOR CODE # PLEASE SPECIFY TYPE TC OR TYPE TT Example: TC1-602 X 6 ft.
TWO PLY Heavy Duty
2-904 2-906 2-908 2-910 2-912 1-602 1-603 1-604 2-602 2-603 2-604
ONE PLY Light Duty TWO PLY Light Duty
WARNING: Horizontal sling angles less than 30 shall not be used.
UNILINK
Unilink is both a Triangle and Choker Fitting Forged Steel for Single or Two Ply 2-3-4 inch Wide Web Slings. No more old fashioned TT (Type 1) or TC (Type 2) web slings with their higher costs and limited usage. The webbing always tries to slide around the corner of the bottom or bearing side of the triangles or out of the shallow groove on the cross bar of the chokers. Unilink advantages over most steel end fittings: Positive webbing entrapment in the bearing slot. Top curved bearing area for the hook or web in choker hitch guides the choker action carefully along sling line axis. Acts as a choker fitting for either end or direction. Larger hook opening than triangles or chokers. Forged medium carbon steel for strength and ductility. Smooth, rounded forging profile to protect webbing. Zinc dichromate plate for corrosion resistance. Designed for both single or two ply slings. Unilink (UU) slings are less expensive than aluminum or steel triangle and choker (TC) slings. In some cases they cost less than triangle and triangle (TT) slings. In all cases they can be rewebbed many times, for either one or two ply.
WEB WIDTH INCHES NEW UNILINK INCHES WT. D L LBS. PAIR OF UNILINKS WT. LBS. STEEL TRIANGLES & CHOKERS INCHES TRIANGLE CHOKER D L WT. LBS. WT. LBS. TRIANGLE & CHOKER WT. LBS.
2 3 4
2 3 4
3-7/8 5-1/4 6-7/8
1.6 3.2 5.0
3.2 6.4 10.0
1-3/4 2-3/8 2 3-5/16 2-3/8 4
.9 1.7 3.1
2.0 3.6 5.7
2.9 5.3 8.8
WARNING
20
SPECIAL REVERSED EYE & WIDE LIFT SLINGS

SPECIAL REVERSED EYE SLING
These slings are toughest and most durable of all web slings. They have exceptional strength and incorporate a special abrasion resistant material that completely covers both sides of the sling body and eyes. Special Reversed Eye Slings work well in choker, basket and vertical hitches, and where sling usage is constant or tends to be abusive. They will outlast all other web sling types.
VERTICAL CODE NO. PLY TYPE WIDTH () CHOKER BASKET
RE1-902 RE1-904 RE1-906 RE2-902 RE2-904 RE2-906 RE1-602 RE1-604 RE1-606 RE2-602 RE2-604 RE2-606
One Ply Heavy Duty One Ply Heavy Duty One Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty One Ply Light Duty One Ply Light Duty One Ply Light Duty Two Ply Light Duty Two Ply Light Duty Two Ply Light Duty
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
4,500 7,700 11,000 6,500 13,000 20,000 3,600 6,800 8,000 5,200 10,500 14,400
3,600 6,200 8,800 5,200 10,400 16,000 2,900 5,400 6,400 4,200 8,400 11,500
9,000 15,400 22,000 13,000 26,000 40,000 7,200 13,600 16,000 10,400 21,000 28,800
ATTACHED-EYE LOAD BALANCER SLING

These are designed for applications where you need a wide sling for load stability and for proper handling of fragile or highly finished surfaces. They have a lower rated capacity when the Wide Body Basket. Eyes are constructed to fit properly on small hoist hooks and are reinforced for longer life.
BASKET HITCH
STOCK NO. WIDTH (INCHES) PLY
Normal Eye Width W (Inches)
Normal Eye Length L (Inches)
WLA-1-906 WLA-1-908 WLA-1-910 WLA-1-912 WLA-1-916 WLA-1-920 WLA-1-924
6 8 10 12 16 20 16
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
5,200 5,200 5,200 5,200 8,700 8,700 8,700
4,200 4,200 4,200 4,200 7,100 7,100 7,100
3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 5,000 5,000 5,000
1 1 1 1 2 2 2
9 12 15 18 24 24 24
WIDE LIFT SLING

These slings are wide slings (6 through 24 width), intended for basket hitch usage.They offer excellent load stability and low bearing pressure to the material being lifted.
VERTICAL CODE NO. PLY TYPE SLING WIDTH () CHOKER BASKET
WL1-906 WL1-908 WL1-910 WL1-912 WL1-916 WL1-920 WL1-924 WL2-906 WL2-908 WL2-910 WL2-912 WL2-916 WL2-920 WL2-924
One Ply Heavy Duty One Ply Heavy Duty One Ply Heavy Duty One Ply Heavy Duty One Ply Heavy Duty One Ply Heavy Duty One Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty Two Ply Heavy Duty
6 8 10 12 16 20 24 6 8 10 12 16 20 24
15,400 20,400 25,600 30,800 38,000 45,000 52,000 28,600 38,000 47,600 57,200 61,500 63,000 70,000
21
WEB SLING SAVER SHACKLES AND HOOKS

Designed with No-Slip surface that: Eliminates bunching effect caused by traditional shackles. Reduces sling tendency to slide. Shackles available in sizes 1-1/2 to 5 tons. Hooks available in sizes 1-1/2, 3 and 5 tons. Increased radius of bow/eye gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an increased area for load distribution, thus: Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency by at last 15% as compared to standard anchor and chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved. Allows better load distribution on internal fibers. Design factor of 5 to 1. Shackles available in both a Screw Pin and Bolt, Nut and cotter pin configuration. Bolt (Pin) has a larger diameter that provides better load distribution. Each shackle and hook has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it. All Alloy construction. Fatigue rated to 20,000 cycles at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit.
S-280 WEB CONNECTOR
WEB CONNECTOR LINE

Web Connector line is designed to connect Synthetic Web Slings and Synthetic Round Slings to conventional hardware.
ROUND SLING SIZE (NO.) WEBBING WIDTH (IN.) WEB SLINGS* EYE WIDTH (IN.) S-280 WORKING LOAD LIMIT** (TONS) S-280 STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) REPLACEMENT KIT S-4280 STOCK NO. PLY
S-4280 REPLACEMENT KIT
1&2 2 2 2 3-1/4 1021681 1.5 1021820 3 3 1.5 2 4-1/2 1021690 1.9 1021821 4 4 2 2 6-1/4 1021700 2.9 1021822 5&6 6 3 2 8-1/2 1021709 5.1 1021823 *Type III (Eye and Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply. **NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
WEB SLING SHACKLE

Web Sling Shackle is designed to connect Synthetic Web Slings and Synthetic Round Slings to eyebolts, pad eyes and lifting lugs.
ROUND SLING SIZE (NO.) WEBBING WIDTH (IN.) WEB SLINGS* EYE WIDTH (IN.) S-281 WORKING LOAD LIMIT** (TONS) S-281 STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) PLY
S-281 WEB SLING SHACKLE
1&2 2 2 2 3-1/4 1021048 1.2 3 3 1.5 2 4-1/2 1021057 1.5 4 4 2 2 6-1/4 1021066 2.5 5&6 6 3 2 8-1/2 1021075 4.3 *Type III (Eye and Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply. **NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
WEB SLING NOMINAL SIZE (NO.) ROUND SLING SIZE (NO.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (TONS) HOOK ID CODE CODE # WS-320-A S.C. CODE # WSL-320A WITH LATCH S-4320 REPLACEMENT LATCH KIT STOCK NO.
WS-320 A
1 2 3 320 AN - Alloy Steel
1 2 3
1-1/2 3 5
FA HA IA
1022701 1022712 1022723
1022706 1022717 1022728
1096374 1096468 1096515
WEB SLING Web slings shall not be construsted or bunched between the ears of a clevis or shackle, or in a hook. ROUND SLINGS The round shall not be constricted or buched between the ears oaf aclevis or shackle ,or in a hook. The openingof fittings shall be proper shape and size to ensure that the fittings will seat properly on the round sling. The Round Slings shall not be constricted or bunched between the ears of a clevis or shackle, or in a hook. When a Round Sling is used with a shackle, it is recominded that it be used (rigged) in the bow of the shackle. See Pages 10, 11, 12 For Other Hardware
SYNTHETIC SLINGS RATED LOAD Folding, Bunching or Pinching of synthetic slinggs,which occurs when used with shackles, hooks or other applications will reduce the rated load.
When connecting web or round slings, use conventional fittings with: 1. Large Radius 2. Straight Pins 3. Pads or use special fittings designed for synthetic slings.
22
MULTI-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS

RATED CAPACITY LBS. CODE NO. PEAR LINK OBLING LINK HOOK SIZE WEB WIDTH
DOS1-601 DOS1-901 DOS1-602 DOS1-902 DOS2-601 DOS2-901 DOS2-602 DOS2-902 DOE1-601 DOE1-901 DOE1-602 DOE1-902 DOE2-601 DOE2-901 DOE2-602 DOE2-902 DEN1-601 DEN1-901 DEN1-602 DEN1-902 DEN2-601 DEN2-901 DEN2-602 DEN2-902
2100 2800 4200 5500 4200 5500 8300 11,100 2100 2800 4200 5500 4200 5500 8300 11,100 4200 5600 8400 11,000 8400 11,000 16,600 22,200
1700 2300 3400 4500 3400 4500 6800 9000 1700 2300 3400 4500 3400 4500 6800 9000 3400 4600 6800 9000 6800 9000 13,600 18,000
1200 1600 2400 3200 2400 3200 4800 6400 1200 1600 2400 3200 2400 3200 4800 6400 2400 3200 4800 6400 4800 6400 9600 12,800
1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8
1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 3/4 1 1 1
3/4 TON 1 TON 1-1/2 TON 2 TON 1-1/2 TON 2 TON 3 TON 5 TON
1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2
NOTE: 1) Oblong link will be used unless pear shaped is specified. 2) 3 and 4-leg slings available.
LIFCO LOAD GRIPPERS

For WEB TIE-DOWNS See Pages 122-127 118-123
23
SLING CHARACTERISTICS
FOR INFORMATION ON:
Sling Angle Loading Effects of Chemicals Safe Use Inspection SEE PAGES 21,22,23 SEE FOLLOWING PAGES
RATED CAPACITY
The term Rated Capacity, as used in this catalog represents the ratio of the minimum breaking strength divided by a safety factor of five. The rated capacities in our catalog apply to a new and unused sling, in a straight pull, under ideal sling conditions, and ideal test conditions. NOTE: DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES EXCEED RATED CAPACITY.
ELONGATION
Web slings will stretch when loaded, and this stretch is measured as a percent of the sling length with no load. LIFCO Nylon Slings stretch about seven percent at their rated capacity, and our polyester slings stretch about one-half that much at their rated capacity. The elongation may vary with web and sling construction. Sling will recoil and cause injury or death if released under load.
TEMPERATURE
Synthetic web slings should be not be used where they will be exposed to temperatures over 180 F.
TYPES OF SLING WEBBING

NYLONSlings made of nylon web are by far the most popular and best suited slings for general usage. Nylon is the strongest material available for web sling usage and it has elastic properties that are desirable in many instances. Nylon slings are not affected by grease or oil and have good chemical resistance. (See Chemical Information Chart on page 22).Their stretch at rated capacity is approximately 7 percent, and their temperature limit is 180F. POLYESTERSlings made of polyester should be used when acid conditions exist, or a minimum of stretch is desired. Their stretch at rated capacity is approximately 1/2 that of nylon slings and they are good in most chemical environments except concentrated sulphuric acid, aldehydes, and ethers. Polyester web also has a temperature limit of 180F.
TREATMENT FOR ABRASION RESISTANCE

All slings are treated with yellow latex for abrasion resistance unless otherwise specified. Wear Pads should be used to prevent abrasion and cutting.
HOW TO ORDER
PLEASE SPECIFY: 1. Quantity 2. Code Number 3. Sling Length Pull to Pull 4. Sling Type Number 5. Nylon or Polyester Material 6. Note If Untreated Material Is Desired
EXAMPLE:
2 ea.
EE
1
Number of Plies
904
Width of Web
12 FT.
Length of Sling
TYPE 4
Sling Type
NYLON SLING
Web Material
Sling Configuration
Strength of Web
24
IDENTIFYING WEAR AND ABUSE and SLING CARE

These are some of the most common types of web sling damage caused by abuse and misuse. When you see any of these problems during your regular inspection, stop. Replace the sling immediately because the damage is done. Never attempt to mend the sling yourself and, more so, never attempt to lift with these slings. Whether a sling is damaged from improper use or normal wear, the same rule applies in all cases: always cut the sling eyes and discard the sling right away when you see the damage. Only with proper working slings can you take a load off your mind.
TENSILE BREAK
The distinguishing sign of a tensile break is a frayed appearance close to the point of failure or damage.This usually happens when a sling is loaded beyond its existing strength. The photo shows an example of a sling pulled to destruction on a testing machine. You an avoid tensile breaks by never overloading your sling.
CUT
You an easily see a cut in your sling when you see a clean break in the webbing structure or fibers. This usually results when a sling contacts a sharp object or unprotected edge of a load.This can happen anywhere on the sling body or eyes. Many slings feature Red Guard warning yarns to alert you of serious cuts. One way you can avoid cuts from contacting sharp corners is to use wear pads on the sling to protect the fabric. See page 20 for details.
CUT AND TENSILE DAMAGE

A good example is the photo shown here. It shows what can happen when you use a sling thats already been cut by a sharp object along one edge of the sling body. The cut dramatically reduces lifting capacity, and continued use will ultimately lead to sling failure, usually at a load far below the slings rated capacity. The solution, obviously, is to never use a sling after its been cut.
ABRASION DAMAGE
Anytime you see frayed fibers on the surface exposing the picks, or cross fibers, of the webbing that hold the load-bearing (lengthwise) fibers in place, its abrasion damage. The most common abrasion damage occurs either when the sling slips while in contact with a load during a lift or when the sling is pulled from under a load. When you see the Red Guard warning yarns exposed, its your signal that serious damageand loss of lifting capacityhas occurred. We recommend that slings with any damage to loadbearing fibers be discarded. Wear pads are one way to avoid this damage.
ACID DAMAGE
Its true nylon and polyester webbing are stable when exposed to many common chemicals, but they should never be exposed to any strong acids or corrosive liquids whenever possible. The same is true for metal fittings on slings. Example 1 (top photo).This is what happens when sulfuric acid, like car battery acid is heated to the boiling point and dropped on nylon webbing. The charring on the surface fibers deteriorates the sling and will continue to get worse, severely affecting the webbing strength. Example 2 (bottom photo). This is what happens when nylon webbing is immersed in sulfuric acid at room temperature for three weeks, resulting in major damage. Note the fibers are softened and swollen, and the entire fabric is grossly distorted, virtually destroying the webbing.You an help prevent this damage by never storing slings in areas where they may be exposed to acid or acid fumes, which are as destructive as liquid.
WHY PROPER CLEANING AND STORAGE IS VITAL

All it takes is a little ordinary dirt, grit and grime to reduce the overall strength and life of your sling. Its very easy for these contaminants to penetrate between fibers anytime the webbing bends, pulls tight against loads, or stretches and relaxes during loading and unloading. Once in place, they grind against the fibers, reducing their strength and useful life. Thats why its a good idea to properly store your slings when theyre out of service and to clean them when they become soiled. When slings are clean, theyre not only easier to inspect, theyre also stronger and more durable. There are many procedures you an use to clean your slings, depending on how soiled they are. For every day dirt and grime, you can clean with soap or detergent and water for good results. Whatever cleaning method you use, always hang your washed slings in a dry, sheltered place. Always keep slings from prolonged contact with direct sunlight during drying and storage because ultraviolet rays can degrade synthetic fibers. Nylon or polyester slings that have been dyed any color but white will fade somewhat due to washing, but this in no way affects the strength of the webbing. Both nylon and polyester webbing have an extremely low water absorption rate, making them flexible, light and easy to handle even after prolonged soaking in water. Both show excellent resistance to mold, mildew and fungus, although dirt that accumulates on slings may support their growth, and thats why regular cleaning is very important. BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com
25
HOW TO MATCH A SLING TO THE JOBSAFETY CHECKLIST

USE WEAR PADS TO PROTECT SLINGS FROM CUTTING
See Pages 8&9
1. DETERMINE RATED CAPACITY

Needed to safely lift your load. Match sling and type hitch on rated capacity chart to equal or exceed your load.
6. DONT PULL SLING FROM UNDER LOAD

The full weight of load on sling can damage sling and reduce performance.
7. AVOID ABRASIVE SURFACES

Dont drag slings on flooring or over equipment.
2. CHECK SLINGTO-LOAD ANGLE

Rated capacities are stated at two sling-to-load angles. 30 for a Choker Hitch and 90 for a Basket Hitch.
4. DANGER! ACIDS AND CAUSTICS!

Dont use nylon sling around acids. Dont use polyester around caustics. Dont use any sling in temperatures over 180.
8. DONT KNOT A SLING

Slings should never be joined by knots. Tying knots seriously weakens sling life and capacity.
5. SLING LOAD 9. PROTECT LOAD AND AND SLINGS WITH GUARDS GUARDS
Watch sharp corners, edges and Watch for corners, edges and protrusions. protrusions.
3. BALANCE IS IMPORTANT
Use more than one sling if necessary for balance. Avoid load slipage. Theres safety in sling numbers.
CHEMICAL INFORMATION CHART

Acids Alcohols Aldehydes Strong Alkalis Dry Bleaching Cleaning Agents Solvents Ethers Halogenated HydroCarbons HydroCarbons Ketones Oils Crude Oils Lubricating Soap & Detergents Water & Seawater Weak Alkalis
POLYESTER * OK NO ** NYLON NO OK OK OK *Disintegrated by concentrated sulfuric acid **Degraded by strong alkalis at elevated temperatures
OK NO
OK OK
NO OK
OK OK
OK OK
OK OK
OK OK
OK OK
OK OK
OK OK
OK OK
26
WEB SLING SAFETY AND INSPECTION

CALCULATING THE LOAD ON EACH LEG OF A SLING
As the included angle between the legs of a sling increases, the load on each leg increases. The effect is the same whether a single sling is used as a basket, or two slings are used with each in a straight pull, as with a 2-legged bridle. Anytime pull is exerted at an angle on a leg or legs of a sling, the load per leg can be LOAD determined by using the data in the table at left. Proceed as follows to calculate this load and LEG FACTOR determine the rated capacity required of the sling or slings, needed for a lift. ANGLE (Degrees) 1. First, divide the total load to be lifted by the number of legs to be used. This provides the 90 1.000 load per leg if the lift were being made with all legs lifting vertically. 85 1.003 2. Determine the angle between the legs of the sling and the horizontal. 80 1.015 3. Then MULTIPLY the load per leg (as computed in No. 1 above) by the Load Factor for 75 1.035 the leg angle being used (from the table at left) - to compute the ACTUAL LOAD on each leg 70 1.064 for this lift and angle. THE ACTUAL LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED THE RATED SLING CAPACI65 1.103 TY. 60 1.154 (Sling angle at 60): 1000 - 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 500 x 1.154 = 577 Ibs. = 55 1.220 ACTUAL LOAD on each leg at the 60 included angle being used. 50 1.305 (Sling angle of 45): 1000 - 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 500 x 1.414 = 707 Ibs. = 45 1.414 ACTUAL LOAD on each leg at the 45 horizontal angle being used. 40 1.555 35 1.743 30 2.000
SAFETY GUIDELINES FOR WEB SLING USE

1. Inspect slings for damage before each use. 2. Slings shall not be exposed to temperatures in excess of the manufacturer's recommendation. (Normally 180F) 3. A sling shall be used that is long enough to provide the maximum practical angle between the sling leg and the horizontal. 4. Slings shall not be shortened with knots, bolts, or similar methods. 5. Twisting and/or kinking the legs of a sling is prohibited. 6. A sling shall not be loaded in excess of its rated capacity. 7 The load shall be centered in the base (bowl) of the hook to prevent point loading. 8. Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced to prevent slippage. 9. A sling shall be padded or protected from edges, corners or protrusions. 10. Hands or fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its load. 11. Each sling shall be securely hitched to its load. 12. The load shall be kept free to move before lifting and shall be kept clear of all obstructions. 13. Shock loading shall be avoided as sling may recoil and cause injury or death. 14. All personnel must stand clear of a suspended load. 15. Don't pull sling from under load, the full weight of the load can damage the sling and reduce performance. 16. Nylon slings shall not be used where acid conditions exist. 17 Polyester slings shall not be used where caustic conditions exist. 18. Polyester and nylon slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 180 degrees F. 19. Aluminum fittings shall not be used where caustic conditions exist. 20. Damaged slings should be replaced not repaired. 21. Avoid abrasive surfaces, don't drag slings on flooring or over equipment. 22. If the red core markers of the webbing can be seen, the sling should be removed from service. 23. Prolonged exposure to ultra-violet light will degrade webbing and weaken sling. 24. Use Common Sense: If a sling looks damaged or its rated capacities not known, don't use it. 25. Slings may recoil if load is unexpectedly released. The recoil may cause injury or death.
REMOVAL CRITERIA
Cited below are removal criteria established by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and the American National Standard Institute Safety Standard. 1. OSHA 1910.184: Criteria for Removal From Service. Synthetic web slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present: (a) acid or caustic burns; (b) melting or charring of any part of the sling surface; (c) snags, punctures, tears or cuts; (d) broken or worn stitches; (e) distortion of fittings. 2. ANSI B30.9-9-5.6.2. Possible Defects. A sling shall be removed from service if any defects, such as the following, are visible: (a) acid or caustic burns; (b) melting or charring of any part of the sling surface; (c) snags, punctures, tears or cuts; (d) broken or worn stitches; (e) wear or elongation exceeding the amount recommended by manufacturer; (f) distortion of fittings; (g) other apparent defects which cause doubt as to the strength of the sling should be referred to the manufacturer for determination. To these we recommend adding the following reasons for removal from service: (a) Distortion of the sling identification tag which renders any portion of it illegible. Riggers must be able to read this vital information easily and quickly; (b) Loading a sling beyond its rated capacity. Anytime a sling has been loaded beyond the tag stated capacitypurposely or inadvertentlyits future usefulness is suspect. While most of the foregoing standards are quite specific regarding some removal criteria, a certain amount of judgment is involved in others. The issue of wear to the sling body, the selvage edge of webbing, and to sling eyes creates the greatest amount of contention. We recommend that any exposure of the RED GUARD warning yarns is sufficient cause to remove a sling from service and destroy it. NOTE: We do not repair or recommend the repair of used slings or tie-down straps. Hardware can be reused if properly inspected and tested.
27
SINGLE LEG WIRE ROPE SLING MECHANICALLY SPLICED

All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. All eye dimensions in inches. Rated capacities basket hitch based on D/d Ratio of 25/1. Rated capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less than the nominal sling diameter. Rated capacities based on design factor of 5. Sling angles less than 30 degrees from horizontal shall not be used.
6 X 19 IWRC IPS
CODE NO. ROPE DIAMETER INCHES
RATED CAPACITIES TONS CHOKER VERTICAL HITCH VERTICAL BASKET
BASKET WITH INCLINED SIDES
EYE DIMENSIONS A B
140EE 1/4 .56 .41 516EE 5/16 .87 .64 380EE 3/8 1.2 .92 716EE 7/16 1.7 1.2 120EE 1/2 2.2 1.6 916EE 9/16 2.8 2.0 580EE 5/8 3.4 2.5 340EE 3/4 4.9 3.6 780EE 7/8 6.6 4.8 100EE 1 8.5 6.3 118EE 1-1/8 10. 7.9 NOTE: Higher Ratings Available with EIPS Wire
1.1 1.7 2.5 3.4 4.4 5.5 6.8 9.7 13. 17. 21.
.97 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.8 4.8 5.9 8.4 11. 15. 18.
.79 1.2 1.8 2.4 3.1 3.9 4.8 6.9 9.3 12. 15.
.56 .87 1.2 1.7 2.2 2.8 3.4 4.9 6.6 8.5 10.
2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 6 7 8 9
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18
6 X 37 IWRC IPS
CODE NO. ROPE DIAMETER INCHES
RATED CAPACITIES TONS VERTICAL CHOKER HITCH VERTICAL BASKET
BASKET WITH INCLINED SIDES
EYE DIMENSIONS A B
114EE 1-1/4 13. 9.7 26. 22. 18. 13. 10 138EE 1-3/8 15. 12. 31. 27. 22. 15. 11 112EE 1-1/2 18. 14. 37. 32. 26. 18. 12 158EE 1-5/8 21. 16. 43. 37. 30. 21. 13 134EE 1-3/4 25. 19. 49. 43. 35. 25. 14 200EE 2 32. 24. 64. 55. 45. 32. 16 214EE 2-1/4 39. 30. 77. 67. 55. 39. 18 212EE 2-1/2 47. 37. 94. 82. 67. 47. 20 NOTE: 1) Please specify length. 2) Larger sizes available. 3) Higher Ratings Available with EIPS Wire B
20 22 24 26 28 32 36 40
LENGTH
FLEMISH EYE SPLICE

In the flemish eye mechanical splice, rope is separated into two parts 3 adjacent strands, and 3 adjacent strands and core.These are then re-laid back in opposite directions to form an eye and secured with pressed metal sleeve.
28
MULTIPLE LEG SLINGS

TWO-LEG BRIDLE
Angles measured from horizontal. Rated capacity for two-legged bridles, whether used as chokers or with hooks or other end fixtures, are affected by rigging angles, the same as straight slings in basket hitches. Note reduction in rated capacity as legs spread to wider lifting connections, or for unbalanced loads. For other applications contact us.
RATED CAPACITY (TON 2000 LBS.) CODE NO. ROPE DIAMETER RECOMMENDED MINIMUM LENGTH
PLEASE SPECIFY LENGTH
1402L 5162L 3802L 7162L 1202L 9162L 5802L 3402L 7802L 1002L 1182L 1142L 1382L 1122L 1582L 1342L 2002L
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4 2
1 6 1 8 1 10 2 4 2 6 2 10 3 4 3 8 4 4 5 5 10 6 6 7 7 6 9 9 2 12
.97 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.8 4.8 5.9 8.4 11. 15. 18. 22. 27. 32. 37. 43. 55.
.79 1.2 1.8 2.4 3.1 3.9 4.8 6.9 9.3 12. 15. 18. 22. 26. 30. 35. 45.
.56 .87 1.2 1.7 2.2 2.8 3.4 4.9 6.6 8.5 10. 13. 15. 18. 21. 25. 32.
THREE-LEG BRIDLE
Angles measured from horizontal. Rated capacity for 3 and 4 legged bridles are based on equal load for each leg and the sling angle being the smallest angle measured between any sling leg and the horizontal plane of the load. For other applications, contact us.
Reduce Rated Capacity for Unbalanced Loads
1403L 5163L 3803L 7163L 1203L 9163L 5803L 3403L 7803L 1003L 1183L 1143L 1383L 1123L 1583L 1343L
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4
1 6 1 8 1 10 2 4 2 6 2 10 3 4 3 8 4 4 5 5 10 6 6 7 7 6 9 9 2
1.5 2.3 3.2 4.4 5.7 7.2 8.8 13. 17. 22. 27. 33. 40. 48. 55. 64.
1.2 1.8 2.6 3.6 4.6 5.8 7.2 10. 14. 18. 22. 27. 33. 39. 45. 52.
.84 1.3 1.9 2.5 3.3 4.1 5.1 7.3 9.9 13. 16. 19. 23. 27. 32. 37.
FOUR-LEG BRIDLE (SEE 3-Leg Description)

1404L 5164L 3804L 7164L 1204L 9164L 5804L 3404L 7804L 1004L 1184L 1144L 1384L 1124L
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2
1 6 1 8 1 10 2 4 2 6 2 10 3 4 3 8 4 4 5 5 10 6 6 7 7 6
1.9 3.0 4.3 5.9 7.6 9.5 12. 17. 23. 30. 36. 44. 54. 63.
1.6 2.5 3.5 4.8 6.2 7.8 9.6 14. 19. 24. 30. 36. 44. 52.
1.1 1.7 2.5 3.4 4.4 5.5 6.8 9.7 13. 17. 21. 26. 31. 37.
29
PIPE LIFTING SLINGS

TEA CUP PIPE CARRIER
An efficient way to handle concrete water and sewer pipes. The Caldwell Tea Cup Pipe Carrier will save you time and money. With three sizes available these tea cups will handle from 3/4 to 1-1/2 cable, and lifts up to 15 tons.
CODE NO. USE WITH CABLE RATED CAPACITY TONS A B C DIMENSIONS, IN. D E F G
PC-3/4 PC-3/4 PC-1 PC-1 PC-1 PC-1-1/2
3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2
4.9 4.9 8.5 8.5 8.5 15.0
5-9/16 5-9/16 6 6 6 8
2 2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 3
2-1/8 2-1/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 3-1/4
1-1/8 4-11/16 1-7/8 1-1/8 4-11/16 1-7/8 1-3/8 5-5/8 2 1-3/8 5-5/8 2 1-3/8 5-5/8 2 1-5/8 7-5/8 3
1-1/8 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-5/8
TEA CUP SLINGS TYPE LS

An efficient way to handle concrete water and sewer pipes. The Caldwell Tea Cup Pipe Carrier will save you time and money. With three sizes available these tea cups will handle from 3/4 to 1-1/2 cable, and lifts up to 15 tons.
CODE NO. WIRE ROPE DIAMETER LENGTH, L AFTER SWAGE DIM., IN. A B
1.Drop pipe carrier lifting sling through hole in pipe.
LS-3/4 LS-7/8 LS-1 LS-1-1/8 LS-1-1/4 LS-1-1/2
3/4 7/8 1 1-1/* 1-1/4 1-1/2
5 0 STD 5 0 STD 5 0 STD 5 0 STD 5 0 STD 5 0 STD
3.25 3.86 4.36 4.81 5.42 6.52
1.55 1.80 2.05 2.30 2.56 3.00
PIPE CHOKERS TYPES TH AND LH

CODE NO. CODE NO. WIRE DIAMETER CHOKER RWL TONS
2.Align and insert tea cup pipe carrier into lifting sling.
TH 380 TH120 TH916 TH580 TH340 TH780 TH100 TH118 TH114 TH138 TH120
LH 120 LH916 LH580 LH340 LH780 LH100
3/8 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2
.92 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.6 4.8 6.3 7.9 9.7 12 14
TYPE TH
Loop, lifting end; Travelling Choker Hook, body; Loop, load end.
TYPE LH
Loop, lifting end; Ferrule Choker Hook, body; Ferrule, load end.
TYPE LS
3.Lift pipe.
SEE PAGE 41 WELD-ON HOOKS FOR BUCKETS
30
SWAGED SOCKET ASSEMBLIES
SWAGED SOCKET ASSEMBLIES

CODE NO. CODE NO. CODE NO. ROPE DIA. RATED CAPACITY TONS (XIP) PIN DIA. HOLE DIA.
OSOS140 OSOS516 OSOS380 OSOS716 OSOS120 OSOS916 OSOS580 OSOS340 OSOS780 OSOS100 OSOS118 OSOS114 OSOS138 OSOS112 OSOS134 OSOS200 OSOS214 OSOS212
CSCS140 CSCS516 CSCS380 CSCS716 CSCS120 CSCS916 CSCS580 CSCS340 CSCS780 CSCS100 CSCS118 CSCS114 CSCS138 CSCS112 CSCS134 CSCS200 CSCS214 CSCS212
OSCS140 OSCS516 OSCS380 OSCS716 OSCS120 OSCS916 OSCS580 OSCS340 OSCS780 OSCS100 OSCS118 OSCS114 OSCS138 OSCS112 OSCS134 OSCS200 OSCS214 OSCS212
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2
.69 1.05 1.50 2.04 2.66 3.36 4.12 5.88 7.96 10.34 13.00 15.98 19.20 22.80 30.60 39.60 49.40 60.40
.688 .812 .812 1.00 1.00 1.19 1.19 1.38 1.63 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.50 2.75 3.50 3.75 4.25 4.25
.75 .875 .875 1.063 1.063 1.25 1.25 1.438 1.688 2.063 2.313 2.563 2.563 2.813 3.563 3.813 4.312 4.312
31
ADVANCED
TRI-FLEX SLINGS
This sling is the answer to a riggers prayer. It is both strong and lightweight. The TRI-FLEX SLING can be used in choker, basket or vertical lifts. Owners like TRI-FLEX SLINGS because they give the most value for their sling dollar. In many cases TRI-FLEX SLINGS are the lowest cost at initial investment and over the long haul are easier to use and outlast most other types of wire rope slings.TRI-FLEX SLINGS come in all sizes from stock up to 2-1/2 Dia. w/1140 Ton vertical capacity. And the big story is flexibilityThree times more flexible than standard slings. Certified proof testing. Rated load with 5-1 factor. Rated load in tons.
ONE TRI-FLEX SLING - 3 PARTS EIP ROPE

One TRI-FLEX SLING is a complete sling with 3 parts for flexibility.
CODE NO. DIAMETER OF PARTS VERTICAL RATED LOAD FINISHED DIAMETER CODE NO. DIAMETER OF PARTS VERTICAL RATED LOAD FINISHED DIAMETER
TF3140 TF3516 TF3380 TF3716 TF3120 TF3916 TF3580 TF3340 TF3780 TF3100
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1
1.7 2.6 3.6 4.9 6.4 8.0 9.9 14.0 19.0 24.8
1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2
TF3118 TF3114 TF3138 TF3112 TF3158 TF3134 TF3200 TF3214 TF3212
1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2
31.2 38.4 46.0 55.0 63.4 73.0 95.0 118.0 145.0
2-1/4 2-1/2 2-3/4 3 3-1/4 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5
THREE TRI-FLEX SLINGS - 9 PARTS EIP ROPE

9-Part TRI-FLEX SLINGS break down into three 3-part standard TRI-FLEX SLINGS.
9-Part Tri-Flex Sling
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1
4.6 7.0 10.0 13.8 18.0 22.7 27.8 39.7 53.7 69.8
1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4
1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2
87.7 108.0 130.0 154.0 178.0 206.0 267 0 333.0 408.0
4-1/2 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 8 9 10
NINE TRI-FLEX SLINGS - 27 PARTS EIP ROPE

27-Part TRI-FLEX SLINGS break down into three 9-part slings or nine 3-part slings.
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1
12.9 19.9 28.5 38.6 50.0 63.5 78.0 110.0 150.0 195.0
2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 6 7 8
1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2
245.0 302.0 363.0 430.0 499.0 578.0 748.0 934.0 1140.0
9 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 20
Gulf of MexicoOffshore 600 Tons
The TRI-FLEX SYSTEM allows the purchase of multiple part slings for big lifts which can easily be taken apart to provide slings for smaller lifts or for storage.
32
LARGE CAPACITY
GATOR-MAX & GATOR-LAID

parts to the pin). For heavy lifting work this is the most efficient wire rope sling that meets all of the standards. The eyes have the wire ropes (12) laid in parallel so that there is no cross over and then they are wrapped with heavy duty material to keep them in position. This sling was developed to meet conditions specified by the US Navy and the Wire Rope Technical Board Sling Manual. Testing has proven it to be the strongest multi-part wire rope sling when attached to small pins because it has twelve parts of wire rope in the loop in a parallel construction.
GATOR-LAID WIRE ROPE SLING

US Patent #4,240,659 & #5,561,973
GATOR-MAX WIRE ROPE SLING WITH PARALLEL EYES

US Patent #5,561,973 & Patents Pending
This is the strongest multi-part sling with great flexibility. It will develop its full strength on small pins with a D/d ration of 1/1 where D is the sling body and d is the pin. (4/1 D/d when comparing the component
This is identical to the Gator-Max sling with the parallel eyes except it has metal sleeves for the splice connection. This is the product when a big lift but shorter sling is required. It also has twelve parts of wire rope in the loop. The Gator-Flex and Gator-Laid products were developed in conjunction with the off shore oil industry to provide the world's best heavy lift wire rope slings.
GATOR-MAX & GATOR-LAID SLINGS TECHNICAL CHART

FIN. DIA. 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 6 7 8 9 10 COMPONENT PARTS 1/8 3/16 5/32 7/32 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2 STD. EYE SIZE 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 80 90 100 VERTICAL RC TONS 1.4 1.8 2.7 3.7 4.8 7.4 10.5 14.0 19.0 24.0 29.0 42.0 56.0 74.0 92.0 113.0 137.0 162.0 216.0 280.0 350.0 428.0 CHOKER RC TONS .95 1.4 2.0 2.7 3.6 5.5 7.9 11.0 14.0 19.0 22.0 31.0 42.0 55.0 69.0 85.0 102.0 121.0 162.0 210.0 261.0 321.0 BASKET RC TONS 2.7 3.6 5.5 7.4 9.7 14.7 21.0 29.0 38.0 48.0 58.0 83.0 112.0 146.0 184.0 227.0 273.0 323.0 432.0 560.0 700.0 856.0 WGT. PER FT. .26 .40 .59 .77 .99 1.56 2.19 3.15 4.14 5.31 6.48 9.36 12.78 16.65 21.06 26.01 31.50 37.44 51.03 66.51 84.24 104.00
NOTE: Rated Capacity is based on a 5-1 Design Factor. Basket Capacity is based on using a 5/1 D/d ratio where D is the finished NOTE: Rated capacity is based of 5-1 Design Factor. body diameter of the sling and d is the diameteron the load being put into the sling.
33
FOLLOW THESE TIPS FOR SAFE USE OF SLINGS

SLING USE AND SUGGESTIONS
Find Out: Weight of load, shape of load and its balance, how the load is to be lifted, size of the load, overhead room available, environmental conditions. Suggested Proper Sling Based On: Rated load, sling type, kind of sling (Press-Grip, Cable-Laid, Hand-Braided, etc.), special fittings (Links, hooks, thimbles, protectors, etc.). NOTE: Never exceed 30 angle from horizontal. Precautions to Take: Use only for rated load, never Shock load, protect sling from sharp corners, never use sling if damaged or corroded, avoid dragging sling under or over loads, avoid dropping slings from heights, avoid rolling loads with slings, maintain slings by proper storage and lubrication, avoid extreme heat and corrosive atmospheres.
INSPECTION OF SLINGS
Here are some things to look for when inspecting slings: Broken wires, with special attention to ferrules and fittings, condition of the ferrule, corrosion, kinks, abrasion, extreme eye elongation, crushed areas, slippage of strands from ferrule.
STORAGE
Wire rope slings should be stored in an area where they will not be damaged by: Moisture, extreme heat, corrosion (chemical), being run over by vehicular traffic, kinking.
D/d RATIO
Sling eyes are designed to provide what amounts to small inverted slings at the ends of the sling body. Therefore, the width of the eye opening will be affected by the same general forces which apply to legs of a sling rigged as a basket. A sling eye should never be used over a hook or pin with a body diameter larger than the natural width of the eye. Never force an eye onto a hook. On the other hand, the eye should always be used on a hook or pin with at least the nominal diameter of the ropesince applying the D/d Ratio shows an efficiency loss of approximately 50% when the relationship is less than 1/1.
OSHA SAYS
1. Slings and their fittings and fastenings, when in use, shall be inspected daily for evidence of overloading, excessive wear, or damage. Slings found to be defective shall be removed from service. 2. A wire rope sling shall be retired if it develops ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or five broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. 3. Fiber core slings of all grades shall be permanently removed from service if they are exposed to temperatures in excess of 200F. If steel core slings are submitted to temperatures in excess of 400F or minus 60F, the manufacturer shall be consulted. 4. Suitable protection shall be provided between the sling and sharp, unyielding surfaces of the load to be lifted.
CHOKER HITCH RATED CAPACITY ADJUSTMENT

For wire rope slings in choker hitch when angle of choke is less than 120. Percent of sling rated capacity in a choker hitch.
ANGLE OF CHOKE IN DEGREES RATED CAPACITY PERCENT
OVER 120 90 - 120 60 - 89 30 - 59 0 - 29
100 87 74 62 49
If a load is hanging free, the normal choke angle is approximately 135 degrees.When the angle is less than 135 degrees an adjustment in the sling rated capacity must be made. Choker hitches at angles greater than 135 degrees are not recommended since they are unstable. Extreme care should be taken to determine the angle of choke as accurately as possible. In controlled tests, where the angle was less than 120 degrees, the sling body always failed at the point of choke when pulled to destruction. Allowance for this phenomenon must be made anytime a choker hitch is used to shift, turn or control a load, or when the pull is against the choke in a multi-leg lift.
34
SLING SAFETY
LEG ANGLE From Horizontal LOAD FACTOR
CALCULATING THE LOAD ON EACH LEG OF A SLING

As the included angle between the legs of a sling increases, the load on each leg increases. The effect is the same whether a single sling is used as a basket, or two slings are used with each in a straight pull, as with a 2-legged bridle. Anytime pull is exerted at an angle on a leg or legs of a sling, the load per leg can be determined by using the data in Table A. Proceed as follows to calculate this load and determine the rated capacity required of the sling or slings, needed for a lift. 1. First, divide the total load to be lifted by the number of legs to be used. This provides the load per leg if the lift were being made with all legs lifting vertically. 2. Determine the angle between the legs of the sling and the horizontal. 3. Then MULTIPLY the load per leg (as computed in No. 1 above) by the Load Factor for the leg angle being used (from Table A) - to compute the ACTUAL LOAD on each leg for this lift and angle. THE ACTUAL LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED THE RATED SLING CAPACITY. . Thus, in drawing three (sling angle at 60): 1000 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 500 x 1.154 = 577 Ibs. = ACTUAL . LOAD on each leg at the 60 included angle being used. . In drawing four (sling angle of 45): 1000 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 500 x 1.414 = 707 Ibs. = ACTUAL LOAD . on each leg at the 45 horizontal angle being used.
90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 TABLE A
1.000 1.003 1.015 1.035 1.064 1.103 1.154 1.220 1.305 1.414 1.555 1.743 2.000
ANGLES OF BRIDLES (DRAWING 6)

The horizontal angle of bridles with 3 or more legs is measured the same as the horizontal sling angle of 2-legged hitches. In this case where a bridle designed with different leg lengths results in horizontal angles, the leg with the smallest horizontal angle will carry the greatest load. Therefore, the smallest horizontal angle is used in calculating actual leg load and evaluating the rated capacity of the sling proposed.
REPLACEMENT
(1) (2) No precise rules can be given to determine the exact time a sling should be replaced since many variable factors are involved. Safety in this respect depends largely upon the use of good judgment by an experienced person in evaluating remaining strength in a used sling. Proper allowance must be made for deterioration as disclosed by inspection. The safety of an operating sling depends upon this remaining strength. Conditions such as the following should be sufficient reason for questioning safety of slings and for considering replacement: a. Ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or five broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. b. Wear or scraping of one-third the original diameter of outside individual wires. c. Kinking, crushing, birdcaging, or other damage resulting in distortion of the rope structure. d. Evidence of heat damage. e. End attachments that are cracked, deformed or worn. f. Hooks that have been open more than 15 percent of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook. g. Corrosion or rope or end attachments.
(3)
(4) DRAWINGS 1-5
(5)
RECOMMENDED OPERATING PRACTICES

Whenever any sling is used, it is recommended that the following practices be observed: a. Slings that are unsafe should be destroyed. b. Slings should never be exposed to temperatures in excess of manufacturers recommendations. c. Use a sling that is long enough to provide the maximum practical horizontal angle. d. Slings should never be shortened with knots, bolts, or other methods. e. Care should be taken never to twist or kink the legs of a sling.
ABUSES
DRAWINGS 6 It is vitally important to recognize and avoid possible abuses of wire rope slings. By law, the sling user is no longer permitted to use jury-rigged slings and short cuts that were accepted practice for many years. Some of these practices that should be avoided are: a. Tying knots in wire rope. b. Using Home-made fittings and attachments. c. Making slings from used operating rope. d. Use of any sling that is of questionable strength.
35
CALDWELL LIFTING AND SPREADER BEAMS
LIFTING BEAMS
UP TO 40 TONS. MODEL 20
ROTATING BEAMS
TWO HOIST LIFT BEAMS

ADJUSTABLE BAIL LIFTING BEAMS

Up to 20 tons. MODEL 26
THREE AND FOUR POINT LIFTING BEAMS

FORK LIFT TRUCK LIFTING BEAMS

BATTERY LIFTING BEAMS

Up to 7000 Lbs. MODEL 76
FIXED SPREADER BEAMS

ADJUSTABLE SPREADERS
UNIVERSAL SPREADERS
SPECIAL SPREADER SYSTEMS

ADJUSTABLE BAIL LIFTING BEAM

CALL FOR SPECIFICATION AND DETAIL SHEETS

36
SPECIAL LIFTING GEAR
MODEL BEF SPREADER BEAM END FITTINGS
PRODUCT FEATURES:
Build your own spreader beam. Designed to work with a range of shackle sizes, both top and bottom Conforms to ASME B30.20 (when assembled to specifications).
(shown fully assembled)
Spread (ft.) BEF-2-1/2 BEF-5 BEF-8
4 7.5 17 39
5 7 17 39
6 6.5 17 39
8 5.5 17 39
10 4 17 39
12 2.9 16 38
14 2 15 36
Capacity In Tons 15 16 18 1.8 14 13 12 36 35 33
20 10 31
22 8 29
24 7 27
26 6 25
28 5 23
30 4.5 21
32 19
34 16
36 15
Fitting Weight 8 42 144
PRODUCT FEATURES:
Applications for the Posi-Turner are endless. Some common applications are: Composite Molds Fabrication & Assembly Materials/Metal Handling Machining Die & Mold Maintenance Assembly Line Mold Production Removal Inspection & Repair
Posi-Turner Load Rotation Systems

PRESSURE TONGS GRIPPING TONGS SUPPORTING TONGS BAIL LIFTING TONGS DIE LIFTING TONGS
37
GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN

G-80 ALLOY CHAIN SPECIFICATIONS
G-80 Alloy steel chain is electrically welded alloy steel embodying the latest manufacturing technology. Alloy provides a superior chain sling with high tensile strength and excellent wear resistance. The minimum elongation at break test is 15%. The tensile strength following heat treatment exceeds all existing OSHA, Government, NACM, and ASTM specification requirements. The G-80 chain and attachments used in fabricating chain slings offer a design factor of a minimum of 4 to 1 when used at recommended working load limits. This also meets NACM's System 8 working load limits, and is in line with the design factors required by the International Standards Organization (ISO). Some users, however, may elect to use the higher working load limits with a design factor of 3.5 to 1. See index.
CODE # TRADE SIZE INCHES MM ACTUAL MATERIAL DIAMETER, INCHES INSIDE INSIDE LENGTH, WIDTH, INCHES INCHES LINKS PER FOOT POUNDS PER 100 FEET WORKING LOAD LIMIT* POUNDS KGS.
732G80 7/32 5 .218 140G80 1/4 or 9/32 7 .276 380G80 3/8 10 .394 120G80 1/2 13 .512 580G80 5/8 16 .630 340G80 3/4 20 .787 780G80 7/8 22 .881 100G80 1 25 1.000 114G80 1-1/4 32 1.250 112G80 1-1/2 38 1.500 Dimensions and weights are approximate. Manufactured to System 6 specifications. WARNING: Do not exceed Working Load Limit.
0.69 0.86 1.22 1.57 1.93 2.44 2.45 2.80 3 50 4.49
0.30 0.40 0.55 0.75 0.87 1.02 1.22 1.40 1.75 1.94
17-1/2 13-3/4 10 7-3/4 6-1/2 5-1/2 5 4-1/4 3-1/2 2-5/8
43 70 142 244 356 562 750 965 1,525 2,140
2,100 3,500 7,100 12,000 18,100 28,300 34,200 47,700 72,300 80,000
950 1,590 3,200 5,400 8,200 12,800 15,500 21600 32 800 36,300
Grade 100 Also Available
GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN SLINGS

NOTE: All Angles Measured from Horizontal
PLEASE SELECT THE THREE LETTER PREFIX FROM SLINGS LIST ABOVE AND ADD TO CODE # AT RIGHT TO SPECIFY A SLING. EXAMPLE: DOS-380 X 10 FT.
WORKING LOAD LIMITS OF GRADE 80 CHAIN SLINGS. (LBS).*

CODE NO. CHAIN SIZE IN. SINGLE 90 60 DOUBLE LEG 45 30 60 TRIPLE AND QUAD 45 30
See Safe Use Info Pages 42-43

Note: All data approximate and subject to variation.
-140 1/4 or 9/32 3,500 6,100 4,900 -380 3/8 7,100 12,300 10,000 -120 1/2 12,000 20,800 17,000 -580 5/8 18,100 31,300 25,600 -340 3/4 28,300 49,000 40,000 -780 7/8 34,200 59,200 48,400 -100 1 47,700 82,600 67,400 -114 1-1/4 72,300 125,200 102,200 *CAUTION Working Load Limits Should Not Be Exceeded. Add three letter prefix to code number.
3,500 7,100 12,000 18,100 28,300 34,200 47,700 72,300
9,100 18,400 31,200 47,000 73,500 88,900 123,900 187,800
7,400 15,100 25,500 38,400 60,000 72,500 101,200 153,400
5,200 10,600 18,000 27,100 42,400 51,300 71,500 108,400
38
GRADE 80 ALL0Y CHAIN SLING HARDWARE

ALLOY COUPLING LINKS
CODE NO. STYLE CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMITS (LBS) L DIMENSIONS B E WEIGHT EACH (LBS)
545101 G-7/8-8 545102 G-10-8 545103 G-13-8 545104 G-16-8 545105 G-18/20-8 545106 G-22-8 545107 G-26-8 545109 G-32-8 DESIGN FACTOR 4:1
*1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 7/8" 1" 1-1/4"
3,500 7,100 12,000 18,100 28,300 34,200 47,700 72,300
2.2 2.7 3.5 4.1 4.9 5.9 6.3 7.9
.71 .99 1.1 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.3 2.8
.87 1 1.3 1.6 1.9 2.3 2.4 3.1
.4 .7 1.5 2.4 4.0 6.6 10.1 18.9
SLING HOOKS WITH LATCH (CLEVIS TYPE)

CODE NO. STYLE CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMITS (LBS) L DIMENSIONS B H WEIGHT EACH (LBS)
512388 GKN-7/8-8 512390 GKN-10-8 512392 GKN-13-8 512394 GKN-16-8 DESIGN FACTOR 4:1
*1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 5/8"
3,500 7,100 12,000 18,100
3.8 4.8 5.8 6.7
1.3 1.6 1.9 2.2
.87 1.1 1.4 1.7
1.1 2.2 4.4 7.7
GKN
CRADLE GRAB HOOKS (CLEVIS TYPE)

CODE NO. STYLE CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMITS (LBS) L DIMENSIONS B WEIGHT EACH (LBS)
512400 GG-7/8-8 512410 GG-10-8 512420 GG-13-8 512430 GG-16-8 DESIGN FACTOR 4:1 GG
*1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 5/8"
3,500 7,100 12,000 18,100
2.2 3.1 3.8 4.9
.39 .51 .63 .79
.6 1.8 3.3 6.2
CLEVIS Shortening Hook XK

For Chain CODE G80 ALLOY WORK LOAD 4:1 G80 ALLOY e b d1 d2 WEIGHT LB/PC.
7/32 XK 5.5 2100 3.58 1.33 .82 .31 .60 1/4 XK 7 3500 4.84 2.08 .94 .43 1.50 5/16 XK 8 4500 4.80 2.08 .94 .43 1.50 3/8 XK 10 7100 6.26 2.73 1.22 .55 2.70 1/2 XK 13 12000 8.03 3.62 1.53 .66 6.00 5/8 XK 16 18100 8.70 4.01 1.57 .78 8.80 For mounting into assemblies requiring a shortening capability. Can be used with any master link assembly. Compact and convenient fitting. Not for use in basket configurations.
*1/4 AND 9/32 ARE INTERCHANGEABLE LARGER HOOKS AND OTHER ATTACHMENTS PLUS GRADE 100 ARE ALSO AVAILABLE
39
GUNNEBO ALLOY MASTER LINKS

OBLONG MASTER LINKS
IN TRADE SIZE MM MODEL WORKING LOAD LIMIT *(LBS.) L DIMENSIONS (INCHES) B D WEIGHT EACH LBS.
3/8 11 0-6-8 3,000 3.9 2.4 1/2 14 0-86-8 4,920 4.7 2.8 5/8 17 0-108-8 6,600 5.5 3.2 3/4 19 0-13-8 10,320 5.9 3.5 7/8 22 0-1310-8 14,040 6.3 3.7 1 25 0-16-8 24,360 7.5 4.3 1-1/8 28 0-1613-8 27,000 7.1 4.1 1-1/4 30 0-19-8 35,160 7.9 4.7 1-3/8 34 0-2216-8 42,000 9.5 5.5 1-1/2 38 0-26-8 47,880 9.9 5.9 1-5/8 40 0-2619-8 60,600 9.9 5.9 1-3/4 45 0-3222-8 62,520 11.8 7.1 2 50 0-3626-8 97,680 11.8 7.9 2-1/4 55 0-4028-8 119,400 11.8 7.9 2-1/2 60 0-4532-8 147,300 13.8 7.9 2-3/4 70 0-100T-8 178,200 15.8 9.9 3-1/4 80 0-125T-8 262,200 15.8 9.9 *Design Factor 5:1 Proof tested and certified. WLL for Single Leg Sling.
.43 .55 .67 .75 .87 .99 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.8 3.2
.4 .9 1.5 2.2 3.3 4.9 6.0 7.7 11.0 15.0 18.0 26.0 33.0 40.0 55.0 88.0 117.0
OBLONG MASTER LINKS WITH SUB-ASSEMBLIES

TRADE SIZE IN MM MODEL FOR CHAIN SIZE WORKING (INCHES) MM LOAD LIMIT (LBS) 3-LEG & 4-LEG 60 IN MM 4:1 L1 DIMENSIONS (INCHES) L B D l b d WEIGHT EACH LBS.
3/4 19 7/8 22 1 25 1-1/4 30 1-5/8 40 2 50 2-1/4 55 2-1/2 60 2-3/4 70 3-1/4 80 *Design Factor 4:1
OT-6-8 7/32 6 OT-8-8 9/32 7 OT-9-8 3/8 10 OT-10-8 1/2 13 OT-13-8 5/8 16 OT-16-8 3/4 20 OT-19-8 7/8 22 OT-22-8 1 25 OT-26-8 1-1/4 32 OT-32-8 1-1/4 32 Proof tested and certified.
5,450 9,100 18,400 31,200 47,000 73,500 88,900 123,900 187,800 187,800
10.2 11.8 13.4 14.2 16.9 19.7 22.0 24.0 26.8 26.8
5.9 6.3 7.5 7.9 9.9 11.8 11.8 13.8 15.8 15.8
3.5 3.7 4.3 4.7 5.9 7.9 7.9 7.9 9.9 9.9
.75 .87 .98 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.8 3.1
4.3 5.5 5.9 6.3 7.1 7.9 10.2 10.2 11.0 11.0
2.4 3.2 3.5 3.7 4.1 4.3 5.5 5.5 6.3 6.3
.55 .67 .75 .87 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.2
4.0 6.2 7.0 13.0 29.0 51.0 70.0 100.0 150.0 190.00
ADDITIONAL GUNNEBO PRODUCTS
40
GUNNEBO ALLOY HOOKS

SAFETY HOOK CLEVIS BALL BEARING SWIVEL TYPE
Replacement hook for manual/electric chain hosts.
WEIGHT EACH H LBS. WORKING CHAIN LOAD LIMIT SIZE POUNDS DIMENSIONS INCHES B K G WEIGHT EACH H LBS.
SAFETY HOOKS EYE-TYPE

CODE NO. CHAIN SIZE IN WORKING LOAD LIMIT POUNDS L DIMENSIONS INCHES B E F G CODE NO.
BK-5/6-8 BK-7/8-8 BK-10-8 BK-13-8 BK-16-8 BK-18/20-8 BK-22-8 BK-26-8 BK-28-8
7/32 9/32 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8
2,100 3,500 7,100 12,000 18,100 28,300 34,200 47,700 55,100
4.3 5.4 6.6 8.2 10.0 11.4 12.6 13.6 15.8
1.1 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.5 2.7 3.1 3.9 4.7
.87 .39 .99 .43 1.3 .51 1.6 .63 2.0 .79 2.4 .87 2.8 .95 3.1 1.0 3.5 1.1
.55 .67 .98 1.1 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.0 2.4
.75 .91 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.2 2.4 2.7 3.2
.9 1.6 3.3 5.9 12.0 17 25 32 48
BKH-5/6-8 7,32, 1/4 2,100
5.8
1.1
.35
.55
.75 1.6
SAFETY HOOKS
CHAIN WORKING SIZE LOAD LIMIT IN POUNDS
WITH BALL BEARINGS (SWIVEL EYE TYPE)

Hooks swivel 360 under full load.
DIMENSIONS INCHES C E F WEIGHT EACH H LBS.
MODEL
SAFETY HOOK CLEVIS TYPE

CODE NO. WORKING CHAIN LOAD LIMIT SIZE POUNDS DIMENSIONS INCHES L B G WEIGHT EACH H LBS.
BKG-7/8-8 BKG-10-8 BKG-13-8 BKG-16-8
1/4* 3/8 1/2 5/8
3,500 7,100 12,000 18,100
4.7 5.6 7.1 8.5
1.4 1.7 2.1 2.5
.67 .98 1.1 1.5
.91 1.7 1.1 3.3 1.5 6.2 1.9 11.0
BKL-5/6-8 7/32 2,100 5.8 1.1 BKL-7/8-8 9/32 3,500 7.2 1.4 BLK-10-8 3/8 7,100 8.5 1.7 BKL-13-8 1/2 12,000 10.9 2.1 BKL-16-8 5/8 18,100 13.2 2.5 BKLK-18/20-8 3/4 28,300 14.5 2.7 *Design Factor 4:1 Proof tested and certified.
.87 1.1 1.3 1.6 2.0 1.7
1.3 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.4 2.3
.43 .55 .47 .67 .59 .99 .75 1.1 .87 1.5 2.2 2.9
.75 1.5 .91 2.4 1.1 4.2 1.5 8.4 1.9 15.9 1.0 23.8
ALLOY WELD-ON HOOKS SAFETY HOOK EYE-TYPE FOR WEB SLINGS

WORKING CHAIN LOAD LIMIT CODE NO. SIZE POUNDS L B DIMENSIONS INCHES D E F G WEIGHT EACH H LBS.
MODEL WORKING LOAD LIMIT *(TONS) B C G DIMENSIONS INCHES H K L S a WEIGHT EACH LBS.
BKB-10-8 3/8 7,100 6.7 1.5
2.8
1.3
.5
1.3
1.7
5.3
UKN-0.75** 0.75 UKN-1** 1.0 UKN-2** 2.0 UKN-3 3.0 UKN-4 4.0 UKN-5 5.0 UKN-4 8.0 UKN-10 10.0 SHB-14 14.0
.79 .83 4.5 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.3 1.9 2.0
2.2 2.8 1.0 4.1 4.4 5.1 5.2 6.6 8.8
.51 .67 .79 .91 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.7
.79 .99 3.4 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.4
.75 .99 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4
3.2 .20 3.7 .24 .20 1.2 5.2 .39 5.5 .43 1.5 .47 6.8 .51 8.7 .55 8.3 .79
.12 .16 .32 .24 .28 .32 .35 .35 .31
.6 1.2 2.2 2.2 4.2 6.5 8.2 11.0 19.0
WEB ROUND SLING CONNECTOR

MODEL CHAIN WORKING SIZE LOAD LIMIT IN POUNDS L DIMENSIONS INCHES B K S WEIGHT EACH LBS.
*Design Factor 5:1 Proof tested and certified. **Welding plate on UKN-0.75, UKN-2, and UKN-1 is slightly curved. Baseplate SHB-14 is 1024C steel (use electrode AWS/ASTM E7018-1, ISO E51 5 B120 20H). Welding is to be done by a qualified welder. Hook latch is alloy.
SKR-7/8-8 9/32 3,500 1.4 SKR-10-8 3/8 7,100 1.7 SKR-13-8 1/2 12,000 2.0 SKR-16-8 5/8 18,100 2.4 SKR-18/20-8 3/4 28,300 2.8 SKR-22-8 7/8 34,200 4.3 SKR-26-8 1 47,700 5.1 *Design Factor 4:1 Proof tested and certified.
1.6 1.9 2.1 2.6 3.2 4.9 5.9
.71 .95 1.1 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.3
.95 1.1 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.7 3.4
.4 .8 1.4 2.6 4.2 10.6 18.7
*1/4 AND 9/32 ARE INTERCHANGEABLE

41
HOW TO ORDER CHAIN SLINGS

1. Determine the maximum load to be lifted. 2. Refer to the following pages and choose the proper type of chain sling (single, double, etc.) dictated by the size, shape and weight of the load. 3. Estimate the approximate angle between a leg of the sling and the load during operation. 4. Select the proper attachments (hooks and master links) for your chain sling. 5. Determine the overall reach from bearing point on master link to bearing point on attachment. 6. Refer to the Working Load Limit Chart and to your pre-determined angle of the type sling you have selected. 7. Choose the chain size which meets your requirements. 8. When entering your order be sure you give complete information as to the size, reach and attachments required. Note: Angle to the load on multiple leg slings will be 60 or greater as long as the distance between lifting eyes of load is not greater than reach shown on identification tag.
INSPECTION, CARE AND PROPER USE OF CHAIN SLINGS

Sling chains are designed and built for rugged lasting service. As with any quality product, however, certain precautions and standards of treatment should be observed. In order to maximize useful service life, the following cautions and procedures should be noted and followed. To maximize life expectancy, A CONTINUAL INSPECTION PROGRAM MUST BE UNDERTAKEN. (We offers a variety of printed material outlining inspection procedures and delineating working load limits, as well as technical bulletins and record keeping forms). SLINGS AND ASSEMBLIES MUST NEVER BE USED ABOVE THE WORKING LOAD LIMIT. Overloading causes stretching and reduction in the material diameter of the links. Stretched chain must be removed from service. Refer to the charts in this catalog for individual working load limits. Do not rest load on chain. Inspect load at contact with hooks to be sure the load is properly seated within throat opening. Balance the load. Unbalanced loads can put too much stress on one leg of multiple chain slings. Never bounce or jerk load when lowering or lifting. Never force or hammer hooks or chain into position Store chain slings in a clean dry area, preferably by hanging on racks or walls rather than placing slings on floors where they are subject to abuse. Never anneal alloy slings. Return sling to factory for proper repair procedures. Do not use in acid solutions. Consult manufacturer for recommendations. Clean chain slings regularly as dirt and grit can cause wear at link bearing points. A link-by-link inspection will afford an opportunity to discover deep gouges, distortion, spread in the throat opening of hooks and damage to master links and coupling links. An inspection can also detect elongation of the legs themselves (i.e., reach) and should also include a link-by-link inspection to uncover individual link wear. Note the Cam-Alloy MINIMUM ALLOWABLE LINK DIAMETER CHART on this page.
TEMP. OF CHAIN WHILE HEATED, APPLY FOLLOWING REDUCTIONS TO WORKING LOAD LIMIT AFTER COOLING, PERMANENT REDUCTION TO WORKING LOAD LIMIT INCHES ACTUAL SIZE STOCK DIAMETER NEW, INCHES MINIMUM ALLOWABLE DIAMETER AT WORN PORTION OF LINK, INCHES
CHAIN SIZE MM
7/32 9/32 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
5 7 10 13 16 20 22 25 32 38
.218 .276 .394 .512 .630 .787 .881 1.000 1.250 1.500
.172 .234 .296 .391 .484 .594 .703 .813 1.000 1.187
WARNING: When using Cam-Alloy chain slings under conditions where high temperatures exist, note the HEAT INDUCED REDUCTIONS in WORKING LOAD LIMIT CHART below. When alloy chain is subjected to heat, the working load limit is reduced due to temper embrittlement Consult manufacturer for recommendations
400F 500F 600'F 700F 800F 900F 1000F
10% 10% 20% 25% 45% 55% 60%
10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 15% 20%
42
ALLOY CHAIN SLING INSPECTION TIPS

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE BENDING OF HOOKS 15% Throat Enlargement
MASTER LINK SIZE Should fit easily over lifting or crane hook
LINK STRESS POINTS Where breaks are most likely to occur.
Twisted, Bent or Elongated Links in a chain indicate excessive loading or abuse, and are cause for removal from service. GOUGES Depending on severity and location, nicks and gouges are grounds for removal of a chain from service. These cases must be evaluated individually.
MASTER LINK WEAR POINTS Exaggerated for emphasis.
FREEZE POINTS ON DEFORMED LINK Where worn chain deforms and binds.
HOOK EYE DAMAGE
MASTER LINK WIDTH Must not permit link to distort when load is applied. Space must not exceed diameter of material size of the master link.
DRAG WEAR Metal has been removed by abrasion.
If no-Go Gauge fits over any part of any link, loss of metal or diameter reduction is indicated, and chain should be removed from service.
HOW LIFTING ANGLES REDUCE WORKING LOAD LIMITS OF SLINGS
43
SLINGMAX CHAIN SLING SADDLE RINGS
44
WIRE MESH SLINGS

SPECIALTY SLINGS WITH PARTICULAR PROPERTIES AND USES
Widely used in metalworking shops and steel warehouses where loads are abrasive, hot or tend to cut web slings.
FEATURES, ADVANTAGES AND BENEFITS

Promotes safety: Steel construction resists abrasion and cutting. Each sling permanently stamped with capacity and serial number. Good flexibilitygrips loads contours. Each sling proof tested and certified. Saves money: Grips load firmly without stretchingreduces load damage. Resists abrasion and cutting for greater sling life. Low stretch and flexibility reduce load damage. Wide bearing area distributes load to help avoid load damage. Repairablethus very cost effective. Alloy steel end fittingsplated for long life. Wire mesh is zinc platedresists corrosion. Saves time: Width of mesh helps control and balance load. End fittings fit most large crane hooks.
ROUGHNECK WIRE MESH SLING CONSTRUCTION

Standard Construction: Alloy steel end fittings, zinc plated. Mesh is galvanized high tensile steel. 10 gage is standard, 12 gage is available upon request. Optional Construction: Stainless steel mesh is available for corrosive and hotter environments.
INSPECTION CRITERIA FOR ROUGHNECK WIRE MESH SLINGS

Remove the sling from service if any of the following is visible: A broken weld or braized joint along the sling edge. A broken wire in any part of the mesh. Reduction in wire diameter of 25% due to abrasion or 15% due to corrosion. Lack of flexibility due to distortion of the mesh. Visible distortion or wear of either end fitting. Cracked end fitting.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
Wire mesh slings shall not be used at temperatures above 550F. Store in a clean, dry area to avoid corrosive action.
10 GAGEHEAVY DUTY
CODE NO. WIRE MESH WIDTH (IN.) VERTICAL RATED CAPACITY (LBS.) CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET
WM102 WM103 WM104 WM106 WM108 WM1010 WM1012 WM1014 WM1016 WM1018 WM1020
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
2,300 3,500 4,800 7,200 9,600 12,000 14,400 16,800 19,200 21,600 24,000
2,300 3,500 4,800 7,200 9,600 12,000 14,400 16,800 19,200 21,600 24,000
4,600 7,000 9,600 14,400 19,200 24,000 28,800 33,600 38,400 43,200 48,000
This single 4 wide mesh sling in a choker hitch at load center of gravity provides adequate stability for many structural steel loads.
Sling capacity rating decreases as the angle from horizontal decreases. We do not recommend using at angles of less than 30. See Effect of Angle of Lift on page 9 Do not exceed rated capacities. Ratings must be reduced when slings are used at angles of less than 90 from horizontal.
WARNING
45
6 X 25 AND 6 X 37 CLASS ROPES GENERAL INFORMATION

BAIRS
TOW LIF
Most wire ropes with six round strands and with 16 through 26 wires per strand are included in the he 6 x 19 Classification. The 6 x 37 Classification includes most 6-strand, round strand ropes having 27 to 49 wires per strand. Although their physical characteristics may vary widely, all have the same weight per foot and the same nominal strength, size-for-size. While 6 x 19 ropes give primary emphasis to abrasion resistance in varying degrees, the 6 x 37 ropes are important for fatigue resistance. This fatigue resistance is made possible by the greater number of wires per strand.
TING
RO
D UC
TS
P
46
6 X 25 CLASSIFICATION
The 6 x 19 Seale has outer wires larger than 6 x 21 FW, 6 x 25 FW or 6 x 26 WS, and therefore its resistance to abrasion is increased but its fatigue resistance is decreased; it is a good rope to withstand abrasion or crushing on the drum. Outer wires of 6 x 21 FW are larger and fewer than those of 6 x 25 FW, which means better resistance to abrasion but somewhat less resistance to bending fatigue, making it a good choice where abrasive wear is accompanied by moderate bending. A 6 x 25 FW has good balance between resistance to abrasion and fatigue resistance, and is often considered the work horse of wire ropes, used for more purposes than any other construction. The 6 x 26 WS is a compact construction with solid support for the wires, hence it has a high resistance to crushing. Resistance.to abrasion is the same as 6 x 21 FW. Number and relative size of inner wires add to stability of strands, and give fatigue resistance comparable to 6 x 25 FW. It is a good choice where both abrasion resistance and fatigue resistance are required.
6 X 37 CLASSIFICATION
Because of emphasis on fatigue resistance the problem of choice within the 6 x 37 Classification is greatly reduced. Although there are exceptions, the constructions in the 6 x 37 Classification are primarily designed to be the most efficient for each rope diameter. As the rope size increases, for instance, a large number of wires can be used to achieve required fatigue resistance and still those wires will be large enough to offer adequate resistance to abrasion. In sizes over two inches, the 6 x 49 SWS construction is normally used. In smaller sizes, however, the outer wires in the 6 x 49 SWS would be so small that their resistance to abrasion would be lowered. It should be noted that the greater number of wires make the 6 x 37 classification more susceptible to crushing. This, however, can frequently be overcome by an independent wire rope core and by the use of well designed sheaves and grooved drums.
WIRE ROPE STRENGTHS AND WEIGHTS

STANDARD ROPES
Nominal strengths and weights 6 x 25 Class and 6 x 37 Class
NOMINAL STRENGTH@ IN TONS OF 2000 POUNDS EXTRA IMPROVED APPROXIMATE WEIGHT DIAMETER PLOW STEEL PER FOOT IN POUNDS IN INCHES IWRC IWRC
6 x 25 CLASS
CODE NO.
6 X 37 CLASS
CODE NO.
Galvanized Stainless Steel and Special Constructions Available on Request
1/16" - 3/8" Aircraft Cable in Galvanized Stainless or Vinyl Coated See pages 64-65
140AAR 516AAR 380AAR 716AAR 120AAR 916AAR 580AAR 340AAR 780AAR 100AAR 118AAR 114AAR 138AAR 112AAR 158AAR 134AAR 178AAR 200AAR 218AAR 214AAR 238AAR 212AAR 258AAR 234AAR 278AAR 300AAR 318AAR 314AAR 338AAR 312AAR 358AAR 334AAR 378AAR 400AAR 418AAR 414AAR 438AAR
716BAR 120BAR 916BAR 580BAR 340BAR 780BAR 100BAR 118BAR 114BAR 138BAR 112BAR 158BAR 134BAR 178BAR 200BAR 218BAR 214BAR 238BAR 212BAR 258BAR 234BAR 278BAR 300BAR 318BAR 314BAR 338BAR 312BAR 358BAR 334BAR 378BAR 400BAR 418BAR 414BAR 438BAR
1/4* 5/16* 3/8* 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4 1-7/8 2 2-1/8 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-1/2 2-5/8 2-3/4 2-7/8 3 3-1/8 3-1/4 3-3/8 3-1/2 3-5/8 3-3/4 3-7/8 4 4-1/8 4-1/4 4-3/8
3.40 5.27 7.55 10.2 13.3 16.8 20.6 29.4 39.8 51.7 65.0 79.9 96. 114. 132. 153. 174. 198. 221. 247. 274. 302. 331. 361. 392. 425. 458. 492. 529. 564. 602. 641. 680. 720. 757. 799. 844.
.116 .18 .26 .35 .46 .59 .72 1.04 1.42 1.85 2.34 2.89 3.50 4.16 4.38 5.67 6.50 7.39 8.35 9.36 10.4 11.6 12.8 14.0 15.3 16.6 18.0 19.5 21.0 22.6 24.3 26.0 27.7 29.6 31.7 33.3 35.4
SMALL DIAMETER 6 X 37 CLASSIFICATION

Ropes in these diameters are made with Multiple Operation Strands, and have the Nominal Strengths and Weights shown in this Table.
NOMINAL STRENGTH@ IN TONS OF 2000 POUNDS EXTRA IMPROVED APPROXIMATE WEIGHT PLOW STEEL PER FOOT IN POUNDS IWRC IWRC
CODE NO.
DIAMETER IN INCHES
140BAR 1/4* 3.20 516BAR 5/16* 4.98 380BAR 3/8* 7.14 @Available galvanized at 10% lower strengths, or in equivalent strengths on special request.
.116 .18 .26
NOTE: SEE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON PAGES 50-63

47
19 X 7 ROTATION RESISTANT AND 8 X 25 SPIN RESISTANT

19 X 7 ROPE
In an application where a single part hoist rope is used to lift a free load, or where rotation resistant properties are essential for rope performance, a 19 x 7 rope can be used. The rotation resistant characteristic of 19 x 7 rope is achieved by laying six strands around a core strand in one direction, and then laying 12 strands around the first operation in the opposite direction. Thus, when the rope is in tension, opposing rotational forces are created between the inner and outer layers. Ropes of 19 x 7 construction require special handling, selection and usage considerations, due to their construction. They are susceptible to kinking, crushing and unbalancing in the form of "core pops" and birdcages". Extreme care must be taken to avoid operational practices which can lead to these conditions. In addition, frequent, regular inspection for broken wires is critical when using 19 x 7. By design, the 19 x 7 construction has a relatively low reserve strength. This can result in short service life between the point in time when the broken wire report criteria are met and when actual rope fracture occurs.
APPROX. WEIGHT PER FOOT IN POUNDS NOMINAL STRENGTH* IN TONS OF 2000 POUNDS IMPROVED EXTRA IMPROVED PLOW STEEL PLOW STEEL
CODE NO.
DIAMETER IN INCHES
316NON 3/16 .064 1.42 1.57 140NON 1/4 .113 2.51 2.77 516NON 5/16 .177 3.90 4.30 380NON 3/8 .25 5.59 6.15 716NON 7/16 .35 7.58 8.33 120NON 1/2 .45 9.85 10.8 916NON 9/16 .58 12.4 13.6 580NON 5/8 .71 15.3 16.8 340NON 3/4 1.02 21.8 24.0 780NON 7/8 1.39 29.5 32.5 100NON 1 1.82 38.3 42.2 118NON 1-1/8 2.30 48.2 53.1 114NON 1-1/4 2.83 59.2 65.1 138NON 1-3/8 3.43 71.3 78.4 112NON 1-1/2 4.08 84.4 92.8 *These strengths apply only when a test is conducted with both ends fixed. When in use the strength of these ropes may be significantly reduced if one end is free to rotate.
8 X 25 ROPE
In a multi-part wire rope system where the blocks have a tendency to twist, or for a single part hoist line which does not require the degree of rotation resistant properties found in a 19 x 7 rope, the 8 x 25 Resistwist rope has found successful application. The rotation resistant characteristic is achieved by laying the eight outer strands around an independent wire rope core so these strands are in the opposite direction to the lay of the core. Thus, when the rope is in tension, opposing rotational forces are created between core and outer strands. In addition to 8 x 25 Resistwist ropes being more stable than 19 x 7 ropes, several other advantages exist. The 8 x 25 Resistwist has increased resistance to bending fatigue and crushing on drums and sheaves. This is achieved through the use of 8-strand construction with an independent wire rope core. As with any application where the type of rope on an installation is changed, an 8 x 25 Resistwist rope should be substituted only after carefully comparing specifications and strength requirements.
APPROX. WEIGHT PER FOOT IN POUNDS NOMINAL STRENGTH* IN TONS OF 2000 POUNDS IMPROVED EXTRA IMPROVED PLOW STEEL PLOW STEEL
CODE NO.
DIAMETER IN INCHES
516SPIN 5/16 .18 4.01 4.63 380SPIN 3/8 .26 5.76 6.63 716SPIN 7/16 .36 7.80 8.97 120SPIN 1/2 .47 10.1 11.6 916SPIN 9/16 .60 12.8 14.7 580SPIN 5/8 .73 15.7 18.1 340SPIN 3/4 1.06 22.5 25.9 780SPIN 7/8 1.44 30.5 35.0 100SPIN 1 1.88 39.6 45.5 118SPIN 1-1/8 2.39 49.8 57.3 114SPIN 1-1/4 2.94 61.3 70.5 138SPIN 1-3/8 3.56 73.8 84.9 112SPIN 1-1/2 4.24 87.3 100. *These strengths apply only when a test is conducted with both ends fixed. When in use the strength of these ropes may be significantly reduced if one end is free to rotate.
48
SURELIFT DY-PAC 6 AND CUSHION 6

DY-PAC 6 ROPES FOR CRANE AND WINCHING APPLICATIONS
Backed by over a century of rope-making experience, Wire Rope Industries offers a series of specialized Surelift products and services to meet the increasingly demanding requirements of crane and winching equipment. Tested and designed for superior performance and value, our Surelift line includes high performance products such as Dy-Pac 6. DY-PAC 6 INCREASES ROPE PERFORMANCE: A proven 6x25/31 IWRC construction and specially selected wire tensiles create ropes that have the most suitable characteristics for Dy-Pac enhancement and rope performance. The Dy-Pac strand compaction process increases the steel area of the individual strands to produce a rope with greater strength, increased lifting capacity. A greater steel area in the rope results in higher crush resistance and significantly enhanced drum spooling. A smooth outer strand profile improves rope wear resistance, reduces sheave and drum wear. Greater contact area between each strand reduces inter strand nicking and increases flexibility under load fatigue life and performance. Specially formulated lubrication increases rope performance, reduces corrosion and minimizes environmental impact due to fly-off. Well marked core tracers make it easy to identify Dy-Pac 6 high performance ropes. Full technical support allows WRI customers to make the correct Dy-Pac rope selection, obtain the relevant installation, inspection and maintenance procedures, and receive the necessary training. DY-PAC 6 REDUCES OPERATING COSTS & INCREASES PROFITS: Reduced overall operating costs as a result of significantly enhanced rope performance. Reduced equipment downtime as a result of fewer rope change-outs. Lower equipment maintenance costs as a result of reduced sheave and drum wear. Lower inventory costs as a result of reduced purchase requirements. For more information on Dy-Pac 6 or any other high performance Surelift products, please contact your local Wire Rope representative.
DY-PAC 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE ROPES WEIGHTS AND BREAKING LOADS

CODE NO. DIAMETER INCHES (MM) ROPE CONSTRUCTION APPROX. WEIGHT LBS./FT/ (KG/M) NOMINAL BREAKING LOAD TONS (kN)
DP380AAR 3/8 (10) 6 X 19 RRL Dy-Pac DP716AAR 7/16 (11) 6 x 25 RRL Dy-Pac DP120AAR 1/2 (13) 6 x 25 RRL Dy-Pac DP916AAR 9/16 (14) 6 x 25 RRL Dy-Pac DP580AAR 5/8 (16) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac DP340AAR 3/4 (19) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac DP780AAR 7/8 (22) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac DP100AAR 1 (25) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac DP118AAR 1-1/8 (29) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac DP114AAR 1-1/4 (32) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac DP138AAR 1-3/8 (35) 6 x 31 RRL Dy-Pac DP112AAR 1-1/2 (38) 6 x 31 RRL Dy-Pac Breaking load values are subject to a minus tolerance of 2.5%.
0.30 (0.44) 0.39 (0.58) 0.51 (0.76) 0.64 (0.95) 0.79 (1.18) 1.14 (1.70) 1.54 (2.29) 2.01 (2.99) 2.54 (3.80) 3.07 (4.57) 3.67 (5.46) 4.55 (6.77)
9.1 (81) 11.6 (103) 14.1 (134) 19.1 (170) 23.5 (209) 32.5 (289) 44.0 (391) 57.6 (512) 72.7 (647) 88.0 (783) 107.8 (959) 131.3 (1169)
CUSHION 6 ROPES FOR CRANE APPLICATIONS

Backed by over a century of rope-making experience, Wire Rope Industries offers a series of specialized Surelift products and services to meet the increasingly demanding requirements of crane hoisting applications. Designed and tested for superior performance and value, our Surelift line includes top performers such as Cushion 6 ropes. CUSHION 6 INCREASES ROPE PERFORMANCE: A well-proven 6x26/36 IWRC rope, specially designed for plastic enhancement, provides an excellent performance/strength combination. WRIs exclusive plastic enhancement process maximizes impregnation that cushions and separates the rope strands from the steel core. This creates a more balanced rope in which stress is evenly distributed and inter-strand nicking is virtually eliminated resulting in improved performance and better resistance to shock loading. Full plastic enhancement significantly reduces stretch and minimizes drum crushing which improves performance and reduces downtime. Full rope cushioning minimizes moisture and contaminant penetration reducing internal abrasion and corrosion. A completely round outer rope profile maximizes the contact area between the rope and the equipment, enhancing rope wear resistance and significantly reducing sheave and drum wear. Specially formulated lubrication provides protection for individual wires, reducing friction and maintaining freedom of movement between the wires and the plastic. External markings on the rope make it easy to identify Cushion 6 high performance ropes. Full technical support allows WRI customers to make the correct Cushion rope selection, obtain the relevant installation, inspection and maintenance procedures, and receive the necessary training. CUSHION 6 REDUCES OPERATING COSTS & INCREASES PROFITS: Reduced overall operating costs as a result of significantly enhanced rope performance and trouble free operation. Lower equipment maintenance costs as a result of reduced sheave and drum wear. Lower inventory costs as a result of reduced purchase requirements. For more information on Cushion 6 or any other high performance Surelift products, please contact your local Wire Rope representative.
CUSHION 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE ROPES WEIGHTS AND BREAKING LOADS

CODE NO. DIAMETER INCHES (MM) ROPE CONSTRUCTION APPROX. WEIGHT LBS./FT/ (KG/M) NOMINAL BREAKING LOAD TONS (kN)
CU380AAR 3/8 (10) 6 x 19 RRL Cushion Rope CU716AAR 7/16 (11) 6 x 19 RRL Cushion Rope CU120AAR 1/2 (13) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope CU916AAR 9/16 (14) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope CU580AAR 5/8 (16) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope CU340AAR 3/4 (19) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope CU780AAR 7/8 (22) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope CU100AAR 1 (25) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope CU118AAR 1-1/8 (29) 6 x 36 RRL Cushion Rope CU114AAR 1-1/4 (32) 6 x 36 RRL Cushion Rope CU138AAR 1-3/8 (35) 6 x 36 RRL Cushion Rope CU112AAR 1-1/2 (38) 6 x 36 RRL Cushion Rope Breaking load values are subject to a minus tolerance of 2.5%.
0.26 (0.38) 0.35 (0.52) 0.45 (0.67) 0.58 (0.86) 0.72 (1.07) 1.02 (1.51) 1.41 (2.09) 1.82 (2.71) 2.18 (3.24) 2.88 (4.29) 3.52 (5.24) 4.18 (6.21)
6.6 (59) 9.0 (81) 11.7 (104) 15.0 (133) 18.6 (165) 26.3 (234) 36.4 (324) 47.1 (419) 57.2 (510) 69.6 (663) 85.7 (763) 101.5 (904)
49
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT APPLICATION

MOBILE CRANE
NOTE: These are general recommendations, consult crane manufacturer for correct specifications.
USE
CONSTRUCTION
LAY
CORE
Main Hoist Rope Jib HoistSingle Part Line
Jib Hoist or WhiplineTwo Part Line Boom Hoist DyPac Cusion Pac-8 Jib Front and Back Stays Pendants Tagline
6 x 25 FW, Cushion 6 or 6 x 31 FW 18 x 7 (19 x 7) Dy-Pac 18 Rotation Resistant 6 x 25 FW 6 x 25 FW 6 x 25 FW 6 x 25 FW 6 x 36 WS 6 x 36 WS 6 x 36 WS
Reg Reg Reg Reg Reg Lang Lang Lang Reg Reg Reg
IWRC IWRC IWRC FC or IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC
50
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT APPLICATION

SHOVEL
F.W.Filler Wire; WSWarrington Seale; SWSSeale Warrington Seale. All ropes can be furnished in Powersteel or Yellow Strand.
USE CONSTRUCTION LAY CORE
Hoist Rope 7/8 and Smaller 1 and Larger
6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS 6 x 41 F.W. or 6 x 49 SWS Dy-Pac 6 or 6 x 55 SWS 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS 6 x 41 F.W. or 6 x 49 SWS Dy-Pac 6 or 6 x 55 SWS 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS 6 x 25 F.W. or Dy-Pac 6 6 x 30 Flattened Strand
Lang or Reg. IWRC Reg. Lang Lang Reg. Lang Reg. Reg. Reg. Lang IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC
Shovel Crowd and Retract 7/8 and Smaller 1 and Larger
Shovel Trip Line Boom Hoist Rope
CLAMSHELL
Closing and Holding Lines
Boom Hoist Rope
Tag Line
6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS Dy-Pac 6 6 x 30 Flattened Strand 6 x 25 F.W. Dy-Pac 6 6 x 30 Flattened Strand 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS
Lang or Reg. Reg. Lang Reg. Reg. Lang Reg.
IWRC IWRC or F.C. IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC
DRAGLINE
Drag Rope 1/2-1-4/8 1-1/2-2-1/2 205/8-3-1/2 Hoist Rope 7/8 and Smaller 1 and Larger 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS Dy-Pac 6 6 x 41 F.W. or 6 x 49 SWS Dy-Pac 6 or 6 x 55 SWS 6 x 25 F.W. Dy-Pac 6 6 x 30 Flattened Strand 6 x 25 F.W Lang or Reg. IWRC Reg. IWRC Reg. Lang Reg. Reg. Lang Lang or Reg. IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC 6 x 21 F.W. or 6 x 30 Flattened Strand 6 x 21 F.W. or 6 x 25 F.W. 6 x 30 Flattened Strand 6 x 41 F.W. or 6 x 49 SWS or 6 x 55 SWS Lang Lang Lang Lang IWRC IWRC IWRC IWRC
Boom Hoist Rope
Bucket Dump Line
51
FEATURES FOR CONSIDERATION IN WIRE ROPE SELECTION

EACH CHARACTERISTIC AFFECTS OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Every wire rope has its own personality which is a reflection of its engineered design. Each rope construction has been established to produce a desired combination of operating characteristics which will best meet the performance requirements of the work, or application, for which that design is intended . . . and each rope construction is, therefore, a design compromise. The best illustration of a design compromiseor best combination of desired characteristicsis the inter-relationship between resistance to abrasion and fatigue resistance. Fatigue resistance (a rope's capability to bend repeatedly under stress) is accomplished by using many wires in the rope strands. Resistance to metal loss through abrasion is achieved primarily with a rope design which uses fewer and therefore larger wires in the outer layer to reduce the effects of surface wear. Therefore, from a design standpoint when anything is done to alter either abrasion resistance or fatigue resistance, both of these features will be affected.
1. STRENGTH
Wire rope strength is usually measured in tons of 2,000 pounds. In published material wire rope strength is shown as "nominal" strength. Nominal strength refers to calculated strength figures that have been accepted by the wire rope industry. When placed under tension on a test device a new rope shouId break at a figure equal to, or higher than, the nominal strength shown for that rope. To account for variables which might exist when such tests are made to determine the breaking strength of a new wire rope an "acceptance" strength may be used. The acceptance strength is 21/2% lower than the nominal strength and all ropes must meet or exceed this strength. The nominal strength applies to new, unused rope. A rope should never operate at, or near, the nominal strength. During its useful life, a rope loses strength gradually due to natural causes such as surface wear and metal fatigue.
6
NUMBER OF OUTSIDE WIRES PER STRAND
6x7 6 x19 S 6 x 21 FW Flattened Strand 6 x 25 FW

IN G LE AS T TO AB RA SI ON GR RE SI AN ST CE TO BE ND CE TI FA ST AN GU E SI RE GR AS T LE
2. RESERVE STRENGTH
RESERVE STRENGTH
10 12 12 12 14 16 16
EA TE
ST
6 x 31 WS 6 x 36 WS
TE EA ST
8 x 25 FW 6 x 49 SWS
The wire rope industry refers to this as the X-chart. It serves to illustrate the inverse relationship between abrasion resistance and resistance to bending fatigue in a representative number of the most widely used wire ropes.
The Reserve Strength of a standard rope is a relationship OF STANDARD ROPES between the strength represented by all the wires in the outer PERCENT OF strands and the wires remaining in the outer strands with the NOMINAL STRENGTH REPRESENTED outer layer of wires removed. Reserve strength is calculated BY INNER WIRES OF OUTER STRANDS using actual metallic areas of the individual wires. Since there ROPE FIBER CORE |IWRC is a direct relationship between metallic area and strength, CONSTRUCTION Reserve Strength is usually expressed as a percentage of the 6 x 7 17 rope's nominal strength. Reserve Strength is used as a relative 6 x 19 S 32 30 comparison between the internal wire load bearing capabilities 6 x 19 2 OP 40 37 of different rope constructions. 6 x 19 W 42 39 Reserve Strength is an important consideration in selec- 6 x 21 FW 36 33 tion, inspection and evaluation of a rope for applications where 6 x 25 FW 43 40 the consequences of a rope failure are great. The use of 6 x 26 WS 36 33 Reserve Strength is premised on the theory that the outer 6 x 30 Style G 26 24 wires of the strands are the first to be subjected to damage or 6 x 31 WS 43 40 wear. Therefore, the Reserve Strength figures are less signifi- 6 x 33 2 0P 44 41 cant when the rope is subjected to internal wear, damage, 6 x 36 WS 48 44 abuse, corrosion or distortion. 6 x 37 2 OP 56 52 The more wires there are in the outer layer of a strand con6 x 41 SFW 53 49 struction, the greater will be the rope's Reserve Strength. 6 x 49 SWS 53 49 Geometrically, as more wires are required in the outer layer of a strand, they must be smaller in diameter. This results in greater metallic area remaining to be filled by the inner wires. Separate columns are shown for standard Fiber Core and RESERVE STRENGTH OF IWRC ropes. For Fiber Core ropes, the Reserve Strength is the ROTATION RESISTANT ROPES approximate percentage of the rope's metallic area made up by PERCENT OF the inner wires of the outer strands. An IWRC in a rope is conNOMINAL STRENGTH REPRESENTED sidered to contribute 7-1/2% to the rope's total strength. By def- ROPE BY INNER WIRES OF STRANDS OF inition, the core is not included in the Reserve Strength calcu- CONSTRUCTION INNER AND OUTER LAYERS lation so a 7-1/2% reduction has been made for ropes with an 8 x 25 Resistwist 38 IWRC. 23 Rotation Resistant ropes, due to their construction, can 19 x 7 experience different modes of wear and failure than standard ropes. Therefore, their Reserve Strength is calculated differently. For Rotation Resistant ropes, the Reserve Strength is based on the percentage of the metallic area represented by the core strand plus the inner wires of the strands of both the outer and inner layers.
52
FEATURES FOR CONSIDERATION IN WIRE ROPE SELECTION

3. RESISTANCE TO METAL LOSS AND DEFORMATION
Metal loss refers to the actual wearing away of metal from the outer wires of a rope, and metal deformation is the changing of the shape of outer wires of a rope. In general, resistance to metal loss by abrasion (usually called "abrasion resistance") refers to a rope's ability to withstand metal being worn away along its exterior. This reduces strength of a rope. The most common form of metal deformation is generally called "peening" - since outside wires of a peened rope appear to have been "hammered" along their exposed surface. Peening usually occurs on drums, caused by rope-to-rope contact during take-up of the rope on the drum. It may also occur on sheaves. Peening causes metal fatigue, which in turn may cause wire failure. The "hammering which causes metal of the wire to flow into a new shape, realigns the grain structure of the metal, thereby affecting its fatigue resistance. The out-of-round shape also impairs wire movement when the rope bends.
4. CRUSHING RESISTANCE
Crushing is the effect of external pressure on a rope, which damages it by distorting the cross-section shape of the rope, its strands or core or all three. Crushing resistance therefore is ability to withstand or resist external forces, and is a term generally used to express comparison between ropes. When a rope is damaged by crushing, the wires, strands and core are prevented from moving and adjusting normally in operation. In a general sense, IWRC ropes are more crush resistant than fiber core ropes . . . Lang Lay ropes are less crush resistant than Regular Lay ropes . . . and 6-strand ropes have greater crush resistance than 8-strand ropes.
5. FATIGUE RESISTANCE
Fatigue resistance involves metal fatigue of the wires that make up a rope. To have high fatigue resistance, wires must be capable of bending repeatedly under stressas when a rope passes over a sheave. Increased fatigue resistance is achieved in a rope design by using a large number of wires. It involves both the basic metallurgy and the diameters of wires. In general, a rope made of many wires will have greater fatigue resistance than a same-size rope made of fewer larger wires, because smaller wires have greater ability to bend as the rope passes over sheaves or around drums. To overcome the effects of fatigue, ropes must never bend over sheaves or drums with diameter so small as to kink wires or bend them excessively.There are precise recommendations for sheave and drum sizes to properly accommodate all sizes and types of ropes. Every rope is subject to metal fatigue from bending stress while in operation, and therefore the rope's strength gradually diminishes as the rope is used.
6. BEND-ABILITY
Bend-ability relates to the ability of a rope to bend easily in an arc. Four primary factors affect this capability: 1. Diameter of wires that make the rope. 2. Rope and Strand Construction. 3. Metal Composition of wires and finish such as galvanizing. 4. Type of rope corefiber or IWRC. Some rope constructions are by nature more bend-able than others. Small ropes are more bend-able than big ones. Fiber core ropes bend more easily than comparable IWRC ropes. As a general rule, ropes made of many wires are more bend-able than same-size ropes made with fewer larger wires.
7. STABILITY
The word "stability" is most often used to describe handling and working characteristics of a rope. It is not a precise term, since the idea expressed is to some degree a matter of opinion, and is more nearly a "personality" trait than any other rope feature. For example, a rope is called stable when it spools smoothly on and off a drum . . . or doesn't tend to tangle when a multi-part reeving system is relaxed. Strand and rope construction contribute most to stability. Preformed rope is usually more stable than nonpreformed, and Lang Lay rope tends to be less stable than Regular Lay. A rope made of simple 7-wire strands will usually be more stable than a more complicated construction with many wires per strand. There is no specific measurement of rope stabiIity.
53
WIRE ROPE SELECTION HINTS

FOUR PRIMARY FACTORS
Four primary factors affect strength of any wire rope, and must be considered when specifying a rope for an application (1) DIAMETER. (2) TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION. (3) GRADE OF ROPE. (4) CORE. DIAMETER must fit the grooves of sheaves and hoisting drums. CONSTRUCTION includes number of strands, number of wires per strand, and the arrangement of the wires in each strand. GRADE OF ROPE is usually Improved Plow Steel (IPS), or Extra Improved Plow Steel (XIP) which is about 15% stronger than IPS. Specialized Wireco ropes are also available in other grades and types of steel, but IPS and XIP are standards. Ropes may be "Bright"without special finish for the wireor Galvanized. CORE is the member of a wire rope about which the strands are laid. It may be fiber, a wire strand, or an independent wire rope.
MEANING OF LAY
The term "lay" has three meanings 1) Direction strands are "layed" in a roperight or left. 2) Relationship to the direction wires are "layed" in strands to direction strands are "layed" in the ropeRegular or Lang. 3) A unit of length measure, as illustrated. In REGULAR lay wires in each strand are rayed opposite the direction the strand is layed in the ropeso exposed portions of wires appear parallel to the length of the rope. Regular lay rope is more stable, resistant to kinks and crushing than Lang lay rope. In LANG lay exposed wires appear at an angle to the length of the rope. Lang lay rope is more fatigue resistant and resists abrasion better than Regular lay, but has less stability. Lang lay ropes are used on applications where the rope is subjected to repeated bending and both ends are attached so that the rope may not rotate.
HOW TO GAUGE WIRE ROPE

Always measure the diameter of any rope at its widest pointby turning the caliper on the rope.
DESIGN FACTORS
The "catalog" nominal strength figure provided for any wire rope is not to be used as the working load which that rope can repeatedly move without failing before a reasonable amount of service is received. The catalog figure is the strength of a new, un-used wire rope of that specific construction and grade, and is to be considered the actual Breaking Strength. A rope is at its highest strength when it leaves the factory and diminishes gradually with use. Therefore a DESIGN FACTOR must be applied to the catalog strength to determine the load a rope can repeatedly move when the rope is placed in operation. The Design Factor must take into consideration such things as type of service (fast or slow, rough or smooth, sudden stops and starts, etc.), consequences of failure and design of equipment.The following Design Factors are generally accepted in the U.S wire rope industry.
TYPE OF SERVICE
MINIMUM DESIGN FACTOR
Guys Track cables Haulage ropes Overhead and gantry cranes Jib and pillar cranes Hot ladle cranes. Small electric and air hoists Mine shafts for depth to 500' for depth to 500-1000' for depth to 1000-2000' for depth to 2000-3000' for depth to 3000' or more Miscellaneous hoisting equipment Slings
3.5 3.2 6 6 6 8 7 8 7 6 5 4 5 5
54
PROPER ROPE USE

HOW TO EXTEND ROPE SERVICE LIFE
How long will your rope last? There is not a simple answer, but rather, there are several factors involved including: The manner in which you install and break in your new rope. The operating technique and work habits of the machine operators. Physical maintenance of the rope throughout its service life. Physical maintenance of the system in which your rope operates.
RECOMMENDED PRACTICES
Weve outlined several recommended practices you may use to extend your ropes useful life. Its also important to note that all sections of this article, in some respect, also review ways to help you get greater useful life from your rope, and thats why you need to thoroughly understand all the material here.
INSTALL YOUR ROPE CORRECTLY

The primary concern when installing a new rope is to not trap any twist in the rope system. Proper handling of the rope from the reel or coil to your equipment will help avoid this situation. Another important step on smooth faced drums is to spool with wraps tight and close together on the first layer. This layer forms the foundation for succeeding layers. Finally, spool the remaining rope on the drum with tension approximating 1% to 2% of the ropes nominal strength.
BREAK IN YOUR NEW ROPE PROPERLY

When you install a new operating rope, you should first run it for a brief period of time with no load. Then, for best results, run it under controlled loads and speeds to enable the wires and strands in the rope to adjust to themselves.
CONSTRUCTIONAL STRENGTH
When first put into service, new ropes normally elongate while strands go through a process of seating with one another and with the rope core. This is called constructional stretch because it is inherent in the construction of the rope, and the amount of elongation may vary from one rope to another. For standard ropes, this stretch will be about 1/4% to 1% of the ropes length. When constructional stretch needs to be minimized, ropes may be factory prestretched. Please specify when placing your order. Another type of stretch, elastic stretch, results from recoverable deformation of the metal itself. For more information, please refer to the Wire Rope Technical Data Handbook.
CUT OFF ENDS TO MOVE WEAR POINTS

If you observe wear developing in a localized area, it may be beneficial to cut off short lengths of rope. This may require an original length slightly longer than you normally use. When severe abrasion or numerous fatigue breaks occur near one end or at any one concentrated areasuch as drag ropes on draglines or closing lines in clamshell buckets, for examplethe movement of this worn section can prolong rope life. Wire breaks from vibration fatigue occur at end terminations, so short lengths cut off there with reattachment of the socket may prolong the ropes life. When broken wires are found, you should cut off sections of rope. In the case of a socket, you should cut off at least five or six feet. In the case of clips or clamps, you should cut off the entire length covered by them. Where there is an equalizing sheave, such as that found in many overhead cranes, fatigue is localized at rope tangency points to the equalizing sheave. Rope life will be increased if you shift this point by cutting off a short length at the end of one of the drums. Be sure to make this cutoff before significant wear occurs at the equalizing sheave, and always do so at the same drum.
REVERSING ENDS
Frequently, the most severe deterioration occurs at a point too far from the end or is too long to allow the worn section to be cut off. In such cases, you may turn the rope end for end to bring a less worn section into the area where conditions are most damaging.This practice is beneficial for incline rope and draglines.The change must be made well before the wear reaches the removal criteria. When changing ends, be careful to avoid kinking or otherwise damaging the rope.
55
PROPER ROPE USE

CLEAN AND LUBRICATE REGULARLY TO REDUCE WEAR
We lubricate our wire rope during manufacture so that the strandsas well as the individual wires in the strandsmay move and adjust as the rope moves and bends. But no wire rope can be lubricated sufficiently during manufacture to last its entire life. Thats why its important to lubricate periodically throughout the life of the rope. The surface of some ropes may become covered with dirt, rock dust or other material during their operation.This can prevent fieldapplied lubricants from properly penetrating into the rope, so its a good practice to clean these ropes before you lubricate them. The lubricant you apply should be light-bodied enough to penetrate to the ropes core. You an normally apply lubricant by using one of three methods: drip it on rope, spray it on or brush it on. In all cases, you should apply it at a place where the rope is bending such as around a sheave.We recommend you apply it at the top of the bend because thats where the ropes strands are spread by bending and more easily penetrated. In addition, there are pressure lubricators available commercially. Your ropes service life will be directly proportional to the effectiveness of the method you use and the amount of lubricant that reaches the ropes working parts. A proper lubricant must reduce friction, protect against corrosion and adhere to every wire. It should also be pliable and not crack or separate when coldyet not drip when warm. Never apply heavy grease to the rope because it can trap excessive grit, which can damage the rope. Nor should you apply used engine oil because it contains materials that can damage the rope. For unusual conditions, you can specify special lubricants that we can apply at the factory.
CONTINUOUS DRIP/SPRAY METHOD

This method is for applying lubricant automatically during machine operation.
MANUAL SPRAY AND BRUSH-ON METHOD

These methods are generally best accomplished at a sheave where strands are opened up, allowing lubricant to penetrate to the core.
CLEAN ROPE BEFORE LUBRICATING

Prior to relubricating rope, any large accumulations of grit or other abrasive material should be cleaned off as best as possible. This operation will allow better penetration of the lubricant, and help cut down wear on both the rope and sheaves.
56
PROPER ROPE USE

HOW TO UNREEL OR UNCOIL WIRE ROPE
There is always a danger of kinking a wire rope if you improperly unreel or uncoil it. You should mount a reel on jacks or a turntable so that it will revolve as you pull the rope off. Apply sufficient tension by means of a board acting as a brake against the reel flange to keep slack from accumulating. With a coil, stand it on edge and roll it in a straight line away from the free end. You may also place a coil on a revolving stand and pull the rope as you would from a reel or a turntable.
HOW TO STORE WIRE ROPE PROPERLY

Correct ways to unreel and uncoil wire rope. We recommend you store your wire rope under a roof or a weatherproof covering so that moisture cannot reach it. Similarly, you must avoid acid fumes or any other corrosive atmosphereincluding ocean sprayin order to protect the rope from rust. If youre storing a reel for a lengthy period, you may want to order your rope with a protective wrap. If not, at least coat the ouer layers of rope with a good rope lubricant. If you ever take a rope out of service and want to store it for future use, you should place it on a reel after youve thoroughly cleaned and relubricated it. Give the same storage considerations to your used rope as you would your new rope.
THE THREE STAGES OF KINKING

1. THE START: A rope should never be allowed to accumulate twist as shown here because it will loop and eventually form a kink. If this loop is removed before being pulled down tight, you can normally avoid the kink. 2. THE KINK: By now, the damage is done, and the rope must not be used.
Be sure to keep your wire rope in storage away from steam or hot water pipes, heated air ducts or any other source of heat that can thin out lubricant and cause it to drain out of your rope.
WARNING
In the real world, accidents do happen, and thats why you need to take special precautions. Before installing wire rope in your applications, always read and follow the warning label attached to each product.
3. THE RESULT: Even if the wires do not appear badly damaged, the rope is still damaged and must be replaced. If a twist develops, remove the twist from the rope before a kink can form.
WARNING
Wire rope WILL FAIL if worn-out, overloaded, misused, damaged, improperly maintained or abused. Wire rope failure may cause serious injury or death! Protect yourself and others: ALWAYS INSPECT wire rope for WEAR, DAMAGE or ABUSE BEFORE USE. NEVER USE wire rope that is WORN-OUT, DAMAGED or ABUSED. NEVER OVERLOAD a wire rope. INFORM YOURSELF: Read and understand manufacturers literature or Wire Rope and Wire Rope Sling Safety Bulletin. REFER TO APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS and REGULATIONS for INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS and REMOVAL CRITERIA. For additional information or the BULLETIN, ask your employer or wire rope supplier.
57
PROPER ROPE USE

WIRE ROPE INSPECTION
All wire ropes will wear out eventually and gradually lose work capability throughout their service life. Thats why periodic inspections are critical. Applicable industry standards such as ASME B30.2 for overhead and gantry cranes or federal regulations such as OSHA refer to specific inspection criteria for varied applications.
THREE PURPOSES FOR INSPECTION

Regular inspection of wire rope and equipment should be performed for three good reasons: It reveals the ropes condition and indicates the need for replacement. It can indicate if youre using the most suitable type of rope. It makes possible the discovery and correction of faults in equipment or operation that can cause costly accelerated rope wear.
HOW OFTEN
All wire ropes should be thoroughly inspected at regular intervals. The longer it has been in service or the more severe the service, the more thoroughly and frequently it should be inspected. Be sure to maintain records of each inspection.
APPOINT A QUALIFIED PERSON TO INSPECT

Inspections should be carried out by a person who has learned through special training or practical experience what to look for and who knows how to judge the importance of any abnormal conditions they may discover. It is the inspectors responsibility to obtain and follow the proper inspection criteria for each application inspected. For information on inspection methods and techniques ask us for Techreport 107: Wire Rope Inspection. If you need further assistance, contact our Product Engineering Department.
WHAT TO LOOK FOR

Heres what happens when a wire breaks under tensile load exceeding its strength. Its typically recognized by the cup and cone appearance at the point of failure. The necking down of the wire at the point of failure to form the cup and cone indicates failure has occurred while the wire retained its ductility. This is a wire with a distinct fatigue break. Its recognized by the square end perpendicular to the wire. This break was produced by a torsion machine thats used to measure the ductility. This break is similar to wire failures in the field caused by fatigue.
A wire rope that has been subjected to repeated bending over sheaves under normal loads. This results in fatigue breaks in individual wiresthese breaks are square and usually in the crown of the strands.
An example of fatigue failure of a wire rope subjected to heavy loads over small sheaves. The breaks in the valleys of the strands are caused by strand nicking. There may be crown breaks, too.
Here you see a single strand removed from a wire rope subjected to strand nicking. This condition is a result of adjacent strands rubbing against one another. While this is normal in a ropes operation, the nicking can be accentuated by high loads, small sheaves or loss of core support. The ultimate result will be individual wire breaks in the valleys of the strands.
58
PROPER ROPE USE

TYPICAL EVIDENCE OF WEAR AND ABUSE
A birdcage is caused by sudden release of tension and the resulting rebound of rope. These strands and wires will not be returned to their original positions. The rope should be replaced immediately. A kinked wire rope is shown here. Its caused by pulling down a loop in a slack line during handling, installation or operation. Note the distortion of the strands and individual wires. This rope must be replaced. Heres a wire rope that has jumped a sheave. The rope curled as it went over the edge of the sheave. When you study the wires, youll see two types of breaks here: tensile cup and cone breaks and shear breaks that appear to have been cut on an angle.
These wires have been subjected to continued peening, causing fatigue type failures. A predetermined, regularly scheduled cutoff practice can help eliminate this type of problem. This is localized wear over an equalized sheave.The danger here is that its invisible during the ropes operation, and thats why you need to inspect this portion of an operating rope regularly. The rope should be pulled off the sheave during inspection and bent to check for broken wires. This is a wire rope with a high stranda condition in which one or more strands are worn before adjoining strands.This is caused by improper socketing or seizing, kinks or dog-legs. At top, you see a closeup of the concentration of wear. At bottom, you see how it recurs every sixth strand in a 6 strand rope.
Drum crushing is caused by small drums, high loads and multiple winding conditions.
REMOVAL CRITERIA
A major portion of any wire rope inspection is the detection of broken wires. The number and type of broken wires are an indication of the ropes general condition and a benchmark for its replacement. Frequent inspections and written records help determine the rate at which wires are breaking. Replace the rope when the values given in the table below are reached. Valley wire breakswhere the wire fractures between strands or a broken wire protrudes between strandsare treated differently than those that occur on the outer surface of the rope. When there is more than one valley break, replace the rope. Broken wire removal criteria cited in many standards and specifications, like those listed below, apply to wire ropes operating on steel sheaves and drums. For wire ropes operating on sheaves and drums made with material other than steel, please contact the sheave, drum or equipment manufacturer or a qualified person for proper broken wire removal criteria.
WHEN TO REPLACE WIRE ROPEBASED ON NUMBER OF WIRES

STANDARD EQUIPMENT # OF BROKEN WIRES IN RUNNING ROPES IN ONE IN ONE AT END ROPE LAY STRAND CONNECTION # OF BROKEN WIRES IN STANDING ROPES IN ONE AT END ROPE LAY CONNECTION
ASME/B30.2 ASME/B30.4 ASME/B30.5 ASME/B30.5
Overhead and gantry cranes Portal, tower and pillar cranes Mobile and locomotive cranes running ropes Mobile and locomotive cranes rotation-resistant ropes
ASME/B30.6 Derricks ASME/B30.7 Base-mounted drum hoists ASME/B30.8 Floating cranes and derricks ASME/B30.16 Overhead hoists ANSI/A10.4 Personnel hoists ANSI/A10.5 Material hoists **Also remove for 1 valley break.
12** 4 not specified not specified not specified 6** 3 2 3 2 6** 3 2 3 2 2 randomly distributed broken wires in 6 rope diameters or 4 randomly distributed broken wires in 30 rope diameters.** 6** 3 2 3 2 6** 3 2 3 2 6** 3 2 3 2 12** 4 not specified not specified not specified 6** 3 2 2** 2 6** not specified not specified not specified
59
FLEET ANGLES & DRUMS

FLEET ANGLE
The achievement of even winding on a smooth faced drum is closely related to the magnitude of the D/d ratio, the speed of rotation, load on the rope, and the fleet angle. Of all these factors, the one that exerts perhaps the greatest influence on winding characteristics, is the fleet angle. The schematic drawing (Fig. 34) shows an installation where the wire rope runs from a fixed sheave. over a floating sheave, and then on to the surface of a smooth drum. The fleet angle (Fig. 34) may be defined as the included angle between two lines; one line drawn through the middle of the fixed sheave and the drumand perpendicular to the axis of the drum and a second line drawn from the flange of the drum to the base of the groove in the sheave. (The drum flange represents the farthest position to which the rope can travel across the drum. ) There are left and right fleet angles, measured to the left or right of the center line of the sheave, respectively. It is necessary to restrict the fleet angle on installations where wire rope passes over the lead or fixed sheave and onto a drum. For optimum efficiency and service characteristics, the angle here should not exceed 1~/: for a smooth drum, nor 2 for a grooved drum. Fleet angles larger than these suggested limits can cause such problems as bad winding on smooth drums, and the rope rubbing against the flanges of the sheave grooves. Larger angles also create situations where there is excessive crushing and abrasion of the rope on the drum. Conversely, small fleet anglesless than 1/2should also be avoided since too small an angle will cause the rope to pile up.
DRUMSGROOVED
Drums are the means by which power is transmitted to the rope and thence to the object to be moved. For the wire rope to pick up this power efficiently and to transmit it properly to the working end, installation must be carefully controlled. If the drum is grooved, the winding conditions should be closely supervised to assure adherence to the following recommended procedures: 1) The end of the rope must be secured to the drum by such means as will give the end attachment at least as much strength as is specified by the equipment manufacturer. 2) Adequate tension must be maintained on the rope while it is being wound so that the winding proceeds under continuous tension. 3) The rope must follow the groove. 4) There should be at least three dead turns remaining on the drum when the rope is unwound during normal operation. Two dead turns are a mandatory requirement in many codes and standards. If the wire rope is carelessly wound and, as a result, jumps the grooves, it will be crushed and cut where it crosses from one groove to the other. Another, almost unavoidable problem is created at the drum flange; as the rope climbs to a second layer there is further crushing and the wires receive excessive abrasion. Riser and filler strips may help remedy this condition.
SHEAVE INSPECTION
Figure 34. This illustration of wire rope running from a fixed sheave, over a floating sheave, and then on to a smooth drum, graphically defines the fleet angle. Sheaves should be checked for: 1. Correct groove diameter; 2. Roundness or contour to give proper support to the rope; 3. Small holes, cracks, uneven surfaces, or other defects that might be detrimental to the rope 4. Extreme deep wear. A sheave should also be checked to make sure it turns freely, is properly aligned, has no broken or cracked flanges, and has bearings that work properly. Drums should also be inspected for signs of wear that could damage rope. Plain-faced or smooth drums can develop grooves or impressions that prevent rope from winding properly. Repair by resurfacing the face or replacing the lagging. Scrubbing will occur if the rope tends to close wind. If the tendency is to open winding, the rope will encounter abnormal abuse as the second layer forces itself down between the open wraps of the first layer on the drum. Operating with a smooth drum calls for special care. Be sure the rope is always tightly wound and thread layed on the first layer. Any loosening of the line is easily observed as the winding will be bad and the rope will be coming off with a series of "bad spots." Grooved drums should be examined for tight or corrugated grooves and for differences in depth or pitch that could damage the second and subsequent layers.Worn grooves can develop extremely sharp edges that shave away small particles of steel from the rope. Correct this condition by grinding or filing a radius to replace the sharp edge. Drum flanges, as well as the starter, filler and riser strips, should be checked. Excessive wear here often causes unnecessary rope abuse at the change of layers and crossover points. Other places of contact such as rollers, scrub boards, guides and end attachments should also be inspected. MEASURE THE WIDEST DIAMETER Ropes and sheave grooves must be precisely fitted to each other to get the most service out of your wire rope dollar. Make measurement of rope diameter a normal part of your inspection program. There's only one right way to measure rope diameter: use machinist's calipers and be sure to measure the widest diameter. This method is not only useful for measuring the diameter of a new rope, but also for determining the amount of wear and compression that has occurred while the rope has been in use. Accurate recording of this information is essential in helping to decide when to replace wire rope.
60
FLEET ANGLES & DRUMS

DRUMSPLAIN (SMOOTH)
Installation of a wire rope on a plain ( smooth ) face drum requires a great deal of care.The starting position should be at the drum end so that each turn of the rope will wind tightly against the preceding turn (Fig. 26). Here too, close supervision should be maintained all during installation. This will help make certain that: 1) the rope is properly attached to the drum, 2) appropriate tension on the rope is maintained as it is wound on the drum, 3) each turn is guided as close to the preceding turn as possible, so that there are no gaps between turns, 4) and that there are at least two dead turns on the drum when the rope is fully unwound during normal operating cycles. Loose and uneven winding on a plain- (smooth-) faced drum, can and usually does create excessive wear, crushing and distortion of the rope. The results of such abuse are lower operating performance, and a reduction in the rope's effective strength. Also, for an operation that is sensitive in terms of moving and spotting a load, the operator will encounter control difficulties as the rope will pile up, pull into the pile and fall from the pile to the drum surface. The ensuing shock can break or otherwise damage the rope.
REEL CAPACITY
It is virtually impossible to calculate the precise length of wire rope that can be spooled on a reel or drum. The formula below provides a sufficiently close approximation based on uniform rope winding on the reel. L = (A + D) X A X B X K L = length of wire rope in fleet A = depth of rope space on reel in inches B = width of drum between flanges in inches D = barrel diameter in inches K = constant for given wire rope diameter (per table below) H = diameter in reel flanges in inches X =- clearance
K
DIAMETER (IN.)
DIAMETER (IN.)
DIAMETER (IN.)
1/16 3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16 7/32 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16
49.8 23.4 13.6 8.72 6.14 4.59 3.29 2.21 1.58 1.19
1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4
0.925 0.741 0.607 0.506 0.428 0.354 0.308 0.239 0.191 0.152
1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4 1-7/8 2 2-1/8 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-1/2
0.127 0.107 0.0886 0.0770 0.0675 0.0597 0.0532 0.0476 0.0419 0.0380
61
WIRE ROPE DRUMS

The proper direction of winding the first layer on a smooth drum can be determined by standing behind the drum and looking along the path the rope travels, and then following one of the procedures illustrated in Figure 26. The diagrams show: the correct relationship that should be maintained between the direction of lay of the rope (right or left), the direction of rotation of the drum (overwind or underwind), winding from left to right or right to left.
DRUMSMULTIPLE LAYERS
Many installations are designed with requirements for winding more than one layer of wire rope on a drum. Winding multiple layers presents some further problems. The first layer should wind in a smooth, tight helix which, if the drum is grooved, is already established. The grooves allow the operator to work off the face of the drum, and permit the minimum number of dead turns. A smooth drum presents an additional problem, initially, as the wire rope must be wound in such a manner that the first layer will be smooth and uniform and will provide a firm foundation for the layers of rope that will be wound over it. The first layer of rope on the smooth drum should be wound with tension sufficient to assure a close helixeach turn being wound as close as possible to the preceding turnand most, if not all, of the entire layer being used as dead turns.The first layer then acts as a helical groove which will guide the successive layers. Unlike wire ropes operating on groove drums, the first layer should not be unwound from a smooth-faced drum with multiple layers. After the rope has wound completely across the face of the drum (either smooth or grooved), it is forced up to a second layer at the flange. The rope then winds back across the drum in the opposite direction, Iying in the depression between the turns of the rope on the first layer. Advancing across the drum on the second layer, the rope, following the "grooves" formed by the rope on the first layer, actually winds back one turn in each revolution of the drum. The rope must then cross two rope "grooves" in order to advance across the drum for each turn. The point at which this occurs is known as the cross-over. Cross-over is unavoidable on the second, and all succeeding layers. Figure 27 illustrates the winding of a rope on the second layer from left to right, and from right to leftthe direction is shown by the arrows. At these cross-over points, the rope is subjected to severe abrasion and crushing as it is pushed over the two rope "grooves" and rides across the crown of the first rope layer. The scrubbing of the rope, as this is happening, can easily be heard. There is, however, a special drum grooving available that will greatly minimize the damage that can occur at cross-over points. Severe abrasion can also be reduced by applying the rule for the correct rope lay (right- or left-lay) to the second layer rather than to the first layer. It is for this reason that the first layer of a smooth drum should be wound tight and used as dead turns.
Figure 27. After the first layer is wound on a drum, the point at which the rope winds back for each turn is called the cross-over.
SIZE OF SHEAVES AND DRUMS

Wire rope is built to transmit power around corners, but it must be guided by sheaves. These sheaves must be properly grooved and of adequate diameter to allow the rope to bend without binding. Drums must also be of adequate diameter to prevent the rope from binding internally. Minimum recommended drum and sheave tread diameters are determined by multiplying the factor in the table below by the nominal rope diameter. D / d RATIOS
ROPE CONSTRUCTION MULTIPLYING FACTOR RECOMMENDED MINIMUM
6X7 18 X 7 6 X 19 S 6 X 21 FW 6 X 25 FW 6 X 36 WS 6 X 41 SFW 6 X 42 Tiller 8 x 19 S 8 x 25 FW D = Sheave or Drum Tread Diameter d = Nominal Wire Rope Diameter
72 51 51 45 39 35 32 21 34 32
42 33 33 30 26 22 18 14 21 20
62
CRANE SIGNALS
ALWAYS STAND IN CLEAR VIEW OF YOUR CRANE HOIST ENGINEER. BE SURE TO STAY A SAFE DISTANCE FROM HOOK, BLOCK OR BOOM.
SPANISH CHART AVAILABLE PLEASE CALL
63
GALVANIZED AND STAINLESS STEEL AIRCRAFT CABLE

7 X 7 GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLE
This is the semiflexible construction mainly specified for aircraft cable in 3/64 to 3/16 sizes. It is strong, long-lasting, ideal for supporting weights and for transmitting of mechanical power.
CODE NO. DIAMETER BREAKING STRENGTH IN LBS. WEIGHT PER LBS/1000 FT.
7x7
364ICR 116ICR 332ICR 180ICR 532ICR 316ICR
3/64 1/16 3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16
270 480 920 1700 2600 3700
4.2 7.5 16.0 28.5 43.0 62.0
7 X 7 STAINLESS STEEL AIRCRAFT CABLE

This is the semiflexible construction mainly specified for aircraft cable in 3/64 to 3/16 sizes. It is strong, long-lasting, ideal for supporting weights and for transmitting of mechanical power.
7x7
364IFR 3/64 116IFR 1/16 332IFR 3/32 180IFR 1/8 532IFR 5/32 316IFR 3/16 NOTE: Type 304 Standard Type 316 Available.
270 480 920 1700 2600 3700
4.2 7.5 16.0 28.5 43.0 62.0
7 X 19 GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLE

Standard flexible aircraft and stainless steel cable in 3/32 to 3/8 sizes. Tough construction, resists crushing of heavy loads, used where flexibility and good resistance to wear is required.
7 x 19
332ECR 180ECR 532ECR 316ECR 732ECR 140ECR 516ECR 380ECR
3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16 7/32 1/4 5/16 3/8
1050 2000 2800 4200 5600 7000 9800 14,400
16.0 29.0 45.0 65.0 86.0 110.0 173.0 243.0
7 X 19 STAINLESS STEEL AIRCRAFT CABLE

Standard flexible aircraft and stainless steel cable in 3/32 to 3/8 sizes. Tough construction, resists crushing of heavy loads, used where flexibility and good resistance to wear is required.
7 x 19
332EFR 3/32 180EFR 1/8 532EFR 5/32 316EFR 3/16 732EFR 7/32 140EFR 1/4 516EFR 5/16 380EFR 3/8 NOTE: Type 304 Standard Type 316 Available.
1000 1760 2400 3700 5000 6400 9000 12,000
16.0 29.0 45.0 65.0 86.0 110.0 173.0 243.0
LARGER DIAMETERS AVAILABLE IN 6 x 25 AND 6 x 37 CONSTRUCTION

64
VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE

VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE
Small diameter 7 x 7 and 7 x 19 construction wire rope is sometimes referred to as aircraft cable. It is not intended for aircraft use, but designed for industrial and marine applications. When using wire rope clips with plastic coated cable, match clip size to uncoated cable diameter (3/16 cable coated to 1/4 takes 3/16 clip.) Strip plastic coating off cable where clips will be positioned for full holding power.
7 X 7 GALVANIZED VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE

CODE NO. CABLE DIAMETER COATED DIAMETER BREAKING STRENGTH IN LBS. WEIGHT PER LBS/1000 FT.
116IKR332 116IKR180 332IKR180 332IKR316 180IKR316 7x7
1/16 1/16 3/32 3/32 1/8
3/32 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16
480 480 920 920 1700
11.5 13.5 20.0 28.0 39.0
7 X 7 STAINLESS STEEL VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE

7x7
116IHR332 1/16 3/32 116IHR180 1/16 1/8 332IHR180 3/32 1/8 332IHR316 3/32 3/16 180IHR316 1/8 3/16 NOTE: Type 304 Standard Type 316 Available.
480 480 920 920 1700
11.5 13.5 20.0 28.0 39.0
7 X 19 GALVANIZED VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE

7 x 19
332EKR180 332EKR316 180EKR316 316EKR140 140EKR516 516EKR380 380EKR716
3/32 3/32 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8
1/8 3/16 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16
1050 1050 2000 4200 7000 9800 14,400
22.0 28.0 39.0 78.0 125.0 196.0 272.0
7 X 19 STAINLESS STEEL VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE

7 x 19
332EHR180 3/32 1/8 332EHR316 3/32 3/16 180EHR316 1/8 3/16 316EHR140 3/16 1/4 140EHR516 1/4 5/16 516EHR380 5/16 3/8 380EHR716 3/8 7/16 NOTE: Type 304 Standard Type 316 Available.
1000 1000 1760 3700 6400 9000 12,000
22.0 28.0 39.0 78.0 125.0 196.0 272.0
New Black Powder Coated 1/8" GAC for Theatrical Use
NYLON COATED, COLORS AND OTHER SIZES AVAILABLE

65
CABLE CUTTERS AND HAND SWAGING TOOLS

PRECISION CABLE CUTTERS
CODE NO. CAPACITY LENGTH WEIGHT
C-7 C-9 C-12 C-16
3/16 diameter and smaller 1/4 diameter and smaller 3/8 diameter and smaller 5/8 diameter and smaller
8 13 19 23
10 oz. 1.5 lbs. 3 lbs. 5 lbs.
TYPE SC-1 ECONOMY CUTTER

SC-1
1/2 diameter and smaller
28
5 lbs.
SWAGING TOOLS
NO. 000-WCI HAND SWAGER Small, compact, can be carried in your pocket. Has built in cable cutter. Packaged in plastic pouch.
000-WCI
1/32, 3/64, 1/16 oval and stop sleeves
12 oz.
NO. 0-SC HAND SWAGERS Single compression die for oval and stop sleeve swaging.
0-3/32SC 0-1/8SC 0-5/32SC 0-3/16SC
3/32 oval and 3/32, 1/8 stop 1/8 oval and 5/32, 3/16, 7/32 stop 5/32 oval 3/16 oval
20 20 20 20
4.2 lbs. 4.2 lbs. 4.2 lbs. 4.2 lbs.
NO. 0 HAND SWAGERS Single compression die for oval and stop sleeve swaging.
0-7/32 0-1/4 0-9/32 0-5/16
7/32 oval 1/4 oval and 1/4, 3/92, 5/16 oval 9/32 oval 5/16 oval
28 28 28 28
5 lbs. 5 lbs. 5 lbs. 5 lbs.
NO.1-SC HAND SWAGER Multicompression hand swager with cable cutter. Swags a total of 11 sizes plus the ability to cut up to 7/32 diameter aircraft quality steel cable. A tool with a dozen functions.
SWAGER
1/16, 3/32, 1/8, 5/32, 3/16 oval 1/16, 3/32, 1/8, 5/32, 3/16, 7/32 stop SWAGER-2 5/32", 1/4", 5/16" oval SWAGER-3 3/8" oval
26 30" 36"
6.5 lbs. 10 lbs. 13.5 lbs.
BENCH MOUNTED SWAGER AND OTHER MODELS & TYPES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE
66
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
EYE, LOOP, BALL, STUD AND FORK FITTINGS ARE AVAILABLE
OVAL AND STOP SLEEVES

OVAL AND STOP SLEEVES
Sleeves for eye, lap, and stop sleeve splicing are available in either aluminum or copper in a wide variety of sizes ranging from 3/64 to 1/2 inclusive. All oval sleeves (copper or aluminum) are capable of supporting a load 40 to 60 percent of the rated breaking strength of the cable to which they are attached. Stop sleeves are capable of holding only 1/3 to 1/2 of the rated breaking strength of the cable to which they are attached if attached properly.
TO FIT CABLE DIAMETER
ALUMINUM OVAL
COPPER OVAL
ZINC PLATED COPPER OVAL
ALUMINUM STOP
COPPER STOP
3/64 1/16 3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16 7/32 1/4 9/32 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2
NICOA364 NICOA116 NICOA332 NICOA180 NICOA532 NICOA316 NICOA732 NICOA140 NICOA932 NICOA516 NICOA380 NICOA716 NICOA120
NICOC364 NICOC116 NICOC332 NICOC180 NICOC532 NICOC316 NICOC732 NICOC140 NICOC932 NICOC516 NICOC380 NICOC716 NICOC120
NICOZ364 NICOZ116 NICOZ332 NICOZ180 NICOZ532 NICOZ316 NICOZ732 NICOZ140 NICOZ932 NICOZ516 NICOZ380 NICOZ716 NICOZ120
STOPA364 STOPA116 STOPA332 STOPA180 STOPA532 STOPA316 STOPA732 STOPA140 STOPA932 STOPA516 STOPA380
STOPC364 STOPC116 STOPC332 STOPC180 STOPC532 STOPC316 STOPC732 STOPC140
LIGHT DUTY WIRE ROPE THIMBLES

STAINLESS STEEL TYPE AN-100C 304 ALLOY
CODE NO. WEIGHT PER FOR CABLE 100 PCS. DIMENSIONS (REF.) DIAMETER (LBS.) A (IN.) B (IN.) C (IN.) CODE NO. WEIGHT PER FOR CABLE 100 PCS. DIMENSIONS (REF.) DIAMETER (LBS.) A (IN.) B (IN.) C (IN.)
AN100-C3 3/64 - 1/16 AN100-C4 3/32 - 1/8 AN100-C5 5/32 AN100-C6 3/16
0.35 0.45 0.60 0.98
0.97 1.00 1.14 1.45
0.68 0.78 0.80 1.03
0.35 0.34 0.40 0.50
AN100-C8 7/32 - 1/4 AN100-C10 5/16 AN100-C12 3/8
1.59 4.76 6.67
1.98 2.42 2.93
1.47 1.80 1.95
0.72 0.90 1.00
ZINC PLATED STEEL TYPE AN-100

CODE NO. WEIGHT PER FOR CABLE 100 PCS. DIMENSIONS (REF.) DIAMETER (LBS.) A (IN.) B (IN.) C (IN.) CODE NO. WEIGHT PER FOR CABLE 100 PCS. DIMENSIONS (REF.) DIAMETER (LBS.) A (IN.) B (IN.) C (IN.)
AN100-3 AN100-4 AN100-5 AN100-6
1/16 - 3/32 3/32 - 1/8 5/32 3/16
0.36 0.49 0.70 1.12
0.97 1.00 1.14 1.45
0.68 0.78 0.80 1.03
0.35 0.34 0.40 0.50
AN100-8 7/32 - 1/4 AN100-10 5/16 AN100-12 3/8
1.72 4.76 6.67
1.98 2.42 2.93
1.47 1.80 1.95
0.72 0.90 1.00
For Heavy Duty Thimbles See Page 79

67
CABLE GRIPS
TO FIT SIZES 1/4 - 1/2 AND 5/8 - 3/4
The ideal tool to grip the wire rope so it can be pulled, tugged, dragged, etc.not used for overhead lifting. General use in wire rope distributor warehouses. In the field with construction crews wherever wire rope is used. In mines-coal-silver-copper used in conjunction with mining conveyors.
CODE NO. ACCEPTS WIRE SIZE
1604-20L .125 to .50 1625-20 .28 to .75 NOTE: Larger sizes and different styles available.
WIRE ROPE CUTTER

FAST: The cut is made in a matter of seconds. SAFE: All blades retained within the housing at moment of impact. RUGGED: Shock resistant, malleable iron casting and tool steel blades. CLEAN CUTTING: U shaped blades (both top and bottom) help rope keep its original shape. PORTABLE: Newly designed castings cut dead weight without impairing strength of housing. LOWER COST than hydraulic or shear type cutters of equal capacity. QUICK FIELD REPAIRS made using only a hammer and punch. PAINTAll units painted bright Roadbuilders Equipment Yellow. Government Spec. Numbers: GGG C 800, Type III, Sizes 1, 2 and 3. Stock #5110-293-1066.
CODE NO. SIZE NO. CUTS WEIGHT
MSCUT1 1 Small base size
5/8 Wire Rope
7 lbs.
CODE NO.
SIZE NO.
CUTS
WEIGHT
MSCUT2 2 Large base size
1-1/16 Wire Rope
15-1/2 lbs.
CODE NO.
SIZE NO.
CUTS
WEIGHT
MSCUT3 3 Large base size
1-1/2 Wire Rope
28-1/2 lbs.
68
FIELD INSTALLABLE ELECTROLINE FITTINGS

GROOVED PLUG ON HEMP-CENTER ROPE
1. Wire rope passed through sleeve and strands fanned out for insertion of fluted plug.
2. Plug driven in and strands closed to apply socket.
3. Socket applied showing twisted strands and completed assembly. The cutaway section of the sleeve indicates the graduated compression grip and the extension of the sleeve byond the gripping area with a clearance fit. This all important vibration damping zone dissipates the vibration energy before it reaches the gripping zone, and prolongs rope life.
OTHER FITTINGS AVAILABLE

Open End or Clevis Eye End Stud End Coupling Turnbuckle Fig. 600 Fig. 601 Fig. 602 Fig. 603 Fig. 604 Fig. 605 Fig. 606
STAINLESS STEEL AND MANY OTHER FITTINGS ALSO AVAILABLE
Double End Turnbuckle Hook End
69
CROSBY CLIPSWARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the catalog breaking strength of wire rope. The efficiency rating of a properly prepared loop or thimble - eye termination for clip sizes 1/8 through 7/8 is 80%, and for sizes 1 through 3-1/2 is 90%. The number of clips shown (see Table I) is based upon using RRL or RLL wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6 x 37 Class, FC or IWRC; IPS or XIP. If Seale construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the 6 x 19 Class is to be used for sizes 1 inch and larger, add one additional clip. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. The number of clips shown also applies to rotation - resistant RRL wire rope, 8 x 19 Class, IPS, XIP, sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller; and to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class, IPS, XIP, sizes 1-3/4 inch and smaller. For other classes of wire rope not mentioned above, we recommend contacting Crosby Engineering at the address or telephone number on the back cover to ensure the desired efficiency rating. For elevator, personnel hoist, and scaffold applications, refer to ANSI A17.1 and ANSI A10.4. These standards do not recommend U-Bolt style wire rope clip terminations. The style wire rope termination used for any application is the obligation of the user. For OSHA (Construction) applications, see OSHA 1926.251.
G-450 (Red U-Bolt)
SS-450 (316 Stainless Steel)
1. Refer to Table I in following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip one
base width from dead end of rope. Apply U-Bolt over dead end of wire rope - live end rests in saddle (Never saddle a dead horse!) Tighten nuts evenly, alternate from one nut to the other until reaching the recommended torque.
2. When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible. Tighten nuts evenly, alternating
until reaching the recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten. Proceed to Step 3.ble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten. Proceed to Step 3.
3. When three or more clips are required, space additional clips equally between first two - take up rope slack - tighten nuts on
each U-Bolt evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque.
4. WIRE ROPE SPLICING PROCEDURES:

The preferred method of splicing two wire ropes together is to use interlocking turnback eyes with himbles, using the recommended number of clips on each eye (See Figure 1). An alternate method is to use twice the number of clips as used for a turnback termination. The rope ends are placed parallel to each other, overlapping by twice the turnback amount shown in the application instructions. The minimum number of clips should be installed on each dead end (See Figure 2). Spacing, installation torque, and other instructions still apply.
5. IMPORTANT
Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and retighten nuts to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and maintenance practices, the wire rope end termination should be inspected periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy.
STD. PKG. QTY. WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.) ROPE SIZE (IN.) MINIMUM NO. OF CLIPS AMOUNT OF ROPE TO TURN BACK IN INCHES *TORQUE IN FT. LBS.
WARNING
Failure to read, understand, and follow these instructions may cause death or serious injury. Read and understand these instructions before using clips. Match the same size clip to the same size wire rope. Prepare wire rope end termination only as instructed. Do not use with plastic coated wire rope. Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and retighten nuts to recommended torque (See Table 1, this page).
CODE NO.
1010015 1010033 1010051 1010079 1010097 1010113 1010131 1010159 1010177 1010195 1010211 1010239 1010257 1010275 1010293 1010319 1010337 1010355 1010373 1010391 1010417 1010435 1010453 1010426
100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 Bulk Bulk Bulk Bulk Bulk Bulk Bulk Bulk
6 10 19 28 48 78 80 109 110 142 212 252 283 438 442 544 704 934 1300 1600 1900 2300 3100 4000
1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-3/4 3 3-1/2
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 12
3-1/4 3-3/4 4-3/4 5-1/4 6-1/2 7 11-1/2 12 12 18 19 26 34 44 44 54 58 61 71 73 84 100 106 149
4.5 7.5 15 30 45 65 65 95 95 130 225 225 225 360 360 360 430 590 750 750 750 750 1200 1200
*Electro-plated U-Bolt and Nuts 2-3/4 and 3-1/2 base is made of cast steel. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. If a greater number of clips are used than shown in the table, the amount of turnback should be increased proportionately. *The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.
70
CROSBY FIST GRIP CLIPSWARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the catalog breaking strength of wire rope. The efficiency rating of a properly prepared loop or thimble-eye termination for clip sizes 1/8" through 7/8" is 80%, and for sizes 1" through 3-1/2" is 90%. The number of clips shown (see Table I) is based upon using RRL or RLL wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6 x 37 Class, FC or IWRC; IPS or XIP. If Seale construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the 6 x 19 Class is to be used for sizes 1 inch and larger, add one additional clip. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. The number of clips shown also applies to rotation - resistant RRL wire rope, 8 x 19 Class, IPS XIP, sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller; and to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class, IPS, XIP, sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller. For other classes of wire rope not mentioned above, we recommend contacting Crosby Engineering at the address or telephone number on the back cover to ensure the desired efficiency rating. The style of wire rope termination used for any application is the obligation of the user. For OSHA (Construction) applications, see OSHA 1926.251.
G-429
1. Refer to Table I in following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip one
base width from dead end of rope. Tighten nuts evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching the recommended torque.
2. When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible. Tighten nuts evenly, alternating
until reaching the recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten. Proceed to Step 3.
3. When three or more clips are required, space additional clips equally between first two - take up rope slack - tighten nuts on
each U-Bolt evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque.
4. WIRE ROPE SPLICING PROCEDURES:

The preferred method of splicing two wire ropes together is to use interlocking turnback eyes with thimbles, using the recommended number of clips on each eye (See Figure 1). An alternate method is to use twice the number of clips as used for a turnback termination. The rope ends are placed parallel to each other, overlapping by twice the turnback amount shown in the application instructions.The minimum number of clips should be installed on each dead end (See Figure 2). Spacing, installation torque, and other instructions still apply.
5. IMPORTANT
WARNING
Failure to read, understand, and follow these instructions may cause death or serious injury. Read and understand these instructions before using clips. Match the same size clip to the same size wire rope. Prepare wire rope end termination only as instructed. Do not use with plastic coated wire rope. Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and retighten nuts to recommended torque (See Table 1, this page).
Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and retighten nuts to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and maintenance practices, the wire rope end termination should be inspected periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy
ROPE SIZE (IN.) STD. PKG. QTY. WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.) MINIMUM NO. OF CLIPS AMOUNT OF ROPE TO TURN BACK IN INCHES *TORQUE IN FT. LBS.
CODE NO.
1010471 1010499 1010514 1010532 1010550 1010578 1010596 1010612 1010630 1010658 1010676
3/16 - 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 - 1/2 9/16 - 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 - 1-1/2
100 100 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 Bulk
23 28 40 62 103 175 225 300 400 400 700
2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5
4 5 5-1/4 11 13-1/2 16 26 37 41 55 78
30 30 45 65 130 225 225 225 360 360 500
If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. If a greater number of clips are used than shown in the table, the amount of turnback should be increased proportionately. *The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.
71
CROSBY FORGED SHACKLES

Screw Pin Anchor Shackles
G-209
S-209
Screw pin anchor shackles meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class 2, except for those provisions required of the contractor.
Shackles are Quenched and Tempered and can meet DNV impact requirements of 42 joules at -20C. Working Load Limit permanently shown on every shackle. Forged - Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pin. Capacities 1/3 thru 55 metric tons. Look for the Red Pin. . .the mark of genuine Crosby quality. Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charged for proof testing and certification available when requested at the time of order. Hot Dip galvanized or Self-Colored. Fatigue Rated.
Nominal Size (in.) 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2
Working Load Limit (t)* 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3-1/4 4-3/4 6-1/2 8-1/2 9-1/2 12 13-1/2 17 25 35 55
Stock No. G-209 1018357 1018375 1018393 1018419 1018437 1018455 1018473 1018491 1018516 1018534 1018552 1018570 1018598 1018614 1018632 1018650 1018678 S-209 1018384 1018400 1018428 1018446 1018464 1018482 1018507 1018525 1018543 1018561 1018589 1018605 1018623 1018641 1018669 1018687
Weight Each (lbs.) .06 .10 .19 .31 .38 .72 1.37 2.35 3.62 5.03 7.41 9.50 13.53 17.20 27.78 45.00 85.75
Dimensions (in.) A .38 .47 .53 .66 .75 .81 1.06 1.25 1.44 1.69 1.81 2.03 2.25 2.38 2.88 3.25 4.13 B .25 .31 .38 .44 .50 .63 .75 .88 1.00 1.13 1.25 1.38 1.50 1.63 2.00 2.25 2.75 C .88 1.13 1.22 1.44 1.69 1.88 2.38 2.81 3.31 3.75 4.25 4.69 5.25 5.75 7.00 7.75 10.50 D .19 .25 .31 .38 .44 .50 .63 .75 .88 1.00 1.16 1.29 1.42 1.54 1.84 2.08 2.71 E .60 .78 .84 1.03 1.16 1.31 1.69 2.00 2.28 2.69 2.91 3.25 3.63 3.88 5.00 5.75 7.25 F .56 .61 .75 .91 1.06 1.19 1.50 1.81 2.09 2.38 2.69 3.00 3.31 3.63 4.19 4.81 5.69 G .98 1.28 1.47 1.78 2.03 2.31 2.94 3.50 4.03 4.69 5.16 5.75 6.38 6.88 8.86 9.97 12.87 H 1.47 1.84 2.09 2.49 2.91 3.28 4.19 4.97 5.83 6.56 7.47 8.25 9.16 10.00 12.34 13.68 17.84 L .16 .19 .22 .25 .31 .38 .44 .50 .50 .56 .63 .69 .75 .81 1.00 1.22 1.38 M 1.12 1.38 1.66 2.03 2.38 2.69 3.34 3.97 4.50 5.07 5.59 6.16 6.84 7.35 9.08 10.34 13.00 P .19 .25 .31 .38 .44 .50 .69 .81 .97 1.06 1.25 1.38 1.50 1.62 2.25 2.40 3.13
NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. For Working Load Limit reduction due to side loading applications, see page 75.
72
CROSBY BOLT-TYPE SHACKLES

Bolt Type Anchor Shackles
G-2130
S-2130
BoltType Anchor shackles with thin head bolt - nut with cotter pin. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specifications RR-C-271D type IVA, Grade A Class 3, except for those provisions required of the contrractor.
Working Load Limit permanently shown on every shackle. Capacities 1/3 thru 150 metric tons. Forged - Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins. Look for the Red Pin. . .the mark of genuine Crosby quality. Shackles 55 metric tons and smaller can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Certification must be requested at time of order. Shackles 85 metric tons and larger can be provided as follows. Non Destructive Tested Serialized Pin and Bow Material Certification (Chemical) Certification must be requested at time of order. Hot Dip galvanized or Self-Colored. Fatigue Rated.
Nominal Size (in.) 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2
Working Load Limit (t)* 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3-1/4 4-3/4 6-1/2 8-1/2 9-1/2 12 13-1/2 17 25 35 55
Stock No. G-2130 1019464 1019466 1019468 1019470 1019471 1019472 1019490 1019515 1019533 1019551 1019579 1019597 1019613 1019631 1019659 1019677 1019695 S-2130 1019481 1019506 1019524 1019542 1019560 1019588 1019604 1019622 1019640 1019668 1019686 1019702
Weight Each (lbs.) .06 .11 .22 .33 .49 .79 1.68 2.72 3.95 5.66 8.27 11.71 15.83 20.80 33.91 52.25 98.25
Dimensions (in.) A .38 .47 .53 .66 .75 .81 1.06 1.25 1.44 1.69 1.81 2.03 2.25 2.38 2.88 3.25 4.13 B .25 .31 .38 .44 .50 .63 .75 .88 1.00 1.13 1.25 1.38 1.50 1.63 2.00 2.25 2.75 C .88 1.13 1.22 1.44 1.69 1.88 2.38 2.81 3.31 3.75 4.25 4.69 5.25 5.75 7.00 7.75 10.50 D .19 .25 .31 .38 .44 .50 .63 .75 .88 1.00 1.13 1.25 1.38 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.62 E .60 .78 .84 1.03 1.16 1.31 1.69 2.00 2.28 2.69 2.91 3.25 3.63 3.88 5.00 5.75 7.25 F .56 .61 .75 .91 1.06 1.19 1.50 1.81 2.09 2.38 2.69 3.00 3.31 3.63 4.19 4.81 5.69 H 1.47 1.84 2.09 2.49 2.91 3.28 4.19 4.97 5.83 6.56 7.47 8.25 9.16 10.00 12.34 13.68 17.84 L .98 1.28 1.47 1.78 2.03 2.31 2.94 3.50 1.03 4.69 5.16 5.75 6.38 6.88 8.86 9.97 12.87 N .19 .25 .31 .38 .44 .50 .69 .81 .97 1.06 1.25 1.38 1.50 1.62 2.25 2.40 3.13
NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. For Working Load Limit reduction due to side loading applications, see page 75. Individually Proof Tested with certification. Furnished in Anchor style only. Furnished with Round Head Bolts with welded handles.
73
CROSBY SHACKLESAPPLICATION INFORMATION

ROUND PIN SHACKLES
can be used in tie down, towing, suspension or lifting applications where the load is strictly applied in-line.
CODE NO. SIZE RANGE
G/S-213 G/S-215
3/16 (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2 (55 Tons) 3/16 (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2 (55 Tons)
Round Pin Anchor Shackle Round Pin Chain Shackle
G/S-213
G/S-215
SCREW PIN SHACKLES

can be used in any application where a round pin shackle is used. In addition, screw pin shackles can be used for applications involving side-loading circumstances. Reduced working load limits are required for side-loading applications. While in service, do not allow the screw pin to be rotated by a live line, such as a choker application.
CODE NO. SIZE RANGE
SS-209
G-209A
SS-209 G-209A G/S-209 G/S-210
3/16 (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2 (55 Tons) 3/16 (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2 (55 Tons) 3/16 (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2 (55 Tons) 3/16 (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2 (55 Tons)
Stainless Steel Shackle Alloy Shackles Screw Pin Anchor Shackle Screw Pin Chain Shackle
G/S-209
G/S-210
BOLT-TYPE SHACKLES
can be used in any applications where round pin or screw pin shackles are used. In addition, they are recommended for permanent or long term installations and where the load may slide on the shackle pin causing the pin to rotate.
CODE NO. SIZE RANGE
G/S-2130
G/S-2150
G/S-2130 G/S-2150 G/S-2140 G/S-2160
3/16 (1/3 ton) to 4 (150 Tons) 3/16 (1/3 ton) to 4 (150 Tons) 3/16 (30 ton) to 2-1/2 (400 Tons) 3/16 (75 ton) to 2-1/2 (1000 Tons)
Safety Anchor Shackle Bolt Type Chain Shackle Alloy Safety Anchor Shackle Wide Body Shackle
G - Galvanized S - Painted
G/S-2140 G/S-2160
QUICK-CHECK INFORMATION
All Crosby Shackles, except for G-2160s incorporate markings forged into the product which address an easy QUIC-CHECK feature. Angle indicators are forged into the shackle bow at 45 angles from vertical. These are utilized to quickly check the approximate angle of a two-legged hitch or quickly check the angle of a single leg hitch when the shackle pin is secured and the pull of the load is off vertical or side loaded, thus requiring a reduction in the working load limit of the shackle.
G-2130
74
CROSBY SHACKLES SAFETY INFORMATION

Angle loads must be applied in the plane of the bow.
Side Loading Reduction Chart For Screw Pin and Bolt Type Shackles Only Angle of Side Load from Vertical In-Line of Shackle Adjusted Working Load Limit 0 In-Line* 100% of Rated working Load Limit 45 from In-Line* 70% of Rated Working Load Limit 90 from In-Line* 50% of Rated Working Load Limit
*In-Line load is applied perpendicular to pin. DO NOT SIDE LOAD ROUND PIN SHACKLES
Never Exceed 120 included angle. Use bolt Type and Screw Pin Shackles ONLY.
Shackles symmetrically loaded with two leg slings having a maximum included angle of 120 can be utilized to full working Load Limit.
Copyright 2003 The Crosby Group, Inc. All rights reserved BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com
75
CROSBY 320N HOIST HOOKS

CROSBY EYE HOIST HOOKS
S-320 & S-320N EYE HOOKS
Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK features. Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook up, which allows for a QUICCHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage. Angle Indicators - Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. these indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs.
Working Load Limit (Tons) S-320C Carbon S-320A Alloy 3/4 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 3 3 5** 5 7 7-1/2 11 10 15 15 22 20 30 25 37 30 45 40 60
Hook ID Code* D F G H I J K L N O P S T
Dimensions (In.) C 3.34 3.81 4.14 4.69 5.77 7.37 9.07 10.08 12.53 14.06 18.19 20.12 23.72 D 2.83 3.11 3.53 3.97 4.81 6.27 7.45 8.30 10.30 13.62 14.06 15.44 18.50 F 1.25 1.38 1.50 1.63 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.25 4.25 5.00 5.38 6.00 7.00 G .73 .84 1.00 1.13 1.44 1.81 2.25 2.59 3.00 3.62 4.56 5.06 6.00 J .90 .93 1.00 1.13 1.47 1.75 2.29 2.50 3.30 4.00 4.25 4.75 5.75 K .63 .71 .88 .94 1.31 1.66 1.88 2.19 2.69 3.00 4.00 4.50 5.50 M .63 .71 .88 .94 1.31 1.66 1.83 1.94 2.38 3.00 3.19 3.25 3.91 N .36 .42 .55 .58 .72 .90 1.11 1.27 1.56 1.75 2.00 2.18 2.53 O .89 .91 1.00 1.09 1.36 1.61 2.08 2.27 3.02 3.25 3.00 3.38 4.12 Q .75 .91 1.13 1.25 1.56 2.00 2.44 2.84 3.50 3.50 4.50 4.94 5.69 T .87 .98 1.03 1.16 1.53 1.96 2.47 2.62 2.83 3.44 3.88 4.75 5.69 AA 1.50 2.00 3.00 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 6.50 7.00 8.00 10.00
*Eye Hooks (3/4 TC-22TA), Proof load is 2.5 times working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20T - 60TA), Proof Load is 2 times working Load Limit. All carbon hooks-average straightening loads (ultimate load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 1 ton through 22 tons-average straightening load (ultimate load) is 5 times working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 30 tons through 60 tonsaverage straightening load (ultimate load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit.
SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION ON PAGE 80.
WARNING
76
CROSBY S-3322 SWIVEL HOOK

CROSBY S-3322 SWIVEL HOOK
New Anti-Friction Bearing Design Allows Hook To Rotate Freely Under Load
Capacities: 2, 3, 5, 7, 11 & 15 metric tons 4 to 1 Design Factor Contains patented QUICCHECK markings forged into the product which address two QUIC-CHECK features: Forged alloy hook & bail Quenched & Tempered Replacement latches available Heavy duty stamped latch interlocks with hook tip. High cycle, long life spring
Deformation Indicators & Angle Indicators
When secured with proper cotter pin through the hole in the tip of hook, meets the intent of OSHA Rule 1926.550(g) for personnel hoisting Low profile hook tip designed to utilize Crosby S-4320 or PL-N integrated latch.
NEW
S-3322 Swivel Hook Specifications

Working Load Limit (t) * 2 3 5 7 11 15 S-3322 Stock No. 1028605 1028614 1028623 1028632 1028641 1028650 Hook ID Code G H I J K L Weight Each (lbs.) 2.5 3.8 7.0 14.0 22.3 37.8 S-4320 Latch Stock No. 1096421 1096468 1096515 1096562 1096609 1096657 PL-N Latch Stock No. 1092000 1092001 1092002 1092003
1 thru 30 Ton Models Available in the old style S-322A

Working Load Limit (t)* 2 3 5 7 11 15 Hook ID Code G H I J K L Dimensions (In.) A 3.00 3.50 4.00 5.00 5.62 7.12 B 1.50 1.56 1.56 1.94 2.05 3.62 C 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.75 3.12 4.10 D 3.59 4.00 4.84 6.27 7.54 8.33 F 1.50 1.62 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.25 G 1.00 1.13 1.44 1.81 2.25 2.59 H 1.16 1.31 1.63 2.06 2.63 2.94 J 1.06 .1.19 1.50 1.78 2.14 2.62 K .88 .94 1.31 1.66 1.88 2.19 L 7.64 8.60 10.32 12.84 15.24 18.64 M .88 .94 1.13 1.44 1.63 1.94 O 1.06 1.16 1.41 1.69 2.22 2.41 R 6.01 6.72 8.00 9.90 11.74 14.41 S .63 .75 .88 1.13 1.25 1.50 AA 2.00 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00
*NOTE: Designed with a 4 to 1 design factor. Proof Load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit.
77
HOOK LATCHES
NEW STYLE S-4320 FOR 320N HOOKS
Latch kits shipped unassembled and individually packaged with instructions.
CODE NO. HOOK SIZE (TONS) CARBON ALLOY WEIGHT EA. (LBS.) A B DIMENSIONS (IN.) C D E
1096325 3/4 1 1096374 1 1-1/2 1096421 1-1/2 2 1096468 2 3 1096515 3 5** 1096562 5 7 1096609 7-1/2 11 1096657 10 15 1096704 15 22 **New 5 ton Alloy was previous 4-1/2 ton.
.03 .04 .04 .06 .10 .15 .28 .33 .84
.94 1.00 1.09 1.21 1.53 1.88 2.38 2.62 3.44
.50 .54 .63 .66 .83 1.04 1.25 1.35 1.66
.20 .22 .23 .28 .35 .44 .53 .59 .66
.15 .17 .17 .17 .20 .20 .27 .27 .39
1.44 1.56 1.66 1.91 2.31 2.88 3.44 3.81 5.18
POSITIVE LOCKING FLAPPER LATCH

Patented in U.S.A. and Canada. Heavy duty latch with easy operating features. Hot Dip galvanized. Flapper lever indicates locked or unlocked position. Assembly instructions included with easy latch. For additional dimensional data on eye or shank hooks refer to pages 79 through 85 in this section. Meets the intent of OSHA Rule 1926.550(g) (when secured with the bolt, nut and pin) for lifting personnel.
PL LATCH KIT HOOK SIZE (TONS) CODE NO. CARBON ALLOY WEIGHT EA. (LBS.) A B DIMENSIONS (IN.) C D E F
1093711 3 4-1/2 .54 2.57 1093712 5 7 .66 3.00 1093713 7-1/2 11 1.00 3.63 1093714 10 15 1.25 4.00 1093715 15 22 2.96 5.31 1093716 20 30 4.05 6.00 1093717 25 37 8.673 7.00 1093718 30 45 10.00 6.75 1093719 40 60 14.30 8.00 1093720 50 75 27.00 9.88 1093721 100-150 33.25 10.88 1093723 200 45.00 11.88 1093724 300 55.00 12.50 Patented in USA and Canada. NOTE: The PL Latch will not work on 320N Hooks.
2.34 2.34 2.77 3.22 4.00 4.44 6.63 7.00 7.66 8.19 11.06 11.19 12.19
1.94 2.00 2.38 2.69 2.91 3.19 4.06 4.03 4.38 5.13 6.38 6.38 8.00
.56 .63 .63 .63 .84 1.06 2.24 2.24 3.46 3.38 3.38 3.38 3.38
1.13 1.38 1.63 1.88 2.38 2.88 4.50 4.75 5.50 6.50 7.50 8.75 9.75
2.00 2.22 2.38 3.38 3.44 4.25 6.12 6.38 7.25 8.88 10.00 11.25 13.00
OLD STYLE SS-4055 CROSBY LATCH KIT FOR 320C HOOKS

Stainless steel construction with cadmium plated steel nuts. Shipped packaged and unassembled. Instructions included for easy field assembly. Specify latch kit stock number. Specify capacity of hook to which latch will be assembled. Specify hook material (carbon or alloy).
CODE NO. CARBON HOOK SIZE (TONS) ALLOY BRONZE WEIGHT EA. (LBS.) A DIMENSIONS (IN.) B C D
1090027 1090045 1090063 1090081 1090107 1090125 1090143 1090161 1090189 1090205
3/4 1 1-1/2 - 2 3 5 7-1.2 - 10 15 20 25 - 30 40
1 1-1/2 2-3 4-1.2 7 11 - 15 22 30 37 - 45 60
.5 .6 1.0 - 1.4 2.0 3.5 5.0 - 6.5 10.0
.02 .02 .03 .06 .11 .17 .39 .63 1.12 1.77
.38 .38 .47 .56 .58 .59 .83 .94 2.19 3.31
.16 .16 .19 .17 .20 .27 .39 .52 .39 .52
1.44 1.60 1.84 2.41 2.97 3.66 4.94 5.88 6.50 7.88
.59 .59 .82 1.00 1.21 1.50 1.90 2.56 3.84 4.12
78
SPECIAL LATCHES TO FIT ANY HOOK

Installed cost is much less than the cost of labor alone in machining a conventional safety hook. Can be installed on any hook in minutes with only simple tools.
SIZE OF CODE NO. LATCH DIMENSIONS (IN.) NECK N THROAT T SIZE OF CODE NO. LATCH DIMENSIONS (IN.) NECK N THROAT T
SL-A SL-B SL-C SL-D SL-E SL-F SL-G
A B C D E F G
9/16 - 5/8 1-1/16 - 1-1/8 3/4 - 13/16 1-1/4 7/8 - 1 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 1-3/4 - 1-7/8 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 2-1/16 1-5/8 - 1-11/16 2-1/4 1-3/4 - 1-13/16 2-1/2
SL-H SL-J SL-K SL-L SL-M SL-O
H J K L M O
1-7/8 - 2 2-1/16 - 2-1/8 2-3/16 - 2-1/4 2-5/16 - 2-3/8 2-7/16 - 2-3/4 3 - 3-1/4
3 3-3/8 3-1/2 3-3/4 4 4-1/2
WIRE ROPE THIMBLES

G-411 STANDARD WIRE ROPE THIMBLES
Recommended for light duty service. Hot Dip galvanized steel. G-411 meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type II, except for those provisions required of the contractor.
CODE NO. ROPE DIA. (IN.) WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.) A B C DIMENSIONS (IN.) D E F G H
1037256 1037274 1037292 1037318 1037336 1037354 1037372 1037390 1037416 1037434 1037452
1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 - 1-1/4
3.50 3.50 3.50 4.00 6.70 12.50 34.50 47.10 84.60 97.50 175.00
1.94 1.94 1.94 2.13 2.38 2.75 3.50 3.75 5.00 5.69 6.25
1.31 1.31 1.31 1.50 1.63 1.88 2.25 2.50 3.50 4.25 4.50
1.06 1.06 1.06 1.25 1.47 1.75 2.38 2.69 3.19 3.75 4.31
.69 .69 .69 .81 .94 1.13 1.38 1.63 1.88 2.50 2.75
.25 .31 .38 .44 .53 .69 .91 1.08 1.27 1.39 1.75
.16 .22 .28 .34 .41 .53 .66 .78 .94 1.06 1.31
.05 .05 .05 .05 .06 .08 .13 .14 .16 .16 .22
.13 .13 .13 .13 .16 .19 .34 .34 .44 .41 .50
G-414 AND SS-414 EXTRA HEAVY WIRE ROPE THIMBLES

A rugged rope thimble recommended for heavy duty service. Available in Hot Dip galvanized or Stainless Steel. G-414 meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type III, except for those provisions required of the contractor. SS414 sizes available in stainless steel type 304.
G-414 GALV. CODE NO. SS-414 STAINLESS CODE NO. DIMENSIONS (IN.) ROPE DIA. (IN.) WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.) A B C D E F G H
1037639 1037657 1037675 1037693 1037719 1037737 1037755 1037773 1037791 1037817 1037835 1037853 1037871 1037899 1037915 1037933 1037951
1037960 1/4 1037988 5/16 1038004 3/8 7/16 1038022 1/2 9/16 1038040 5/8 1038068 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 1-1/4 - 1-3/8 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4 1-7/8 - 2 2-1/4
6.50 11.80 21.60 34.70 51.00 51.00 75.70 158.10 177.80 313.90 400.00 811.00 1294.80 1700.00 1775.00 2775.00 3950.00
2.19 1.63 2.50 1.88 2.88 2.13 3.25 2.38 3.63 2.75 3.63 2.75 4.25 3.25 5.00 3.75 5.50 4.25 6.13 4.50 7.00 5.13 9.06 6.50 9.00 6.25 11.25 8.00 12.19 9.00 15.13 12.00 17.13 14.00
1.50 1.81 2.13 2.38 2.75 2.69 3.13 3.81 4.25 4.94 5.88 6.81 7.13 8.13 8.50 10.38 11.88
.88 1.06 1.13 1.25 1.50 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.88 3.50 3.50 4.00 4.50 6.00 7.00
.41 .50 .63 .721 .81 .88 .97 1.22 1.38 1.56 1.81 2.19 2.56 2.72 2.84 3.09 3.63
.28 .34 .41 .47 .53 .59 .66 .78 .94 1.06 1.31 1.44 1.56 1.72 1.84 2.09 2.38
.06 .08 .11 .13 .14 .14 .16 .22 .22 .25 .25 .38 .50 .50 .50 .50 .63
.23 .28 .34 .38 .41 .41 .50 .66 .75 .88 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.38 1.31 1.50 1.63
79
CROSBY HOIST HOOK WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREAD AND FOLLOW
A visual periodic inspection for cracks, nicks, wear, gouges and deformation as part of a comprehensive documented inspection program, should be conducted by trained personnel in compliance with the schedule in ANSI B30. 10. For hooks used in frequent load cycles or pulsating loads, the hook and threads should be periodically inspected by Magnetic Particle or Dye Penetrant. (Note: Some disassembly may be required.) S-319 S-320 Never use a hook whose throat opening has been increased, or whose tip has been bent more than 10 degrees out of plane from the hook body, or is in any other way distorted or bent. Note: A latch will not work properly on a hook with a bent or worn tip. Never use a hook that is worn beyond the limits shown in Figure 1. Remove from service any hook with a crack, nick, or gouge. Hooks with a crack, nick, or gouge shall be repaired by grinding lengthwise, following the contour of the hook, provided that the reduced dimension is within the limits shown in Figure 1. Never repair, alter, rework, or reshape a hook by welding, heating, burning, or bending. Never side load, back load, or tip load a hook. (See Figure 2.) S-320N S-322 Eye hooks, shank hooks and swivel hooks are designed to be used with wire rope or chain. Efficiency of assembly may be reduced when used with synthetic material. Do not swivel the S-322 swivel hook while it is supporting a load. The use of a latch may be mandatory by regulations or safety codes; e.g., OSHA, MSHA, ANSI/ASME B30, Insurance, etc.. (Note: When using latches, see instructions in "Understanding: The Crosby Group Warnings" for further information.) Always make sure the hook supports the load. (See Figure 3). The latch must never support the load (See Figure 4). When placing two (2) sling legs in hook, make sure the angle from the vertical to the outermost leg is not greater than 45 degrees, and the included angle between the legs does not exceed 90 degrees* (See Figure 5). See ANSI/ASME B30.10 "Hooks" for additional information.
FIGURE 1
WARNING
Loads may disengage from hook if proper procedures are not followed. A falling load may cause serious injury or death. See OSHA Rule 1926.550(g) for personnel hoisting by cranes or derricks. A Crosby 319, 320, or 322 hook with a PL Latch attached (when secured with bolt, nut and pin) may be used for lifting personnel. A Crosby S-320N Hook with a S-4320 Latch attached (when secured with cotter pin or bolt, nut and pin) may be used for lifting personnel. Threads may corrode and/or strip and drop the load. Hook must always support the load.The load must never be supported by the latch. Never apply more force than the hook's assigned Working Load Limit (WLL) rating. Read and understand these instructions before using hook.
*For angles greater than 90 degrees, or more than two (2) legs, a master link or bolt type anchor shackle should be used to attach the legs of the sling to the hook.
FIGURE 2
FIGURE 3
FIGURE 4
FIGURE 5
80
CROSBY SWIVELS
TIMKEN BEARING EQUIPPED SWIVELS
Load Rated. All hooks furnished with latches assembled. All jaws complete with bolts, nuts and cotter pins. Sealed for pressure lubrication. Cadmium plated through 15 ton sizes. Larger capacities available through 45 tons. NOTE: Individually Proof Tested to twice the Safe Working Load. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Safe Working Load. Also available in wedge socket type.
CODE NO. WORKING LOAD LIMIT* METRIC TONS TYPE WIRE ROPE WEIGHT SIZE (IN.) LBS. EACH CODE NO. WORKING LOAD LIMIT* METRIC TONS TYPE WIRE ROPE WEIGHT SIZE (IN.) LBS. EACH
S-1 JAW & HOOK
S-2 JAW & JAW
S-3 JAW & EYE
S-4 EYE & JAW
S-5 EYE & EYE
S-6 EYE & HOOK
297011 297020 297039 297048 297057 297066 297217 297226 297235 297244 297253 297262 297413 297422 297431 297440 297459 297468 297618 297627 297636 297645 297654 297663
3-S-1 3-S-2 3-S-3 3-S-4 3-S-5 3-S-6 5-S-1 5-S-2 5-S-3 5-S-4 5-S-5 5-S-6 8-1/2-S-1 8-1/2-S-2 8-1/2-S-3 8-1/2-S-4 8-1/2-S-5 8-1/2-S-6 10-S-1 10-S-2 10-S-3 10-S-4 10-S-5 10-S-6
3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 8-1/2 8-1/2 8-1/2 8-1/2 8-1/2 8-1/2 10 10 10 10 10 10
1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8
9.81 9.63 9.12 9.00 8.50 9.32 15.51 13.69 13.50 12.33 11.30 14.24 29.42 26.16 24.90 29.00 29.25 32.00 46.75 45.75 43.50 44.00 42.00 45.50
297814 297823 297832 297841 297850 297869 298118 298127 298136 298145 298154 298163 298216 298225 298234 298243 298252 298261 298314 298323 298332 298341 298350 298369
15-S-1 15-S-2 15-S-3 15-S-4 15-S-5 15-S-6 25-S-1 25-S-2 25-S-3 25-S-4 25-S-5 25-S-6 35-S-1 35-S-2 35-S-3 35-S-4 35-S-5 35-S-6 45-S-1 45-S-2 45-S-3 45-S-4 45-S-5 45-S-6
15 15 15 15 15 15 25 25 25 25 25 25 35 35 35 35 35 35 45 45 45 45 45 45
1 1 1 1 1 1
73.75 62.75 61.00 61.00 49.00 63.00 140.00 140.00 135.00 135.00 130.00 135.00 220.00 155.00 150.00 150.00 145.00 215.00 251.00 235.00 225.00 225.00 215.00 270.00
G-402 REGULAR SWIVEL

Hot dip galvanized. Quenched and Tempered. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Spec. RR-C-271D, Type VII, Class 2, except for those provisions required of the contractor. NOTE: Ultimate Load is 5 times the Safe Working Load.
CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (LBS.) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (LBS.) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.)
1016019 1016037 1016055 1016073 1016091
1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8
850 1250 2250 3600 5200
.21 .39 .71 1.32 2.49
1016117 1016135 1016153 1016188 1016215
3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
7200 10000 12500 18000 45200
4.02 6.25 8.95 16.37 45.79
Note: NOT INTENDED TO SWIVEL UNDER LOAD.
G-403 JAW END SWIVEL

Hot dip galvanized. Quenched and Tempered. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Spec. RR-C-271D, Type VII, Class 3, except for those provisions required of the contractor. NOTE: Ultimate Load is 5 times the Safe Working Load.
CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (LBS.) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (LBS.) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.)
1016395 1016411 1016439 1016457 1016475
1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8
850 1250 2250 3600 5200
.21 .34 .66 1.34 2.48
1016493 1016518 1016536 1016572 1016590
3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
7200 10000 12500 18000 45200
3.88 5.87 9.84 15.75 54.75
Note: NOT INTENDED TO SWIVEL UNDER LOAD.
81
CROSBY ANGULAR CONTACT BEARING SWIVELS

Wide range of products available. Capacity: .45 through 35 tons. Wire Rope Sizes: 1/8 through 1-1/2. Models: 7 standard configurations. Angular contact bearings maximize efficiency, reliability and service life of swivel and extend the life of the wire rope. Designed for high rotation speed: Lower torque required to initiate rotation. Individually Proof Tested to 2 times the Working Load Limit with certification. Hook models utilize genuine Crosby hooks which are forged alloy steel, Quenched and Tempered and contain the patented QUIC-CHECK markings. Design Factor of 5 to 1. Entire swivel is Zinc plated to resist corrosion.
AS-1 JAW AND HOOK

Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) EA. (LBS.) A B C DIMENSIONS (IN.) D E F G H I AA
1016001 1016010 1016025 1016026 1016040 1016045 1016056 1016064 1016075 1016082
.45 .75 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.5 10 15 25 35
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
.7 .9 2.3 6.5 12.9 26.4 53.0 53.0 97.0 140.0
.88 1.31 1.63 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00
.25 .38 .50 .75 .88 1.19 1.50 1.50 2.00 2.00
.25 .31 .50 .75 1.00 1.56 1.75 1.75 2.00 2.00
.38 .44 .69 .94 1.13 1.34 1.75 1.75 2.38 2.38
.41 .56 .78 1.19 1.53 2.09 3.50 3.50 3.69 3.69
4.25 5.38 6.25 8.63 10.69 13.69 17.75 17.75 20.88 24.00
2.88 3.19 4.09 4.94 6.50 8.69 11.00 11.00 13.63 14.06
.88 .97 1.13 1.06 1.81 1.91 2.75 2.75 3.38 3.00
.75 .84 1.13 1.44 1.81 2.59 3.00 3.00 3.63 4.56
1.50 1.50 1.50 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 5.00 6.50 7.00
AS-2 JAW & JAW

WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) EA. (LBS.) A B C D DIMENSIONS (IN.) E F G H
1016103 1016114 1016122 1016131 1016139 1016148 1016157 1016166 1016175 1016184
.45 .75 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.5 10 15 25 35
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
.4 .9 2.0 4.9 9.6 15.8 40.0 40.0 78.0 78.0
.88 1.31 1.63 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00
2.38 3.56 4.06 6.25 7.75 9.63 14.00 14.00 15.94 15.94
3.13 4.44 5.44 8.13 10.63 12.31 17.50 17.50 20.69 20.69
.38 .44 .69 .94 1.13 1.34 1.75 1.75 2.38 2.38
.25 .31 .50 .75 1.00 1.56 1.75 1.75 2.00 2.00
.25 .38 .50 .75 .88 1.19 1.50 1.50 2.03 2.03
.19 .22 .28 .38 .53 .56 .81 .81 1.13 1.13
.41 .56 .78 1.19 1.53 2.09 3.50 3.50 3.69 3.69
AS-3 JAW & EYE

WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE EA. CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) (LBS.) A B C D DIMENSIONS (IN.) E F G H I J K L
1016205 1016216 1016224 1016232 1016243 1016250 1016259 1016268 1016277 1016286
.45 .75 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.5 10 15 25 35
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
.3 .9 1.9 4.6 9.1 15.6 39.0 40.0 78.0 78.0
.88 1.31 1.63 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00
2.50 3.69 4.19 6.19 7.88 9.50 13.75 13.44 16.00 16.00
3.25 4.56 5.44 8.13 10.19 12.25 17.31 17.31 20.75 20.75
.25 .19 .25 .31 .22 .38 .50 .28 .50 .75 .38 .75 1.00 .53 .88 1.56 .56 1.25 1.75 .81 1.50 1.75 .81 1.50 2.00 1.13 2.00 2.00 1.13 2.00
.38 .44 .69 .94 1.13 1.34 1.75 1.75 2.38 2.38
.41 .56 .78 1.19 1.50 2.09 3.50 3.50 3.69 3.69
.25 .31 .50 .75 1.00 1.25 2.00 2.00 2.25 2.25
.25 .38 .66 .91 1.25 1.41 1.63 2.00 3.31 2.31
.38 .44 .63 1.00 1.19 1.50 1.81 2.13 2.38 2.38
.84 .88 1.38 2.00 2.63 3.13 4.69 4.69 5.25 5.25
82
CROSBY ANGULAR CONTACT BEARING SWIVELS

AS-4 EYE & JAW
WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE EA. CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) (LBS.) A B C D DIMENSIONS (IN.) E F G H I J K L
1016306 1016314 1016325 1016332 1016343 1016352 1016361 1016370 1016375 1016379
.45 .75 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.5 10 15 25 35
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
.3 .9 1.9 4.6 9.1 15.7 39.0 40.0 75.0 75.0
.88 1.31 1.63 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00
2.50 3.63 4.19 6.19 7.88 9.44 14.13 13.81 15.94 15.94
3.25 4.56 5.50 8.13 10.19 12.25 17.75 17.75 20.75 20.75
.25 .19 .25 .31 .22 .38 .50 .28 .50 .75 .38 .75 1.00 .53 .88 1.56 .56 1.19 1.75 .81 1.50 1.75 .81 1.50 2.00 1.13 2.31 2.00 1.13 2.31
.38 .44 .69 .94 1.13 1.34 1.75 1.75 2.38 2.38
.41 .56 .78 1.19 1.44 2.09 3.50 3.50 3.69 3.69
.25 .31 .50 .75 1.00 1.25 1.72 2.00 2.25 2.25
.25 .38 .66 .91 1.25 1.41 1.66 2.03 2.31 2.31
.38 .44 .63 1.00 1.19 1.50 1.81 2.13 2.38 2.38
.81 .88 1.34 2.00 2.63 3.13 4.69 4.69 5.25 5.25
AS-5 EYE & EYE

CODE NO. WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) EA. (LBS.) A B C DIMENSIONS (IN.) D E F G
1016409 1016418 1016427 1016436 1016445 1016454 1016463 1016472 1016481 1016490
.45 .75 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.5 10 15 25 35
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
.3 .9 1.8 4.3 8.6 15.4 37.0 39.0 72.0 72.0
.88 1.31 1.63 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00
2.63 3.75 4.31 6.13 7.75 9.31 13.88 13.25 16.00 18.00
3.38 4.63 5.56 8.13 10.63 12.31 17.50 17.50 20.75 20.75
.38 .44 .63 1.00 1.19 1.50 1.81 2.13 2.38 2.38
.25 .31 .50 .75 1.00 1.25 1.72 2.00 2.25 2.25
.25 .38 .66 .91 1.25 1.41 1.63 2.13 2.31 2.31
.81 .88 1.34 2.00 2.63 3.13 4.69 4.69 5.25 5.25
AS-6 EYE & HOOK

CODE NO. WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.)EA. (LBS.) A B C DIMENSIONS (IN.) D E F G H AA
1016502 1016513 1016520 1016529 1016538 1016547 1016556 1016565 1016574 1016583
.45 .75 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.5 10 15 25 35
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
.7 1.5 2.9 6.2 12.4 23.5 52.0 53.0 94.0 138.0
.88 1.31 1.63 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00
4.31 5.50 6.13 8.56 10.75 13.56 17.88 17.44 20.88 24.00
2.88 3.19 4.09 4.94 6.50 8.69 11.00 11.00 13.63 14.06
.88 .97 1.13 1.06 1.81 1.90 2.75 2.75 3.38 3.00
.25 .38 .66 .91 1.25 1.40 1.66 2.03 2.34 2.34
.81 .88 1.34 2.00 2.63 3.13 4.69 4.69 5.25 5.25
.25 .31 .50 .75 1.00 1.25 1.72 2.00 2.25 2.25
.75 .84 1.13 1.55 1.81 2.59 3.00 3.00 3.63 4.63
1.50 1.50 1.50 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 5.00 6.50 7.00
AS-7 BULLET STYLE JAW & JAW

CODE NO. WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) EA. (LBS.) A B C DIMENSIONS (IN.) D E F G
1016604 1016611 1016622 1016631 1016640 1016649 1016652 1016658 1016662 1016667
.45 .75 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.5 10 15 25 35
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
.4 1.1 1.8 3.8 8.0 14.5 40.0 40.0 84.0 84.0
.88 1.31 1.63 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00
2.38 3.56 4.06 5.44 7.75 9.88 13.13 13.13 15.94 15.94
3.13 4.44 5.19 7.06 10.06 12.38 16.75 16.75 20.75 20.75
.38 .44 .56 .81 1.13 1.25 1.75 1.75 2.38 2.38
.25 .31 .50 .75 1.00 1.31 1.75 1.75 2.00 2.00
.31 .38 .44 .63 .88 1.00 1.50 1.50 2.00 2.00
.40 .56 .81 .94 1.56 2.13 3.25 3.25 3.69 3.69
83
SPECIAL HOOKS
A-350 SLIDING CHOKER HOOKS
Forged Alloy Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. When ordering, EYE diameter C should be specified.
SINGLE WORKING WEIGHT PART ROPE LOAD EACH SIZE (IN.) LIMIT (LBS.) (LBS.) DIMENSIONS (IN.) A B C D E F G H L P R
CODE NO.
1028042 1028060 1028088 1028122 5108710 5108705
3/8 2500 0.77 1/2 3300 1.19 5/8 5000 2.89 3/4 8000 2.95 7/8 - 1 20,680 11.5 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 31,960 30
2.06 2.25 3.06 3.38 4.50 5.63
1.13 1.31 1.63 2.13
.63 .75 .75 1.00 1.25 2.13
2.41 2.97 3.56 4.25
.63 .38 .78 .50 .94 .56 1.16 .63 2.00 .88 1.75 1.25
.84 .91 .97 1.06 1.13 1.31 1.44 1.63
4.28 4.97 6.38 7.66 9.32 13.1
2.59 .63 3.09 .75 3.88 1.00 4.56 1.13 1.50 1.75
G-3315 SNAP HOOKS

Forged Carbon Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Pressed steel latches and stainless steel springs, bolts and nuts. For replacement latch kit, order Code No. 9900299. Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.
HOOK CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) WORKING LOAD WEIGHT LIMIT (LBS.) EACH (LBS.) DIMENSIONS (IN.) A B C D E F L R
1023056 1023074
7/16 9/16
750 1000
.23 .52
.25 .34
.75 1.12
.75 .81
.44 .56
2.25 2.69
.75 .88
3.94 4.75
3.25 3.84
S-3316 REPLACEMENT HOOK

Easily attached to any chain and electric hoist with welded link load chain, roller chain or wire rope with suitable end fitting. Swivel jaw is forged. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
S-3316 CODE NO. S.C. WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) DIMENSIONS (IN.) A B C D H L O P R T
1023029 1023047
1/2 1
1.25 2.61
1.31 1.56
.76 1.00
.56 .69
3.19 4.09
.38 .44
6.12 7.69
.97 1.12
2.25 2.84
4.59 5.81
.81 1.19
G-377 AND S-377 BARREL HOOKS

Forged Carbon Steel. Galvanized. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D, Type V, Class 6, except for those provisions required of the contractor. Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.
CODE NO. PER PAIR G-377 GALV. CODE NO. PER PAIR S-377 S.C. WORKING LOAD LIMIT PER PAIR (TONS) WEIGHT EACH PER PAIR (LBS.) I.D. OF EYE DIMENSIONS (IN.) O.D. OVERALL OF EYE LENGTH WIDTH OF LIP
1028239
1028248
3.56
1.56
2.81
5.00
2.88
A-378 SORTING HOOK

Forged Alloy Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Deep straight throat permits efficient handling of flat plates or large cylindrical shapes.The long tapered point allows easy grab in rings, pear links, eye bolts or lifting holes.. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
WORKING LOAD LIMIT AT TIP OF HOOK (TONS) WORKING LOAD LIMIT AT BOTTOM OF HOOK (TONS) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) DIMENSIONS (IN.) OPENING OVERALL AT TOP OF LENGTH HOOK RADIUS AT BOTTOM OF HOOK
CODE NO.
I.D. OF EYE
1028024
7-1/2
6.42
1.38
9.69
2.81
.625
84
COUPLING LINKS PAD EYES EYE NUTS

A-336 LOK-A-LOY 6 CONNECTING LINK
Individually proof tested. Forged alloy steel. Quenched and tempered. Easy to assemble. Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. Wider openings than G-80 Links.
CHAIN SIZE (IN.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) DIMENSIONS (IN.) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) A B C D E DIA. HOLE TO ACCEPT LINK
CODE NO.
1014397 1014413 1014431 1014459 1014477 1014495 1014510 1014538
1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4
3250 6600 11250 16500 23000 28750 38750 57500
.24 .58 1.20 2.42 2.89 6.08 7.03 13.20
.31 .45 .58 .78 .89 1.00 1.08 1.38
2.06 2.72 3.34 3.91 4.84 5.81 6.48 8.48
1.69 2.31 3.16 3.94 4.44 5.31 6.07 7.65
.78 1.06 1.28 1.56 1.97 2.38 2.84 3.77
.78 1.09 1.41 1.69 2.00 2.12 2.55 3.77
.50 .66 .88 1.06 1.19 1.38 1.47 1.73
S-247 DOUBLE CLEVIS LINK

Designed for linking all popular sizes of Crosby Spectrum 3 and Spectrum 4 chain to rings, end links, eye hooks, pad eyes, tractor eyebolts, etc. All pins Alloy Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Body is forged and heat treated carbon steel. Features quick and easy assembly. Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.
WORKING WEIGHT CHAIN LOAD EACH SIZE (IN.) LIMIT (LBS.) (LBS.) A DIMENSIONS (IN.) B C D E F G H L N P R
CODE NO.
1013021 1013049 1013067 1013085
1/4 5/16 - 3/8 7/16 1/2
2600 .38 .50 .75 .50 .31 5400 .81 .56 1.00 .63 .44 7000 1.25 .69 1.13 .69 .56 9200 1.56 .81 1.25 .75 .63
.38 .75 1.00 .81 .47 1.00 1.19 1.00 .59 1.09 1.31 1.19 .66 1.25 1.44 1.31
2.81 3.53 4.06 4.53
1.38 1.75 2.00 2.25
1.66 2.25 2.50 2.75
1.50 1.91 2.19 2.47
S-264 PAD EYES

Forged Steel. Quenched and tempered. Forged from 1035 Carbon Steel. Excellent welding qualities. Widely used on farm machinery, trucks, steel hulled marine vessels and material handling equipment. Reference American Welding Society specifications for proper welding procedures. S-264 meets the requirements of Military Specification MS-51930A.
CODE NO. SIZE NO. WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.) B C D DIMENSIONS (IN.) E G H L
1090722 1090740 1090768 1090786 1090802 1090820
0 1 1-1/2 2 4 5
2.80 6.50 10.40 21.10 52.20 82.50
.25 .38 .63 .75 1.00 1.25
.19 .25 .25 .38 .56 .69
.63 .88 1.00 1.06 1.44 1.75
.31 .41 .44 .50 .78 .81
.63 .88 1.13 1.50 2.13 2.63
.09 .13 .16 .19 .22 .25
.75 1.03 1.31 1.63 2.34 2.75
G-400 EYE NUTS

Forged Steel. Quenched and tempered. Hot Dip galvanized. Tapped with standard UNC class 2 threads after galvanizing. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Rating based on standard tap size.
STOCK SIZE (IN.) S STD. TAP SIZE WORKING LOAD WEIGHT LIMIT EACH (LBS.) (LBS.) DIMENSIONS (IN.) A C D E F J M T
CODE NO.
SIZE NO.
1090438 1090474 1090517 1090535 1090553 1090571 1090599 1090633 1090651 1090679 1090697
1 2 3A 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
.25 .31 .38 .50 .63 .75 .88 1.00 1.13 1.25 1.50
1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 2
520 .09 1250 .17 2250 .28 3600 .60 5200 1.00 7200 1.65 10000 2.69 15500 3.87 18500 5.00 22500 6.78 40000 14.60
1.25 1.63 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.63 7.00
.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.13 4.00
1.06 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.38 2.63 3.06 3.50 3.75 4.00 6.25
.66 .75 1.00 1.19 1.38 1.63 1.88 1.94 2.00 2.38 4.00
.50 .56 .81 1.00 1.13 1.31 1.56 1.88 2.00 2.25 3.38
.69 .81 1.00 1.31 1.50 1.88 2.13 2.38 2.56 3.00 4.00
.25 1.69 .38 2.06 .50 2.50 .63 3.19 .75 3.88 .88 4.31 1.00 5.00 1.25 5.75 1.38 6.25 1.50 6.75 2.00 10.00
85
FORGED EYE BOLTS

G-291 REGULAR NUT EYE BOLT
Recommended for straight line pull. All Bolts Hot Dip galvanized after threading (UNC). Furnished with standard Hot Dip galvanized hex nuts. Forged Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Working Load Limit shown is for in-line pull.
SHANK DIA. & LENGTH (IN.) 1/4 x 2 1/4 1/4 x 4 1/4 5/16 x 2-1/4 5/16 x 2-1/4 5/16 x 4-1/4 5/16 x 4-1/4 3/8 x 2-1/2 3/8 x 2-1/2 3/8 x 4-1/2 3/8 x 4-1/2 3/8 3/8 x 6 1/2 x 3-1/4 1/2 x 3-1/4 1/2 1/2 x 6 1/2 1/2 x 8 1/2 1/2 x 10 1/2 x 12 1/2 x 12 5/8 x 4 5/8 x 4 5/8 x 6 5/8 x 6 5/8 x 8 5/8 x 8 5/8 x 10 5/8 x 10 5/8 x 12 5/8 x 12 3/4 x 4-1/2 3/4 x 4-1/2 3/4 x 6 3/4 x 6 3/4 x 8 3/4 x 8 3/4 x 10 3/4 x 10 3/4 x 12 3/4 x 12 3/4 x 15 3/4 x 15 7/8 x 5 7/8 x 8 7/8 x 5 7/8 x 8 7/8 x 12 7/8 x 6 1 x 12 1x6 1x9 1x9 1 x 12 1 x 12 1 x 18 1x x 1-1/4188 1-1/4xx12 1-1/4 8 1-1/4 x 20 1-1/4 x 12 1-1/4 x 20 WORKING WEIGHT LOAD PER LIMIT 100 (LBS.) (LBS.) 650 8.20 650 8.20 650 11.70 650 11.70 1200 13.30 1200 13.30 1200 25.00 1200 25.00 1550 23.30 1200 25.00 1550 23.30 1550 29.50 1550 29.50 1550 35.20 1550 35.20 2600 50.30 2600 50.30 2600 66.10 2600 66.10 2600 82.00 2600 82.00 2600 88.00 2600 88.00 2600 114.20 2600 5200 114.20 103.10 5200 5200 103.10 118.20 5200 5200 118.20 135.10 5200 5200 135.10 153.60 5200 5200 153.60 167.10 5200 7200 167.10 168.60 7200 168.60 7200 184.50 7200 184.50 7200 207.90 7200 207.90 7200 235.00 7200 235.00 7200 257.50 7200 257.50 7200 298.00 7200 298.00 10600 270.00 270.00 10600 10600 308.00 308.00 10600 10600 400.00 400.00 10600 13300 421.00 41.00 13300 13300 468.50 13300 4688.50 13300 540.00 540.00 13300 13300 650.00 650.00 13300 21000 750.00 750.00 21000 21000 900.00 900.00 21000 21000 1210.00 DIMENSIONS (IN.) A .25 .25 .25 .25 .31 .31 .31 .31 .38 .31 .38 .38 .38 .38 .38 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .88 .88 .88 .88 .88 .88 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 B .50 .50 .50 .50 .62 .62 .62 .62 .75 .62 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1 00 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 C 1.00 1 00 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.50 1.25 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 D .25 .25 .25 .25 .31 .31 .31 .31 .38 .31 .38 .38 .38 .38 .38 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .50 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .62 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .75 .88 .88 .88 .88 .88 .88 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1 00 1 1.0 00 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 E 1.50 1.50 2.50 2.50 1.50 1.50 2.50 2.50 1.50 2.50 1.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 1.50 1.50 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 2.00 2.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 4.00 4.00 2.00 2.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00 2.50 2.50 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 3.00 3.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 7.00 7.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 6.00 F 2.00 2.00 4.00 4.00 2.25 2.25 4.25 4.25 2.50 4.25 2.50 4.50 4.50 6.00 6.00 3.25 3.25 6.00 6.00 8.00 8.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00 4.00 4.00 6.00 6.00 8.00 8.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00 14.50 14.50 16.00 16.00 18.00 18.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00 15.00 15.00 5.00 5.00 8.00 8.00 12.00 12.00 6.00 6.00 9.00 9.00 12.00 12.00 18.00 18.00 8.00 8.00 12.00 12.00 20.00 G 3.06 3.06 5.06 5.06 3.56 3.56 5.56 5.56 4.12 5.56 4.12 6.12 6.12 7.62 7.62 5.38 5.38 8.12 8.12 10.12 10.12 12.12 12.12 14.12 14.12 6.69 6.69 8.69 8.69 10.69 10.69 12.69 12.69 14.69 14.69 7.69 7.69 9.19 9.19 11.19 11.19 13.19 13.19 15.19 15.19 18.19 18.19 8.75 8.75 11.75 11.75 15.75 15.75 10.31 10.31 13.31 13.31 22.31 22.31 22.31 22.31 13.38 13.38 17.38 17.38 25.38 H .56 .56 .69 .69 .88 .69 .88 .88 .88 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.31 2.31 2.31 2.31 2.31 2.31 2.31 2.31 2.88 2.88 2.88 2.88 2.88
CODE NO. 1043230 1043230 1043258 1043258 1043276 1043276 1043294 1043294 1043310 1043310 1043338 1043338 1043356 1043356 1043374 1043374 1043392 1043392 1043418 1043418 1043436 1043436 1043454 1043454 1043472 1043472 1043490 1043490 1043515 1043515 1043533 1043533 1043551 1043551 1043579 1043579 1043597 1043597 1043613 1043613 1043631 1043631 1043659 1043659 1043677 1043677 1043695 1043695 1043711 1043711 1043739 1043739 1043757 1043757 1043775 1043775 1043793 1043793 1043819 1043819 1043837 1043837 1043855 1043855 1043873 1043873
G-277 SHOULDER NUT EYE BOLTS

Forged Steel. All bolts Hot Dip galvanized after threading (UNC). Furnished with standard Hot Dip galvanized, heavy hex nuts. Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Working Load Limit shown is for in-line pull.
SHANK DIA. & LENGTH (IN.) 1/4 x 2 1/4 x 4 5/16 x 2-1/4 5/16 x 4-1/4 3/8 x 2-1/2 3/8 x 4-1/2 1/2 x 3-1/4 1/2 x 6 5/8 x 4 5/8 x 6 3/4 x 4-1/2 3/4 x 6 7/8 x 5 1x6 1x9 1-1/4 x 8 1-1/4 x 12 1-1/2 x 15 WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) 650 650 1200 1200 1550 1550 2600 2600 5200 5200 7200 7200 10600 13300 13300 21000 21000 24000 WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.) 6.60 9.10 12.50 18.80 21.40 25.30 142.60 56.80 168.60 102.40 144.50 167.50 225.00 366.30 422.50 650.00 795.00 1425.00 DIMENSIONS (IN.) A .25 .25 .31 .31 .38 .38 .50 .50 .62 .62 .75 .75 .88 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.50 B .50 .50 .62 .62 .75 .75 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.50 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.00 2.50 2.50 3.00 C .88 .88 1.12 1.12 1.38 1.38 1.75 1.75 2.25 2.25 2.75 2.75 3.25 3.75 3.75 4.50 4.50 5.50 D .19 .19 .25 .25 .31 .31 .38 .38 .50 .50 .62 .62 .75 .88 .88 1.00 1.00 1.25 E 1.50 2.50 1.50 2.50 1.50 2.50 1.50 3.00 2.00 3.00 2.00 3.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 6.00 F 2.00 4.00 2.25 4.25 2.50 4.50 3.25 6.00 4.00 6.00 4.50 6.00 5.00 6.00 9.00 8.00 12.00 15.00 G 2.94 4.94 3.50 5.50 3.97 5.97 5.12 7.88 6.44 8.44 7.44 8.94 8.46 9.97 12.97 12.72 16.72 20.75 H .50 .50 .69 .69 .78 .78 1.00 1.00 1.31 1.31 1.56 1.56 1.84 2.09 2.09 2.47 2.47 3.00 J .47 .47 .56 .56 .66 .66 .91 .91 1.12 1.12 1.38 1.38 1.56 1.81 1.81 2.28 2.28 2.75
CODE NO. 1045014 1045032 1045050 1045078 1045096 1045112 1045130 1045158 1045176 1045194 1045210 1045238 1045256 1045292 1045318 1045336 1045354 1045372
86 86
MACHINERY EYE BOLTS

SAE SHOULDER PATTERN
Forged carbon steel. Self colored. Please include stock number and size when ordering. Galvanized Eye Bolts available on request. Metric sizes also available.
CODE NO. THREAD SIZE UNC-2A A SHANK LENGTH I.D. EYE O.D. EYE APPROX. WT. PER 100 PCS. RATED CAPACITY
MEB140 1/4 - 20 1 3/4 1-3/16 5 650 MEB516 5/16 - 18 1-1/8 7/8 1-7/16 9.6 1,200 MEB380 3/8 - 16 1-1/4 1 1-11/16 16 1,550 MEB716 7/16 - 14 1-3/8 1-3/32 1-13/16 24.2 2,000 MEB120 1/2 - 13 1-1/2 1-3/16 2-1/8 34.8 2,600 MEB916 9/16 - 12 1-3/4 1-3/8 2-9/16 47 3,200 MEB580 5/8 - 11 1-3/4 1-3/8 2-9/16 67 5,200 MEB340 3/4 - 10 2 1-1/2 2-13/16 100 7,200 MEB780 7/8 - 9 2-1/4 1-11/16 3-3/16 163 10,600 MEB100 1-8 2-1/2 1-13/16 3-9/16 222 13,300 MEB118 1-1/8 - 7 2-3/4 2 4-1/16 340 17,000 MEB114 1-1/4 - 7 3 2-3/16 4-7/16 444 21,000 MEB112 1-1/2 - 6 3-1/2 2-1/2 5-3/16 736 24,000 MEB134 1-3/4 - 5 3-3/4 2-7/8 6 1,135 32,000 MEB200 2- - 4-1/2 4 3-1/4 6-7/8 1,670 40,000 NOTE: Proof tested in accordance with ASTM A489 and Federal Spec. ANSI B18.15. Traceability and Mechanical test values are available with each shipment.
SAFE WORKING LOADS

Angular lifts should be avoided whenever possible. Eye Bolts up to 2-1/2 diameter also available. Stainless Steel Eye Bolts also available. Charts assume that shoulder is securely seated against the load or anchor.
THREAD SIZE NC2A SHOULDER PATTERN MAX LOAD LBS. STRAIGHT 45 PULL PULL X Y 90 PULL Z
1/4 - 20 650 5/16 - 18 1,200 3/8 - 16 1,550 7/16 - 14 2,000 1/2 - 13 2,600 9/16 - 20 3,200 5/8 - 11 5,200 3/4 - 10 7,200 7/8 - 9 10,600 1-8 13,300 1-1/8 - 7 17,000 1-1/4 - 7 21,000 1-1/2 - 6 24,000 1-3/4 - 5 32,000 2 - 4-1/2 40,000 NOTE: Plain pattern also available.
162 300 387 500 650 800 1,300 1,800 2,650 3,325 4,250 5,250 6,000 8,000 10,000
130 240 310 400 520 640 1,040 1,440 2,120 2,660 3,400 4,200 4,800 6,400 8,000
EXAMPLE: A 1/2 eye bolt in a straight pull has the same strength, 2,600 lbs., as the 1 eye bolt at a 90 pull.
87
FORGED EYE BOLT APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SAFETY:
Always inspect eye bolt before use. Never use eye bolt that shows signs of wear or damage. Never use eye bolt if eye or shank is bent or elongated. Always be sure threads on shank and receiving holes are clean. Never machine, grind, or cut eye bolt.
Regular Nut Eye Bolt G-291
ASSEMBLY SAFETY:
Never exceed load limits specified in Table 1. Never use regular nut eye bolts for angular lifts. Always use shoulder nut eye bolts (or machinery eye bolts) for angular lifts. For angular lifts, adjust working load as follows:
DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD
Shoulder Nut Eye Bolt G-277
45 degrees 60 degrees
30% of rated working load 25% of rated working load
Never undercut eye bolt to seat shoulder against the load. Always countersink receiving hole or use washers to seat shoulder. Always screw eye bolt down completely for proper seating. Always tighten nuts securely against the load.
Machinery Eye Bolt S-279
SHOULDER NUT EYE BOLT INSTALLATION FOR ANGULAR LOADING IN - LINE

The threaded shank must protrude through the load sufficiently to allow full engagement of the nut. If the eye bolt protrudes so far through the load that the nut cannot be tightened securely against the load, use properly sized washers to take up the excess space BETWEEN THE NUT AND THE LOAD.
SIZE (IN.)
TABLE 1 (IN-LINE LOAD) WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.)
1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
650 1,200 1,550 2,600 5,200 7,200 10,600 13,300 2 ,000 24,000
Thickness of spacers must exceed this distance between the bottom of the load and the last thread of the eye bolt.
Place washers or spacers between nut and load so that when the nut is tightened securely, the shoulder is secured flush against the load surface.
WARNING
Loads may slip or fall if proper Hoist Ring assembly and lifting procedures are not used. A falling load may cause serious injury or death. Use only genuine Crosby parts as replacements. Read, understand and follow all instructions, diagrams and chart information before using swivel hoist ring assembly.
88
REGULAR NUT & SHOULDER NUT EYE BOLT INSTALLATION FOR IN-LINE LOADING
OPERATING SAFETY
Always stand clear of load. Always lift load with steady, even pull - do not jerk. Always apply load to eye bolt in the plane of the eye - not at an angle. Never exceed the capacity of the eye bolt-see Table I. When using lifting slings of two or more legs, make sure the loads in the legs are calculated using the angle from the horizontal to the leg and properly size the shoulder nut or machinery eye bolt for the angular load.
MACHINERY EYE BOLT INSTALLATION FOR IN-LINE AND ANGULAR LOADING

EYE BOLT SIZEINCHES TABLE II SHIM THICKNESS REQUIRED TO CHANGE ROTATION 90 - INCHES
These eye bolts are primarily intended to be installed into tapped holes. 1. After the loads on the eye bolts have been calculated, select the proper size eye bolt for the job. For angular lifts, reduce working load as follows:
DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD
1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
.0125 .0139 .0156 .0192 .0227 .0250 .0278 .0312 .0357 .0417
145 degrees 90 degrees
30% of rated working load 25% of rated working load
2. Drill and tap the load to the correct sizes to a minimum depth of one-half the eye bolt size beyond the shank length of the machinery eye bolt. 3. Thread the eye bolt into the load until the shoulder is flush and securely tightened against the load. 4. If the plane of the machinery eye bolt is not aligned with the sling line, estimate the amount of unthreading rotation necessary to align the plane of the eye properly. 5. Remove the machinery eye bolt from the load and add shims (washers) of proper thickness to adjust the angle of the plane of the eye to match the sling line. Use Table II to estimate the required shim thickness for the amount of unthreading rotation required.
89
SWIVEL HOIST RINGS

PIVOT 180
See what happens when heavy side loads are applied to a conventional eyebolt.
The same load applied to an American Safety Engineered Hoist Ring is translated into a primary tension load at the screw and normal to the screw axis.
The high tension loads are well within the designed safety limits of the stressed hoist ring.
Breaking Strength is 5 Times the Rated Load
Other Styles, Metric, Stainless and Special Length Available

90
CROSBY SWIVEL HOIST RING WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

HOIST RING APPLICATION ASSEMBLY SAFETY
Use swivel hoist ring only with a ferrous metal (steel, iron) or soft metal (i.e., aluminum) loads (work piece). Do not leave threaded end of hoist ring in aluminum loads for long time periods due to corrosion. After determining the loads on each hoist ring, select the proper size hoist ring using the Working Load Limit ratings in Table 1 for UNC threads and Table 2 for Metric threads. Drill and tap the work piece to the correct size to a minimum depth of one-half the threaded shank diameter plus the threaded shank length.See rated load limit and bolt torque requirements imprinted on top of the swivel trunnion. (See Table 1 and/or Table 2) Install hoist ring to recommended torque with a torque wrench making sure the bushing flange meets the load (work piece) surface. Never use spacers between bushing flange and mounting surface. U.S. Patented 5,352,056 Always select proper load rated lifting device for use with Swivel Hoist Ring. Attach lifting device ensuring free fit to hoist ring bail (lifting ring). (Fig. 1) Apply partial load and check proper rotation and alignment.There should be no interference between load (work piece) and hoist ring bail .(Fig. 2) Special Note: When a Hoist Ring is installed with a retention nut, the nut must have full thread engagement and must meet one of the following standards to develop the Working Load Limit (WLL). 1. ASTM A-563 Figure 1 (A) Grade D Hex Thick (B) Grade DH Standard Hex 2. SAE Grade 8 Standard Hex
HOIST RING INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE

Always inspect hoist ring before use. Regularly inspect hoist ring parts. (Fig. 3) Never use hoist ring that shows signs of corrosion, wear or damage. Never use hoist ring if bail is bent or elongated. Figure 2 Always be sure threads on shank and receiving holes are clean, not damaged, and fit properly. Always check with torque wrench before using an already installed hoist ring. Always make sure there are no spacers (washers) used between bushing flange and the mounting surface. Remove any spacers (washers) and retorque before use. Always ensure free movement of bail. The bail should pivot 180 and swivel 360. (Fig. 4) Always be sure total work piece surface is in contact with hoist ring bushing mating surface. Drilled and tapped hole must be 90 to load (work piece) surface.
OPERATING SAFETY
Never exceed the capacity of the swivel hoist ring, see Table 1 for UNC threads and Table 2 for Metric threads. When using lifting slings of two or more legs, make sure the forces in the legs are calculated using the angle from the vertical to the leg and select the proper size swivel hoist ring to allow for the angular forces. (Note: Sling angles will de-rate sling members [chain, rope, or webbing] but will not de-rate swivel hoist ring capacity.)
Figure 3
WARNING
Loads may slip or fall if proper Hoist Ring assembly and lifting procedures are not used. A falling load may cause serious injury or death. Use only genuine Crosby parts as replacements. Read, understand and follow all instructions, diagrams and chart information before using swivel hoist ring assembly.
Figure 4 BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com
91
FORGED TURNBUCKLES
HG-223 HOOK AND HOOK

Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specifications FF-T-791b, Type 1 Form 1 - Class 5, except for those provisions required of the contractor.
THREAD DIAMETER & TAKE UP (IN.) WORKING WEIGHT LOAD EACH LIMIT (LBS.) (LBS.)
HG-225 HOOK AND EYE

HG-227 JAW AND EYE

CODE NO.
CODE NO.
CODE NO.
1030011 1030039 1030057 1030075 1030093 1030119 1030137 1030155 1030173 1030191 1030217 1030235 1030253 1030271 1030299 1030315 1030333 1030351 1030379 1030397 1030413 1030431 1030459 1030477 1030495
1/4 x 4 5/16 x 4-1/2 3/8 x 6 1/2 x 6 1/2 x 9 1/2 x 12 5/8 x 6 5/8 x 9 5/8 x 12 3/4 x 6 3/4 x 9 3/4 x 12 3/4 x 18 7/8 x 12 7/8 x 18 1x6 1 x 12 1 x 18 1 x 24 1-1/4 x 12 1-1/4 x 18 1-1/4 x 24 1-1/2 x 12 1-1/2 x 18 1-1/2 x 24
400 700 1000 1500 1500 1500 2250 2250 2250 3000 3000 3000 3000 4000 4000 5000 5000 5000 5000 6500 6500 6500 7500 7500 7500
.30 .47 .78 1.60 1.83 2.28 2.75 3.38 3.50 3.89 5.28 5.43 8.12 8.10 9.95 9.33 11.93 14.00 17.25 20.58 23.00 27.00 27.50 31.00 37.50
1030636 1030654 1030672 1030690 1030716 1030734 1030752 1030770 1030798 1030814 1030832 1030850 1030878 1030896 1030912 1030930 1030958 1030976 1030994 1031010 1031038 1031056 1031074 1031092 1031118
1/4 x 4 5/16 x 4-1/2 3/8 x 6 1/2 x 6 1/2 x 9 1/2 x 12 5/8 x 6 5/8 x 9 5/8 x 12 3/4 x 6 3/4 x 9 3/4 x 12 3/4 x 18 7/8 x 12 7/8 x 18 1x6 1 x 12 1 x 18 1 x 24 1-1/4 x 12 1-1/4 x 18 1-1/4 x 24 1-1/2 x 12 1-1/2 x 18 1-1/2 x 24
400 700 1000 1500 1500 1500 2250 2250 2250 3000 3000 3000 3000 4000 4000 5000 5000 5000 5000 6500 6500 6500 7500 7500 7500
.29 .49 .78 1.61 1.85 2.26 2.70 3.13 3.78 3.89 4.61 5.83 6.33 8.10 9.95 9.33 11.93 14.00 17.25 19.00 23.00 24.00 27.50 31.00 37.50
Note: TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.
1031877 1031895 1031911 1031939 1031957 1031975 1031993 1032019 1032037 1032055 1032073 1032091 1032117 1032135 1032153 1032171 1032199 1032215 1032233 1032251 1032279 1032297 1032313 1032331 1032359 1032395 1032411 1032439 1032457 1032475
1/4 x 4 5/16 x 4-1/2 3/8 x 6 1/2 x 6 1/2 x 9 1/2 x 12 5/8 x 6 5/8 x 9 5/8 x 12 3/4 x 6 3/4 x 9 3/4 x 12 3/4 x 18 7/8 x 12 7/8 x 18 1x6 2 x 12 1 x 18 1 x 24 1-1/4 x 12 1-1/4 x 18 1-1/4 x 24 1-1/2 x 12 1-1/2 x 18 1-1/2 x 24 1-3/4 x 18 1-3/4 x 24 2 x 24 2-1/2 x 24 2-3/4 x 24
500 .30 800 .50 1200 .80 2200 1.51 2200 1.71 2200 2.08 3500 2.35 3500 3.17 3500 3.61 5200 4.00 5200 4.75 5200 5.93 5200 7.00 7200 8.36 7200 9.75 10000 8.92 10000 11.20 10000 13.30 10000 17.00 15200 19.42 15200 24.18 15200 28.50 21400 28.99 21400 35.00 21400 39.18 28000 53.75 28000 60.68 37000 89.00 60000 150.00 75000 183.00
Dimensions See Page 94
92
FORGED TURNBUCKLES
HG-226 EYE AND EYE

HG-228 JAW AND JAW

G-2510 S-2510 BODY ONLY
CODE NO.
CODE NO.
S-251 STUB END

CODE NO. DIAMETER & TAKE UP (IN.) 251 STUB 2510 BODY END WT. ONLY WT. LBS. EA. LBS. EA.
1031252 1031270 1031298 1031314 1031332 1031350 1031378 1031396 1031412 1031430 1031458 1031476 1031494 1031519 1031537 1031555 1031573 1031591 1031617 1031635 1031653 1031671 1031699 1031715 1031733 1031779 1031797 1031813 1031831 1031859
500 .26 800 .45 1200 .76 2200 1.54 2200 1.13 2200 2.14 3500 3.28 3500 2.83 3500 3.42 5200 3.79 5200 4.61 5200 5.48 5200 7.19 7200 7.22 7200 9.95 10000 9.04 10000 11.50 10000 14.00 10000 17.25 15200 19.00 15200 23.00 15200 27.00 21400 27.50 21400 31.00 21400 37.50 28000 52.50 28000 58.00 37000 85.25 60000 144.25 75000 194.00
1032493 1032518 1032536 1032554 1032572 1032590 1032616 1032634 1032652 1032670 1032698 1032714 1032732 1032750 1032778 1032796 1032812 1032830 1032858 1032876 1032894 1032910 1032938 1032956 1032974 1033018 1033036 1033054 1033072 1033090
500 .36 800 .52 1200 .81 2200 1.56 2200 1.74 2200 2.40 3500 2.72 3500 3.43 3500 3.91 5200 4.11 5200 5.46 5200 6.43 5200 8.07 7200 8.17 7200 10.78 10000 10.18 10000 12.52 10000 15.14 10000 18.08 15200 20.59 15200 24.68 15200 28.20 21400 30.69 21400 36.75 21400 40.67 28000 54.00 28000 63.36 37000 94.25 60000 165.00 75000 198.00
Note: TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.
SE1404 SE51645 SE3806 SE1206 SE1209 SE12012 SE5806 SE5809 SE58012 SE3406 SE3409 SE34012 SE34018 SE7806 SE78012 SE78018 SE1006 SE10012 SE10018 SE10024 SE11806 SE11406 SE114012 SE114018 SE114024 SE13806 SE11206 SE112012 SE112018 SE112024 SE13406 SE2006 SE20024 SE21206 SE21224 SE23424 *Normalized
1/4 x 4 .28 5/16 x 4-1/2 .39 3/8 x 6 .71 1/2 x 6 1.4 1/2 x 9 1.63 1/2 x 12 1.9 5/8 x 6 2.13 5/8 x 9 2.63 5/8 x 12 3.08 3/4 x 6 3.09 3/4 x 9 3.76 3/4 x 12 4.68 3/4 x 18 5.74 7/8 x 6 4.78 7/8 x 12 6.35 7/8 x 18 8.3 1x6 6.33 1 x 12 8.93 1 x 18 11.33 1 x 24 14.53 1-1/8 x 6 8.88 1-1/4 x 6 10.18 1-1/4 x 12 13.6 1-1/4 x 18 18.15 1-1/4 x 24 21.87 1-3/8 x 6 13.87 1-1/2 x 6 15.09 1-1/2 x 12 20.44 1-1/2 x 18 26.16 1-1/2 x 24 31.69 1-3/4 x 6 21.73 2x6 31.48 2 x 24 60.3 2-1/2 x 6 62. 2-1/2 x 24 110. 2-3/4 x 24 128.
.15 .19 .29 .6 .68 .85 .9 1.18 1.43 1.19 1.56 2.08 2.64 1.73 2.7 3.8 2.48 3.93 5.28 7.38 3.98 3.78 5.4 8.25 10.17 5.97 5.69 8.44 11.56 13.69 8.13 12.88 27.5 29.75 54. 54.
Dimensions See Page 94
93
TURNBUCKLE ENGINEERING DATA

HOOK
DIMENSIONS AND STRENGTH Proof Load twice Safe Working Load. Ultimate Load five times Safe Working Load.
A 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 B 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-5/16 HOOK DIMENSIONS IN INCHES C 13/32 1/2 39/64 25/32 1 1-13/64 1-3/8 1-17/32 1-13/16 1-3/4 D 29/64 1/2 9/16 21/32 27/32 63/64 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-7/8 E 1-21/32 1-31/32 2-23/64 2-15/16 3-11/16 4-33/64 5-3/16 5-27/32 7-7/32 8-11/32 SAFE WORKING LOAD LBS. 400 700 1,000 1,500 2,250 3,000 4,000 5,000 5,000 7,500
EYE
DIMENSIONS AND STRENGTH
A 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 2-3/4
B 11/32 7/16 17/32 23/32 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-7/16 1-13/16 2-1/8 2-3/8 2-11/16 3-1/8 3-1/4
EYE DIMENSIONS IN INCHES C 7/32 9/32 11/32 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4
D 25/32 15/16 1-1/8 1-7/16 1-3/4 2-1/8 2-3/8 3 3-9/16 4-1/8 4-11/16 5-3/4 6-1/2 7
E 1-25/32 2-3/16 2-9/16 3-7/32 3-7/8 4-11/16 5-1/4 6-3/8 7-3/4 8-5/8 10 12-1/8 13-9/16 15
SAFE WORKING LOAD LBS. 500 800 1,200 2,200 3,500 5,200 7,200 10,000 15,200 21,400 28,000 37,000 60,000 75,000 SAFE WORKING LOAD LBS. 500 800 1,200 2,200 3,500 5,200 7,200 10,000 15,200 21,400 28,000 37,000 60,000 75,000 SAFE WORKING LOAD LBS. 500 800 1,200 2,200 3,500 5,200 7,200 10,000 12,400 15,200 18,000 21,400 25,000 28,000 37,000 60,000
JAW
A 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 2-3/4
B 5/8 7/8 7/8 1-1/16 1-5/16 1-1/2 1-3/4 2-1/16 2-13/16 2-13/16 3-3/8 3-11/16 4-7/16 4-3/16
C 1/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 2-3/4
JAW DIMENSIONS IN INCHES D E 13/32 15/32 1/2 5/8 3/4 15/16 1-1/8 1-3/16 1-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/8 2-1/2 2-7/8 3-1/2 9/32 9/32 5/16 13/32 1/2 9/16 11/16 25/32 1 1-1/16 1-1/4 1-9/16 1-9/16 1-5/8
F 1/2 1/2 19/32 3/4 1-1/32 1-9/32 1-15/32 1-21/32 2-3/32 2-15/32 2-29/32 3-17/32 4-5/8 5-3/8
G 1-5/8 2 2-3/16 2-3/4 3-1/2 4-1/8 4-27/32 5-17/32 2-3/16 7-7/8 9-3/8 10-7/8 13-11/32 15
H 5/8 11/16 13/16 1 1-5/16 1-5/8 1-7/8 2-1/8 2-5/8 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-3/16 5-5/8 6-1/8
STUB END TURNBUCKLES

A 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2
R 4 4-1/2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
STUB END DIMENSIONS IN INCHES S T 4-3/4 5-7/16 7-1/8 7-1/2 7-7/8 8-1/4 8-5/8 9 9-1/8 9-1/8 9-3/4 9-3/4 10-3/8 10-3/8 11 13-1/2 3/8 15/32 9/16 3/4 15/16 1-1/8 1-5/16 1-1/2 1-9/16 1-9/16 1-7/8 1-7/8 2-3/16 2-3/16 2-1/2 3-3/4
U 2-5/8 2-21/32 4-7/16 4-1/4 4-1/16 4-3/8 4-11/16 5 4-15/16 5-7/16 5-3/8 5-3/8 5-5/16 5-13/16 6 6-1/4
W 10 10-3/4 16 16 16 17 18 19 19 20 20-1/2 20-1/2 21 22 23 26
Dimension W figured with stubs screwed in as shown. To determine overall length of longer takeup turnbuckles, add the difference in takeup.
94
STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE AND CHAIN
TYPE 316 STAINLESS

HARDWARE BLOCKS SWIVELS CHAIN WIRE ROPE SLINGS & ASSEMBLIES
CALL US FOR ALL YOUR STAINLESS NEEDS

95
LINKS AND RINGS

A-342 WELDLESS ALLOY MASTER LINK
Minimum Ultimate Load is 6 times the Safe Working Load. *Welded Master Link.
CODE NO. DIAMETER SIZE (IN.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT *(LBS.) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) INSIDE WIDTH (IN.) INSIDE LENGTH (IN.)
1014262 1/2 4920 .82 2.50 1014280 5/8 6600 1.52 3.00 1014306 3/4 10320 2.07 2.75 1014324 1 24360 4.85 3.50 1014342 1-1/4 35160 9.57 4.38 1014360 1-1/2 47880 16.22 5.25 1014388 1-3/4 62520 25.22 6.00 1014404 2 97680 37.04 7.00 1014422 2-1/4** 119400 54.10 8.00 1014468 2-1/2** 147300 67.75 8.00 1014440 2-3/4** 178200 87.70 9.50 1014486 3** 228000 115.00 9.00 1014501 3-1/4** 262200 145.00 10.00 1014529 3-1/2** 279000 200.00 12.00 1015051 3-3/4** 336000 198.00 10.00 1015060 4** 373000 228.00 10.00 1015067 4-1/4** 354000 302.00 12.00 1015079 4-1/2** 360000 342.00 14.00 1015088 4-3/4** 389000 436.00 14.00 1015094 5** 395000 516.00 15.00 * Based on Single leg sling. Minimum Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. ** Welded Master Link.
5.00 6.00 5.50 7.00 8.75 10.50 12.00 14.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 18.00 20.00 24.00 20.00 20.00 24.00 28.00 28.00 30.00
S-643 WELDLESS RING

Meets Federal Specification RR-C271b Type VI. Minimum Ultimate Load is 6 times the Safe Working Load.
DIAMETER STOCK (IN.) SAFE WORKING LOAD. SINGLE PULL POUNDS DIMENSIONS INSIDE DIAMETER (IN.) WEIGHT LBS. EACH B C CODE NO.
1013780 7/8 7200 1013806 7/8 5600 1013824 1 10800 1013842 1-1/8 10400 1013860 1-1/4 17000 1013888 1-3/8 19000 Ultimate Load is 6 times the Working Load Limit.
4 5-1/2 4 6 5 6
2.70 3.40 3.50 6.50 7.00 10.63
4.00 5.50 4.00 6.00 5.00 6.00
5.75 7.25 6.00 8.25 7.50 8.75
For More Oblong Master Links See page 40
96
LINKS AND RINGS

S-341 AND G-341 WELDLESS SLING LINKS
Self colored or hot dip galvanized. Forged from special bar quality carbon and alloy steels. Weldless. Minimum Ultimate Load is 6 times the Safe Working Load.
PAINTED S-341 CODE NO. DIAMETER STOCK (IN.) SAFE WORKING LOAD. SINGLE PULL POUNDS INSIDE LENGTH (IN.) INSIDE WIDTH SMALL END INSIDE WIDTH LARGE END WEIGHT LBS. EACH
1013904 1013922 1013940 1013968 1013986 1014002 1014020 1014048
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8
1600 2900 4200 6000 8300 10800 16750 20500
2-1/4 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 5-1/4 6 7-3/4 8-1/4
3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 2-3/4
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 5-1/2
.25 .55 1.10 1.95 2.78 4.30 8.50 12.04
GALVANIZED G-341 CODE NO.
DIAMETER STOCK (IN.)
SAFE WORKING LOAD. SINGLE PULL POUNDS
INSIDE LENGTH (IN.)
INSIDE WIDTH SMALL END
INSIDE WIDTH LARGE END
WEIGHT LBS. EACH
1013897 1013913 1013931 1013959 1013977 1013995 1014011 1014039
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8
1600 2900 4200 6000 8300 10800 16750 20500
2-1/4 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 5-1/4 6 7-3/4 8-1/4
3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 2-3/4
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 5-1/2
.25 .55 1.10 1.95 2.78 4.30 8.50 12.04
A-341 ALLOY PEAR SHAPED LINKS

Alloy steel. Quenched and tempered. Individually proof tested at 2 times Working Load Limit with certification. Proof Test certification shipped with each link. Sizes 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, and 1 are drop forged.
CODE NO. STOCK SIZE (A) IN. WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.)* WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) B C DIMENSIONS (IN.) D E F
1013575 1/2 4920 .55 1.50 1.00 4.00 1013584 5/8 6600 1.10 1.88 1.25 5.00 1013595 3/4 10320 1.76 2.25 1.50 6.00 1013604 7/8** 17340 2.82 2.63 1.75 7.00 1013613 1 24360 4.22 3.00 2.00 8.00 1013622 1-1/8** 29760 6.25 3.13 2.25 8.75 1013631 1-1/4** 35160 8.25 3.75 2.50 10.00 1013640 1-3/8** 41520 11.25 4.13 2.75 11.00 1013649 1-1/2** 47880 14.25 4.50 3.00 12.00 1013658 1-5/8** 55200 18.50 4.88 3.25 13.00 1013667 1-3/4** 62520 22.50 5.25 3.50 14.00 1013676 1-7/8** 80100 29.00 5.63 3.75 15.00 1013685 2** 97680 34.00 6.00 4.00 16.00 1013694 2-1/4** 119400 48.00 6.75 4.50 18.00 1013703 2-1/2** 147300 66.00 7.50 5.00 20.00 1013712 2-3/4** 178200 88.00 8.25 5.50 22.00 7013721 3** 228000 114.00 9.00 6.00 24.00 1013730 3-1/4** 262200 146.00 9.75 6.50 26.00 1013739 3-1/2** 279000 181.00 10.50 7.00 28.00 1013748 4** 373000 271.00 12.00 8.00 32.00 *Based on single leg slings. Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times Working Load Limit. **Welded Master Link.
3.00 3.75 4.50 5.25 6.00 6.75 7.50 8.25 9.00 9.75 10.50 11.25 12.00 13.50 15.00 16.50 18.00 19.50 21.00 24.00
.50 .63 .75 .88 1.00 1.13 1.25 1.38 1.50 1.63 1.75 1.88 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 4.00
97
WEDGE SOCKETS
S-421T THE TERMINATOR
U.S. patent 5,553, 360 and foreign equivalents. Basket is cast steel. Individually magnetic particle inspected. Pin diameter and jaw opening allows wedge and socket to be used in conjunction with open swage and spelter sockets. Secures the tail or dead end of the wire rope to the wedge, thus eliminates loss or Punch out of the wedge. Eliminates the need for an extra piece of rope, and is easily installed. The TERMINATOR wedge eliminates the potential breaking off of the tail due to fatigue.The tail, which is secured by the base of the clip and the wedge, is left undeformed and available for reuse. Incorporates Crosbys patented QUIC-CHECK Go and No-Go features cast into the wedge.The proper size rope is determined when the following criteria are met: 1. The wire rope should pass thru the Go hole in he wedge. 2. The wire rope should NOT pass thru the No-Go hole in the wedge. Utilizes standard Crosby Red-U-Bolt wire rope clip. Generates a minimum efficiency of 80% based on the catalog breaking strength of the wire rope. Standard S-421 wedge socket can be retrofitted with the new style TERMINATOR wedge. Available with Bolt, Nut, and Cotter Pin.
S-421T COMPLETE CODE NO. S-421TW WEDGE ONLY CODE NO. S-421T COMPLETE EACH (LBS.) S-421TW WEDGE ONLY EACH (LBS.)
WIRE ROPE SIZE (IN.)
1035000 1035555 3/8 1035009 1035564 1/2 1035018 1035573 5/8 1035027 1035582 3/4 1035036 1035591 7/8 1035045 1035600 1 1035054 1035609 1-1/8 1040448 1040607 **1-1/4 *Terminator Assembly includes Socket, Wedge, Pin, and Wire Rope Clip. **1-1/4 not available in TERMINATOR style.
2.18 6.15 9.70 14.50 21.50 30.75 45.30 57.50
.50 1.05 1.79 2.60 4.02 5.37 7.84 6.81
WIRE ROPE DIA. (IN.)
DIMENSIONS (IN.) J
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4
5.63 6.81 8.16 9.78 11.16 12.75 14.38 16.00
2.77 3.55 4.36 4.81 4.65 5.08 5.51 7.94
.81 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
.81 1.00 1.19 1.38 1.63 2.00 2.25 2.50
1.38 1.62 2.12 2.44 2.69 2.56 3.31 3.56
3.12 3.85 4.58 5.37 6.28 7.02 7.76 N/A
7.38 8.75 10.34 12.03 14.00 15.86 17.70 N/A
1.60 1.21 1.64 2.17 2.22 2.71 2.50 3.39
.88 1.06 1.22 1.40 1.66 2.00 2.25 2.50
1.56 1.94 2.25 2.62 3.12 3.75 4.25 4.75
.44 .50 .56 .66 .75 .88 1.00 1.12
2.13 2.44 3.13 3.63 4.19 4.63 5.38 5.81
.44 .53 .69 .78 .88 1.03 1.19 1.31
1.25 1.75 2.00 2.34 2.69 2.88 3.13 3.38
1.38 1.88 2.19 2.56 2.94 3.28 3.56 3.81
98
OPEN WEDGE SOCKETS 3/8 TO 1-1/2 INCH WIRE ROPE SIZES

OPEN WEDGE SOCKET
CODE NO. WIRE ROPE SIZE WT. OVERALL NET TOTAL LENGTH LENGTH THICKNESS A B E PIN DIA. P WIDTH BETWEEN EARS Q PIN TO THICKPIN TO END OF NESS OBSTR. FITTING OF EAR R S V
WS-4380 WS-4716 WS-4120 WS-5120 WS-5916 WS-5580 WS-6580 WS-8A580 WS-6340 WS-8A340 WS-7780 WS-8780 WS-7100 WS-8100 WS-10118 WS-11118 WS-10114 WS-11114 FS-26112
3/8 7/16 1/2 1/2 9/16 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 7/8 7/8 1 1 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
3 3 3 8.5 8.5 8.5 9 17 9 17 15 16 14.5 16 45 55 45 55 99
6.500 6.500 6.500 8.750 8.750 8.750 8.812 11.250 8.812 11.250 11 11.375 11 11.375 15.437 16 15.437 16 18.375
5.375 5.375 5.375 7.250 7.250 7.250 7.312 9.125 7.312 9.125 9.500 9.500 9.500 9.500 13.250 13.500 13.250 13.500 15
2.625 2.625 2.625 3.500 3.500 3.500 3.500 4.125 3.500 4.125 3.500 4.125 3.500 4.125 4.125 5.500 4.125 5.500 6.875
1 1 1 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.625 1.250 1.625 1.250 1.625 1.250 1.625 1.625 2.500 1.625 2.500 3
1 1 1 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.500 1.750 1.500 1.750 1.312 1.750 1.315 1.750 1.750 2.500 1.750 2.500 2.625
1.750 1.937 1.937 2.437 2.812 2.750 2.500 3.187 1.780 2.844 2.937 2.875 2.875 2.500 3.062 4.500 3.125 4.250 4.187
1.125 .375 1.125 .375 1.125 .375 1.500 .625 1.500 .625 1.500 .625 1.500 .562 2.125 1 1.500 .562 2.125 1 1.500 .625 1.875 .750 1.500 .725 1.875 .750 2.187 .750 2.500 .812 2.187 .750 2.500 .812 3.375 1.250
KEY TO OPEN WEDGE SOCKET MODEL NUMBERS WS 6 3/4
Wedge Socket
Body Number
Wire Rope Wedge Size
TO ORDER PLEASE SPECIFY: Model Number Exact Rope Size NOTE: This product may be ordered complete or any component part. See order key below. EXAMPLES: WS-8-7/8 INCH WS-6-3/4 OPEN WEDGE OPEN WEDGE SOCKET SOCKET LESS PIN COMPLETE AND COTTERS
7/8-INCH WEDGE ONLY FOR WS-7 SOCKET BODY
SEE SAFETY INFORMATION PAGE 100
*Tail Length Standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope. A minimum of 6 rope diameters, but not less than 6. (i.e.- For 1 rope: Tail Length = 1 x 6 = 6) Rotation Resistant Wire Rope A minimum of 20 rope diameters, but not less than 6. (i.e. - For 1 rope: Tail Length = 1 x 20 = 20)
99
WEDGE SOCKET WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

S-421T TERMINATOR
Extended wedge socket assembly U.S. patent No. 5,553,360. NOTE: Existing Crosby S-421 Wedge Sockets can be retrofitted with the New Terminator Wedge. New QUIC CHECK Go and No-Go features cast into wedge. The proper size wire rope is determined when the following criteria are met: 1. The wire rope shall pass thru the go hole in the wedge. 2. The wire rope shall NOT pass thru the No-Go hole in the wedge.
INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SAFETY
Always inspect socket, wedge and pin before using. Do not use part showing cracks. Do not use modified or substitute parts. Repair minor nicks or gouges to socket or pin by lightly grinding until surfaces are smooth. Do not reduce original dimension more than 10%. Do not repair by welding. Inspect permanent assemblies annually, or more often in severe operating conditions.
ASSEMBLY SAFETY
Use only with standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope of designated size. For intermediate size rope, use next larger size socket. For example: When using 9/16 diameter wire rope use a 5/8 size Wedge Socket Assembly. Welding of the tail on standard wire rope is not recommended. The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 6 rope diameters but not less than 6 (Figure 1). To use with Rotation Resistant wire rope (special wire rope constructions with 8 or more outer strands) ensure that the dead end is welded, braized or seized before inserting the wire rope into the wedge socket to prevent core slippage or loss of rope lay.The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 20 rope diameters but not less than 6: (See Figure 1). Properly match socket, wedge and clip (See Table 1) to wire rope size. Align live end of rope, with center line of pin. (See Figure 1). Secure dead end section of rope. (See Figure 1). Tighten nuts on clip to recommended torque. (Table 1) Do not attach dead end to live end or install wedge backwards. (See Figure 2). Use a hammer to seat Wedge and Rope as deep into socket as possible before applying first load.
*TAIL LENGTH STANDARD ROTATION 6 TO 8 STRAND RESISTANT WIRE ROPE WIRE ROPE
A minimum of 6 A minimum of 20 rope diameters, rope diameters, but not less than 6 but not less than 6
OPERATING SAFETY
Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Efficiency rating of the Wedge Socket termination is based upon the catalog breaking strength of Wire Rope. The efficiency of a properly assembled Wedge Socket is 80%. During use, do not strike the dead end section with any other elements of the rigging. (Called two blocking).
TABLE 1
Rope Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Clip Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 *Torque Ft./Lbs. 45 65 65 95 95 130 225 225 *The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.
1-1/8 1-1/8 225
1-1/4 1-1/4 360
WARNING
Loads may slip or fall if the Wedge Socket is not properly installed. A falling load may cause serious injury or death. Read and understand these instructions before installing the Wedge Socket. Do not side load the Wedge Socket. Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use.
100
SNATCH BLOCKS BY GUNNEBO JOHNSON

MIDGETHOOK OR EYE
2 Ton capacity. 3.5 to 1 Design Factor. 3 inch diameter.
ONE SHEAVEHOOK, SHACKLE, EYE OR TAILBOARD (no fitting)

3 through 30 ton capacities. 4 to 1 design factor. 4 through 24 inch diameters. Midget with Eye 1 Sheave with Hook 1 Sheave Tailboard
TOP DEADENDHOOK OR SHACKLE

3 through 22 ton capacities. 4 to 1 design factor. 4 through 14 inch diameters.
TWO SHEAVEHOOK OR SHACKLE

8 through 22 ton capacities. 4 to 1 design factor. 4 through 14 inch diameters.
2 Sheave with Shackle
Top Deadend with Hook
STOCKED IN OUR WAREHOUSE
ForPLEASE CALL FOR Details Go to Our Website www.bairstow.com DETAILS ON THESE OR The Crosby Catalog Link ANY Johnson Block Link or The OTHER BLOCKS
Ultimate Load is 4 times the Safe Working Load. * Fitted with 1-1/4 I.D. Swivel Eye. ** Available in Bronze Bushed only. ***May be furnished for other wire rope sizes on special order. Sizes up to 30 tons.
CROSBY SNATCH BLOCKS

418 STANDARD
CODE NO. 108038 108065 108127 108225 108323 108421 108528 108608 108644 SHEAVE SIZE INCHES **3 **4-1/2 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 SAFE WORKING LOAD* TONS 2 4 8 8 8 8 8 12 15 STANDARD WIRE ROPE CENTER PIN INCHES DIAMETER INCHES 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 3/4 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 2-1/2 2-3/4 WEIGHT POUNDS EACH 3 11 26 33 41 48 55 130 150
419 STANDARD
CODE NO. 109037 109064 109126 109224 109322 109420 109527 109607 109643 SHEAVE SIZE INCHES **3 **4-1/2 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 SAFE WORKING LOAD* TONS 2 4 8 8 8 8 8 12 15 STANDARD WIRE ROPE CENTER PIN INCHES DIAMETER INCHES 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 3/4 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 2-1/2 2-3/4 WEIGHT POUNDS EACH ***3 12 27 34 42 49 56 135 155
404 STANDARD
CODE NO. 102016 102025 102098 102169 102230 102301 SHEAVE SIZE INCHES **3 **4-1/2 6 8 10 12 SAFE WORKING LOAD* TONS 2 4 8 8 8 8 STANDARD WIRE ROPE CENTER PIN INCHES DIAMETER INCHES 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 WEIGHT POUNDS EACH 3 6 15 21 29 36
STOCKED IN OUR WAREHOUSE
101
OVERHAUL BALLS BY GUNNEBO JOHNSON

Types 4, 6 Midget Non-Swiveling Overhaul Balls Among our more economical models, these small but husky units are ideal for light tonnage applications which demand top performance and downfall speed. Available are 3 and 5-ton capacities with weights ranging from 36 to 49 pounds. Wedge sockets for the Type 6 are multi-purpose. Each has the flexibility of being used with more than one size wire rope through a simple change in wedge size.
Types 4, 6, 7 Midget Swiveling Overhaul Balls Johnson Blocks midget models OB-3JEM-28-4, OB-3JEM-28-6, and OB-3JJM-28-7 have an advantage in size as well as capability. They are unusually short in over-all length, the basic eye-top unit being only 13-7/16 inches. Other units in this low profile series include jaw types and the versatile wedge socket types.
Type 3 Bottom Swivel Overhaul Balls The first overall ball ever offered by Johnson Blocks, the Type 3 is still widely used. The reason again, exceptional compactness. With wedge socket and swivel almost completely enclosed within the ball and pin assembly, it is 25 to 30 percent shorter in over-all length then competition makes. It also offers the advantage of an open wedge socket that can be adapted to two or more sizes or wire rope, just by changing out the wedge. Type 3 bottom swivel overhaul balls are available in capacities of 3 to 30 tons; weights, or from 54 through 1,290 pounds. When ordering, always specify the wire rope size to be used. Options include choice of light duty hook latches or heavy duty flapper latches. Type 4, 5, 6, 7 Top Swivel Overall Balls The advantage of the top swivel overhaul ball lies in the ability of its upper fitting and attached wire rope to move independent of its ball and lower fitting. Johnson Blocks introduced its first top swivel balls in 1966 in response to requests for units with more accessible upper fittings. From these have evolved the broad line of precision assemblies which this company now manufactures. In all, our offering consists of some 138 models with weights ranging from 37 through 1,478 pounds; capacities, from 3-3/4 through 30 tons. Interchangeable wedge sockets are standard on the Type 6, while light duty hook latches or heavy duty flapper latches are available on all models at the buyer's option. Overhaul Balls and Pins Ball and pin assemblies are obtainable as replacement parts for Johnson Blocks overhaul balls or, as add-on/conversion kits for Johnson Blocks swivels. Ranging in weight from 37 to 1,161 pounds, these units consist of cast iron ball, steel pin, and the necessary nuts and cotters. Split Overhaul Balls Johnson Blocks split balls present a convenient and effective way to add overhaul weight directly to the wire rope. Made up of two cast iron halves which clamp to the line by means of bolts, these units are designed to fit 1/2 and 5/8 inch rope (50 pound weight) and 5/8, 3/4 and 7/8-inch rope (100-pound weight).
See our website www.bairstow.com For details go to Johnson Block Link
GUNNEBO OVERHAUL BALLS STOCKED IN OUR WAREHOUSE
102
SHORTY J CRANE BLOCKS BY GUNNEBO JOHNSON

3 through 350 ton capacities. 4 to 1 design factor (unless otherwise indicated). 1 through 8 sheaves. 10 through 30 inch diameters. Bronze bushed, roller bearing and tapered roller bearing sheaves. Individual channel bearing lubrication through center pin. Flame hardened grooves on sheaves sizes 16 inches and larger. Dual action (swing-swivel) roller thrust bearing hooks, forged and cast alloy steel. Fully protective side plates. Center plate/tie bolt containment of wire rope.Total block disassembly capability.Wide range of options including: Light duty hook latch kits, 3 through 30 tons. Heavy duty flapper latch kits, 3 through 165 tons. Cast alloy steel duplex hooks, 25 through 350 tons. Locking devices, all models. Reeving guides, all models. Sheave shrouds, all models. For complete range of options, see general catalog and current price list. KEY TO J-BLOCK MODEL NUMBERS J SHORTY J CRANE BLOCK 20 SAFE WORKING LIMITTONS Q NUMBER OF SHEAVES: S=1 D=2 T=3 Q=4 QN = 5 SX = 6 SV = 7 OCT = 8 12 SHEAVE SIZE NOM. O.D. B SHEAVE BEARING: B = BRONZE BUSHED R = ROLLER BEARING T = TAPERED ROLLER BEARING T HOOK THRUST BEARING B CHEEK WEIGHTS: A = NO WTS. AB == MED. WTS. B = STD. WTS. C = X-HEAVY WTS.
See our website www.bairstow.com For details go to Johnson Block Link
SHORTY J HOOK LATCH OPTIONS
3 TONS S.W.L.
5 TONS 10-15 TONS S.W.L. S.W.L.
20-25 TONS 20-25 TONS 35-45 TONS 50-70 TONS 75-110 TONS 115-165 TONS 200-350 TONS S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. -1,2 SHVS -3 OR MORE (HOOK (HOOKS (HOOKS (HOOKS 30 TONS SHVS 1002 1105, 107 1012,1013 1014,1015 S.W.L. ONLY) ONLY) ONLY) ONLY)
LIGHT DUTY LATCH HEAVY DUTY LATCH
5626 5622
5503
5551
5533
3292 3214
3190
4940
3506
4941
4943
4944
4946
BAR TYPE IS STANDARD)
McKISSICK BLOCKS A BETTER BLOCK FOR EVERY PURPOSE

A BETTER HOOK BLOCK
Standard from 10 to 24 inch and 1 to 5 sheaves. Weighted and with capacities to 165 tons.
332/352 Double 333/353 Triple 334/354 Quad
A BETTER CONSTRUCTION BLOCK

Widest range available. Highest quality obtainable. Capacities to 90 tons.
703
605
See our website www.bairstow.com For details go to Crosby Catalog Link
103
WIRE ROPE SHEAVES

McKissick sheaves come in a variety of sizes to suit your specific applications. Check the tables for the size, bearing style and price that best fits your application. For applications that require unique specifications Crosby can make minor modifications to many of the sheaves listed at a reasonable charge.We can also custom design and manufacture sheaves to your exact requirements. Contact Crosby Sales to order McKissick sheaves and include the stock number and quantity. For special requirements or custom designed sheaves, furnish the following important information: wireline size, shaft diameter, weight requirements, hub diameter, bore finished, nominal outside diameter, hub width, rim width, nominal tread diameter, other special requirements.
ROLL FORGED SHEAVE FEATURES

Unique upset roll forging process provides a thicker groove section for extra strength. Stepped Hubs are precisely centered and mechanically locked in place. Wireline grooves on sheave diameters of 14 and larger are flame hardened for extra wear resistance. All sheaves have solid steel webs with holes for easy handling. Sheave weights can be made heavier or lighter than shown to fit your specific application. Sheaves available in sizes from 3 to 72, and wireline sizes from 1/4 to 3. For more information ask for our special brochure describing the complete roll forging process.
See our website www.bairstow.com For details go to Crosby Catalog Link
BRONZE BUSHING
Slow line speed, moderate load and moderate use, Maximum Bearing Pressure (BP): 450 PSI Maximum Velocity at Bearing (BV): 1200 FPM Maximum Pressure Velocity Factor (PV): 55000 Formula for BP = Line Pull x Angle Factor (See Page 215) Shaft Size x Hub Width (see example).
PLAIN BORE
Very slow line speed, very infrequent use, low load.
ROLLER BEARING
Faster line speeds, more frequent use, greater load.
TO ORDER: Call us with desired Width, Diameter, Bore, Bearing Type and Wire Rope Size to get a quote on price and availability.
Example: Using a 14 in. sheave (917191) with a 4600 lb. line pull and a 80 degree angle between lines, determine maximum allowable line speed. BP = 4600 lbs. (Line Pull) 55000 (PV Factor) x 1.53 1.50 x 1.62 = (Angle Factor) (Shaft Size) (Hub Width) 2896 (BP) = 19FPM 2896 PSI
BV
104
SHEAVE QUOTE / ORDER FORM

Copy this form and then fax or email it to us with your specs.
Bairstow Lifting Products Co.

1785 Ellsworth Ind. Dr. Atlanta, GA 30318 Phone 404-351-2600 800-241-8990 Fax 404-355-2046 web info@bairstow.com
105
SMALL WIRE ROPE BLOCKS

Dimensions in inches are approximate.
SWIVEL EYE SINGLE SHEAVE BLOCK

CODE NO. CABLE SIZE B S.W.L. WT. (lbs.)
SWIVEL EYE DOUBLE SHEAVE BLOCK

01548 02048 02548 03048 03048-5/16 03548 03548-3/8 0448 0548
3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 5
525 600 685 800 800 1550 1550 1700 1850
.5 .7 1.0 1.4 1.4 3.1 3.1 3.6 5.2
01548-2 02048-2 02548-2 03048-2 03048-2-5/16 03548-2 03548-2-3/8 0448-2 0548-2
3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 5
525 600 685 800 800 1550 1550 1700 1850
1 1.5 2 2.5 2.5 5 5 6.3 9.1
SINGLE SHEAVE BLOCK

DOUBLE SHEAVE BLOCK

01558 02058 02558 03058 03058-5/16 03558 03558-3/8
3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2
420 480 550 640 640 1240 1240
.3 .5 .8 1.0 1.0 2.3 2.3
01558-2 02058-2 02558-2 03058-2 03058-2-5/16 03558-2 03558-2-3/8
3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2
525 600 685 800 800 1550 1550
.5 1 2 2.5 2.5 4 4
FIXED EYE SINGLE SHEAVE BLOCK

FIXED EYE DOUBLE SHEAVE BLOCK

01568 02068 02568 03068 03068-5/16 03568 03568-3/8
3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2
420 480 550 640 640 1240 1240
.5 .7 1.0 1.4 1.4 3.1 3.1
01568-2 02068-2 02568-2 03068-2 03068-2-5/16 03568-2 03568-2-3/8
3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2
525 600 685 800 800 1550 1550
1 1.5 2 2.5 2.5 5 5
SWIVEL HOOK SINGLE SHEAVE BLOCK

SWIVEL HOOK DOUBLE SHEAVE BLOCK

01578-SL 02078-SL 02578-SL 03078-SL 03078-5/16-SL 03578-SL 03578-3/8-SL 0478-SL 05078-SL
3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 5
525 600 685 800 800 1550 1550 1700 1850
.5 .7 1.0 1.4 1.4 3.1 3.1 3.8 5.3
01578-2-SL 02078-2-SL 02578-2-SL 03078-2-SL 03078-2-5/16-SL 03578-2-SL 03578-2-3/8-SL 0478-2-SL 0578-2-SL
3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 5
525 600 685 800 800 1550 1550 1700 1850
1 1.5 2 2.5 2.5 5 5 6.5 9.3
1-1/2 - 3-1/2 SHEAVES WITH BRONZE BUSHINGS

00158 00208 00258 00308 00308-5/16 00358 00358-3/8 00408 00508
3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 5
420 480 550 640 640 1240 1240 1700 1850
.2 .3 .5 .8 .8 1.3 1.3 1.8 2.9
DECK BLOCKS STRAP BLOCKS 3-SHEAVE BLOCKS REMOVABLE PIN BLOCKS BLOCKS W/THREADED BOLT 4, 5, 6 SHEAVES AVAILABLE ON REQUEST
Snatch Block Style on Request
B Dimension is Sheave Diameter
106
FIBER ROPE BLOCKS

WOOD SHELL BLOCKS WITH STEEL FRAME
BLOCK SIZE (IN.) FITTING SINGLE SHEAVE DOUBLE SHEAVE TRIPLE SHEAVE 21 C 21 B 21 R 22 C 22 B 22 R 23 B 23 R STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV.
HS-21B SINGLE (AVAILABLE IN N & S)
3 HS 602217 603813 603617 602618 604616 4 HS 602235 603831 603635 602636 604634 5 HS 602253 603859 603653 602654 604652 6 HS 602271 603877 603671 602672 604670 8 HS 602315 603911 603715 602716 604714 3 N 606419 606810 4 N 606437 606231 606838 5 N 606455 606856 6 N 606473 606874 8 N 606516 606918 3 S 610011 611617 4 S 610039 611635 5 S 610057 611653 6 S 610075 611671 8 S 610119 611715 Bearing Code: C - Common, R - Roller, B - Bronze Self Lubricating.
604411 604439 604457 604475 606632 606650 606678 611476 611519
605410 605438 605456 605474 605517 607212 607230 607258 607276 607310 613214 613232 613250 613278 613312
605232 605278 605312 607034 607070
N-22-B DOUBLE (AVAILABLE IN HS & S)
SHEAVE DIAMETER (IN.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (LBS.) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.) BLOCK SIZE OUTSIDE RIM CENTER PIN MANILA ROPE 21 22 23 21 22 23 (IN.) DIAM. THICKNESS DIAM. SIZE (IN.) SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE
3 1.75 .50 .38 3/8 500 800 1200 4 2.25 .63 .38 1/2 1000 1400 1800 5 3.00 .75 .38 5/8 1200 1800 2400 6 3.50 1.00 .50 3/4 1800 2500 3200 8 4.75 1.13 .63 7/8 - 1 2800 3800 4800 *Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. NOTE: We furnish beckets on all blocks. For Reeving information, see page 107.
1.00 1.75 3.25 5.00 9.00
1.75 3.00 5.60 8.50 14.00
2.50 4.00 6.50 11.50 21.50
S-23-B TRIPLE (AVAILABLE IN HS & N)
GIN BLOCK FOR ROOFERS AND CONTRACTORS

BLOCK SIZE (IN.) FITTING T-350-C PAINTED STOCK NO. T-350-R T-350-B PAINTED PAINTED SHEAVE SIZE (IN.) MANILA WORKING WEIGHT OUTSIDE RIM BEARING ROPE LIMIT* EACH DIAMETER THICKNESS DIAMETER SIZE (IN.) (LBS.) (LBS.)
T-350-C
8 T 710001 710207 710403 8.00 1.25 .75 10 T 710029 710225 710421 10.00 1.25 .88 12 T 710047 710243 710449 12.00 1.38 .88 14 T 710065 710261 710467 14.00 1.50 1.00 *Ultimate Load is 3 times the Working Load Limit. Bearing Code: C - Common Iron, R - Roller, B - Self Lubricating Bronze Bushed
7/8 1 1 1
1000 1000 1000 1000
9.0 9.8 12.7 20.0
107
Tackle Block and Sheave Assembly Warning, Use & Maintenance Information _______________________ WARNING
A potential hazard exists when lifting or dragging heavy loads with tackle block assemblies. Failure to design and use tackle block systems properly may cause a load to slip or fall the result could be serious injury or death. Failure to design lifting system with appropriate sheave assembly material for the intended application may cause premature sheave, bearing or wire rope wear and ultimate failure the result could be serious injury or death. A tackle block system should be rigged by a qualified person as defined by ANSI/ASME B.30. Instruct workers to keep hands and body away from block sheaves and swivels and away from pinch points where rope touches block parts or loads. Do not side load tackle blocks. See OSHA Rule 1926.550(g) for personnel hoisting by cranes and derricks, and OSHA Directive CPL 2-1.29 Interim Inspection Procedures During Communication Tower Construction Activities. Only a Crosby or McKissick Hook with a PL latch attached and secured with a bolt, nut and cotter pin (or toggle pin) or a PL-N latch attached and secured with toggle pin; or a Crosby hook with an S-4320 latch attached and secured with cotter pin or bolt, nut and pin; or a Crosby SHURLOC Hook in the locked position may be used for any personnel hoisting. A hook with a Crosby SS-4055 latch attached shall NOT be used for personnel lifting. Instruct workers to be alert and to wear proper safety gear in areas where loads are moved or supported with tackle block systems. Use only genuine Crosby parts as replacement. Read, understand, and follow these instructions to select, use and maintain tackle block systems.
Definitions ________________________
STATIC LOAD The load resulting from a constantly applied force or load. WORKING LOAD LIMIT The maximum mass or force which the product is authorized to support in general service when the pull is applied inline, unless noted otherwise, with respect to the center line of the product. this term is used interchangeably with the following terms. 1. WLL 2. Rated Load Value 3. SWL 4. Safe Working Load 5. Resultant Safe Working Load WORKING LOAD The maximum mass or force which the product is authorized to support in a particular service. PROOF LOAD The average force applied in the performance of a proof test; the average force to which a product may be subjected before deformation occurs. PROOF TEST A test applied to a product solely to determine non conforming material or manufacturing defects. ULTIMATE LOAD The average load or force at which the product fails, or no longer supports the load. SHOCK LOAD A force that results from the rapid application of a force (such as impacting and/or jerking) or rapid movement of a static load. A shock load significantly adds to the static load. DESIGN (SAFETY) FACTOR An industry term denoting a products theoretical reserve capability; usually computed by dividing the catalog Ultimate Load by the Working Load Limit. Generally expressed for blocks as a ratio of 4 to 1. TACKLE BLOCK An assembly consisting of a sheave(s), side plates, and generally an end fitting (hook, shackle, etc.) that is used for lifting, lowering, or applying tension. SHEAVE / SHEAVE BEARING ASSEMBLY Purchased by O.E.M. or end user to be used in their block or lifting system design.
Fitting Maintenance ________________________

Fittings, including hooks, overhaul balls, shackles, links, etc., may become worn and disfigured with use, corrosion, and abuse resulting in nicks, gouges, worn threads and bearings, sharp corners which may produce additional stress conditions and reduce system load capacity. Grinding is the recommended procedure to restore smooth surfaces. The maximum allowance for reduction of a products original dimension due to wear or repair before removal from service is: 1. Any single direction - No more than 10% of original dimension; 2. Two directions - No more than 5% of each dimension. For detailed instructions on specific products, see the application and warning information for that product. Any greater reduction may necessitate a reduced Working Load Limit. Any crack or deformation in a fitting is sufficient cause to withdraw the product from service.
General Cautions or Warnings ___________________________

Ratings shown in Crosby Group literature are applicable only to new or in as new products. Working Load Limit ratings indicate the greatest force or load a product can carry under usual environmental conditions. shock loading and extraordinary conditions must be taken into account when selecting products for use in tackle block systems. Working Load Limit ratings are based on all sheaves of tackle block system being utilized. If all sheaves are not utilized, balance must be maintained, and the working Load Limit must be reduced proportionally to prevent overloading sheave components. Changes from full sheave reeving arrangement should be only at the recommendaiton of a qualifie dperson, and incorporate good rigging practices. In general, the products displayed in Crosby Group literature are used as parts of a system being employed to accomplish a task. Therefore, we can only recommend within the working Load Limits, or other stated limitations, the use of products for this purpose. The Working Load Limit or Design (Safety) Factor of each Crosby product may be affected by wear, misuse, overloading, corrosion, deformation, intentional alteration, and other use conditions. Regular inspection must be conducted to determine whether use can be continued at the catalog assigned WLL, a reduced WLL, a reduced Design (Safety) Factor, or withdrawn from service. Crosby Group products generally are intended for tension or pull. Side loading must be avoided, as it exerts additional force or loading which the product is not designed to accommodate. Always make sure the hook supports the load. The latch must never support the load. Welding of load supporting parts or products can be hazardous. Knowledge of materials, heat treatment, and welding procedures are necessary for proper welding. Crosby Group should be consulted for information.
108
TACKLE BLOCK MAINTENANCE

Tackle Blocks must be regularly inspected, lubricated, and maintained for peak efficiency and extended usefulness. Their proper use and maintenance is equal in importance to other mechanical equipment. The frequency of inspection and lubrication is dependent upon frequency and periods of use, environmental conditions, and the user's good judgment. Inspection: As a minimum, the following points should be considered: 1. Wear on pins or axles, rope grooves, side plates, bushing or bearings, and fittings. (See Fitting Maintenance.) Excessive wear may be a cause to replace parts or remove block from service. 2. Deformation in side plates, pins and axles, fitting attachment points, trunnions, etc. Deformation can be caused by abusive service and / or overload and may be a cause to remove block from service. 3. Misalignment or wobble in sheaves. 4. Security of nuts, bolts, and other locking methods, especially after reassembly following a tear down inspection. Original securing method should be used; e.g., staking, set screw, cotter pin, cap screw. 5. Pins retained by snap rings should be checked for missing or loose rings. 6. Sheave pin nuts should be checked for proper positioning. Pins for tapered roller bearings should be tightened to remove all end play during sheave rotation. Pins for bronze bushings and straight roller bearings should have a running clearance of .031 inch per sheave of end play and should be adjusted accordingly. 7. Hook or shackle to swivel case clearance is set at .031 to .062 at the factory. Increased clearance can result from component wear. Clearance exceed ing .12 to.18 should necessitate disassembly and further inspection. 8. Deformation or corrosion of hook and nut threads. 9. Surface condition and deformation of hook (See Fitting Maintenance and ANSI B30.10.) 10. Welded side plates for weld corrosion or weld cracking. 11. Hook latch for deformation, proper fit and operation. Lubrication: The frequency of lubrication depends upon frequency and period of product use as well as environmental conditions, which are contingent upon the user's good judgment. Assuming normal product use, the following schedule is suggested when using lithium-base grease of a medium consistency. Sheave Bearings Tapered Roller BearingsEvery 40 hours of continuous operation or every 30 days of intermittent operation. Roller BearingsEvery 24 hours of continuous operation or every 14 days of intermittent operation. Bronze Bushings(Not Self Lubricated)Every 8 hours of continuous operation or every 14 days of intermittent operation. Hook Bearings Anti FrictionEvery 14 days for frequent swiveling; every 45 days for infrequent swiveling. Bronze Thrust Bushing or No BearingEvery 16 hours for frequent swiveling; every 21 days for infrequent swiveling. Tackle Block Maintenance also depends upon proper block selection (see "Loads on Blocks"), proper reeving (see "The Reeving of Tackle Blocks"), consideration of shock loads, side loading, and other adverse conditions.
SHEAVE BEARING APPLICATION INFORMATION

BRONZE BUSHINGS Bronze Bushings are used primarily for sheave applications using slow line speed, moderate load, and moderate use.The performance capability of a bearing is related to the bearing pressure and the bearing surface velocity by a relationship known as true PV (Maximum Pressure - Velocity Factor). The material properties of the Bronze Bushings furnished as standard in Crosby catalog sheaves are: (BP) Maximum Bearing Pressure :4500 PSI (BV) Maximum Velocity at Bearing :1200 FPM (PV) Maximum Pressure Velocity Factor :55000 (It should be noted that due to material property relations, the maximum BP times the maximum BV is NOT equal to the maximum PV.) Formula for Calculating Bearing Pressure: BP = Line Pull x Angle Factor Shaft Size x Hub Width Note: Angle factor Multipliers listed on page 19 Formula for Calculating Bearing Velocity: BV = PV BP Formula for Calculating Line Speed: Line Speed = BV (Tread Diameter + Rope Diameter) Shaft Diameter BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com
109

Calculations can be made to find the maximum allowable line speed for a given total sheave load. If the required line speed is greater than the maximum allowable line speed calculated, then increase the shaft size and/or the hub width and recalculate. Continue the process until the maximum allowable line speed is equal to or exceeds the required line speed. Example Using a 14 in. sheave (Stock # 917191; refer to wire rope sheave section of 950 General Catalog for dimensions) with a 4600 lb. Iine pull and an 80 angle between lines determine maximum allowable line speed. BP = (4600 lb. (line pull) 55000 (PV Factor) x 1.53) (1. 50 : x (angle factor) (Shaft Size) : 2896 (BP) 1.62) (Hub Width) = 2896 PSI
BV =
= 19 FPM ALLOWABLE
Line Speed = 19 (BV)
(12 + .75) 1.50 = 161.5 FPM ALLOWABLE : (Tread Dia + Rope Size) (Shaft Dia.)
If the application required a line speed equal to 200 FPM, then another calculation would be necessary. Trying another 14 in. sheave (stock # 4104828) under the same loading conditions, the results are as follows: BP = (4600 Ibs. x 1.53) (2.75 x 2.31) = 1108 PSI : BV = 55000 1108 = 50 FPM : Line Speed = 50 x (12.25 + .75) 2.75 = 236 FPM ALLOWABLE : COMMON (PLAIN) BOREVery slow line speed, very infrequent use, low load. ROLLER BEARINGFaster line speeds, more frequent use, greater load. Refer to manufacturer's rating.
LOADS ON BLOCKS
The Working Load Limit (WLL) for Crosby Group blocks indicates the maximum load that should be exerted on the block and its connecting fitting. This total load value may be different from the weight being lifted or pulled by a hoisting or hauling system. It is necessary to determine the total load being imposed on each block in the system to properly determine the rated capacity block to be used. A single sheave block used to change load line direction can be subjected to total loads greatly different from the weight being lifted or pulled. The total load value varies with the angle between the incoming and departing lines to the block. The following chart indicates the factor to be multiplied by the line pull to obtain the total load on the block.
ANGLE ANGLE FACTOR MULTIPLIERS FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR
0 10 20 30 40 45 50 60 70 80 90
2.00 1.99 1.97 1.93 1.87 1.84 1.81 1.73 1.64 1.53 1.41
100 110 120 130 135 140 150 160 170 180
1.29 1.15 1.00 .84 .76 .68 .52 .35 .17 .00
Example A (Calculations for determining total load value on single line system.) A gin pole truck lifting 1,000 Ibs.
There is no mechanical advantage to a single part load line system, so winch line pull is equal to 1,000 Ibs. or the weight being lifted. To determine total load on snatch block A: A = 1,000 Ibs. (line pull) B = 1,000 Ibs. (line pull) x 1.81 = 1,810 Ibs. (factor 50 angle) x .76 = 760 Ibs. (factor 135 angle)
To determine total load on toggle block, B:
110

Example B (Calculation for determining total load value for mechanical advantage system.) Hoisting system lifting 1,000 Ibs. using a traveling block. The mechanical advantage of traveling block C is 2.00 because two (2) parts of load line support the 1,000 lb. weight. (To determine single line pull for various bearing efficiency see "How to Figure Line Parts" page 109). To Determine Line Pull: Line Pull = 1000 Ibs. 2.00 = 500 Ibs. : To determine total load on traveling block C= 500lbs. x 2.0 = 1,000 lbs. (line pull) (Factor 0 angle) To determine total load on stationary block D: D = 500 Ibs. x 1.87 + 500 Ibs. (line pull) (Factor 40 angle) (dead end load) To determine total load on block E: E = 500 Ibs. x .84 = 420 Ibs. (line pull) (Factor 130 angle) To determine total load on block F: F= 500 Ibs. x 1.41 = 705 Ibs. (line pull) (Factor 90 angle)
= 1,435 Ibs.
"Right Angle" Reeving Diagram
THE REEVING OF TACKLE BLOCKS

In reeving of tackle blocks, there are many methods. The method discussed below is referred to as "Right Angle" reeving. Please consult your rigging manual for other methods of reeving. RIGHT ANGLE REEVING In reeving a pair of tackle blocks, one of which has more than two sheaves, the hoisting rope should lead from one of the center sheaves of the upper block to prevent toppling and avoid injury to the rope. The two blocks should be placed so that the sheaves in the upper block are at right angles to those in the lower one, as shown in the following illustrations. Start reeving with the becket or dead end of the rope. Use a shackle block as the upper one of a pair and a hook block as the lower one as seen below. Sheaves in a set of blocks revolve at different rates of speed. Those nearest the lead line revolve at the highest rate of speed and wear out more rapidly. All sheaves should be kept well lubricated when in operation to reduce friction and wear.
111
TACKLE BLOCK INFORMATION

SHEAVE SIZE AND WIRE ROPE STRENGTH
Strength Efficiency Bending wire rope reduces its strength. To account for the effect of bend radius on wire rope strength when selecting a sheave, use the table below.
RATIO A STRENGTH EFFICIENCY COMPARED TO CATALOG STRENGTH IN %
40 30 20 15 10 8 6 4 2 1
95 93 91 89 86 83 79 75 65 50
Fatigue Life Repeated bending and straightening of wire rope causes a cyclic change of stress called fatiguing. Bend radius affects wire rope fatigue life. A comparison of the relative effect of sheave diameter on wire rope fatigue life can be determined as shown below:
RATIO B RELATIVE FATIGUE BENDING LIFE
30 25 20 18 16 14 12
10.0 6.6 3.8 2.9 2.1 1.5 1.1
STRESS FORMULA
L x A = S L = Load in lbs. A = Angle factor S = Stress in lbs. SAMPLE: By using a 500 lb. weight, the stress exerted on the eye would be 1,000 lbs. L x A 500 lbs. x 2.0 See Chart 1 Below for Angle Factors = = S 1,000 lbs.
ANGLE
FACTOR
CHART ONE (1) ANGLE FACTOR
ANGLE
FACTOR
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
2.0 1.98 1.97 1.93 1.87 1.81 1.73
70 80 90 100 110 120 130
1.64 1.53 1.41 1.29 1.150 1.000 .840
140 150 160 170 180
.680 .520 .350 .170 .000
112
TACKLE BLOCK INFORMATION

HOW TO DETERMINE OVERHAULING WEIGHTS
To determine the weight of the block or overhaul ball that is required to free fall the block, the following information is needed: size of wire rope, number of line parts, type of sheave bearing, length of crane boom, and drum friction (use 50 pounds, unless other information is available). The Formula is: Required Block Weight = [(Boom Length x Factor A) + Drum Friction] x Factor B Example To determine the required block or overhaul weight using 5 parts of 7/8" diameter wire rope, a 50 ft. boom and roller bearing sheaves: Required Block Weight = [(50 ft. x 1.42) + 50 lbs.] x 5.38 = 651 lbs. (Boom length) Factor A (Drum Friction) (Factor B)
WIRE ROPE SIZE (INCHES) FACTOR AWIRE ROPE WEIGHT LBS. PER FT., 6 X 19 IWRC
3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4

NUMBER OF LINE PARTS
.26 .35 .46 .59 .72 1.04 1.42 1.85 2.34 2.89
FACTOR BOVERHAUL FACTORS ROLLER BEARING BRONZE BUSHED SHEAVES SHEAVES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1.03 2.07 3.15 4.25 5.38 6.54 7.73 8.94 10.20 11.50
1.05 2.14 3.28 4.48 5.72 7.03 8.39 9.80 11.30 12.80
HOW TO FIGURE LINE PARTS

To help figure the number of parts of line to be used for a given load, or the line pull required for a given load, (For example use reeving diagram on page 20. Only numbered lines shall be used in the calculation). The following ratio table is provided with examples of how to use it.
RATIO A BRONZE BUSHED SHEAVES RATIO B ANTI-FRICTION BEARING SHEAVES NUMBER OF LINE PARTS
Ratio A or B =
Total Load to be Lifted Single Line Pull (Ibs.) After calculating Ratio A or B, consult table to determine number of parts of line. Examples To find the number of parts of line needed when weight of load and single line pull are known, and using Bronze Bushed Sheaves. 72,180 Ibs. (load to be lifted) = 9.06 Ratio A = 8,000 Ibs. (single line pull) (Ratio A)
.96 1.87 2.75 3.59 4.39 5.16 5.90 6.60 7.27 7.91 8.52 9.11 9.68 10.20 10.70 11.20 11.70 12.20 12.60 13.00
.98 1.94 2.88 3.81 4.71 5.60 6.47 7.32 8.16 8.98 9.79 10.60 11.40 12.10 12.90 13.60 14.30 15.00 15.70 16.40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Refer to ratio 9.06 in table or number nearest to it, then check column under heading "Number of Line Parts" = 12 parts of line to be used for this load. To find the single line pull needed when weight of load and number of parts of line are known, and using anti-friction bearing sheaves. Single Line Pull = 68,000 Ibs.(load to be lifted) = 9290 lbs. 7.32 (Ratio B of 8 part line) 9,290 Ibs. single line pull required to lift this load on 8 parts of line. To find the lift capacity when the parts of line and single line pull are known, and using anti-friction bearing sheaves. 10,000 Ibs. (single line pull) x 4.71 (ratio B of 5 parts of line) = 47,100 Ibs. (Lift Capacity) 10,000 Ibs. single line pull with 5 parts of line will accommodate 47,1001bs. Iift capacity.
113
WELDED CHAIN GRADE 30, 43, 70, 80

G-80 ALLOY SLING CHAIN
Tested and rated for overhead lifting.
CODE NO. BLACK CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) DIA. INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE LENGTH WEIGHT PER 100 FT. (LBS.)
140G80 1/4 380G80 3/8 120G80 1/2 580G80 5/8 340G80 3/4 780G80 7/8 100G80 1 114G80 1-1/4 NOTE: Grade 100 also available
3,500 7,100 12,000 18,100 28,300 34,200 47,700 72,300
.28 .39 .51 .63 .75 .87 1.0 1.26
.39 .55 .71 .87 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.7
.83 1.2 1.5 1.9 2.2 2.6 3.1 3.8
74 151 253 382 524 738 996 1575
G-70 PREMIUM TIE DOWN CHAIN

Not for overhead lifting.
CODE NO. GOLD CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) DIA. INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE LENGTH WEIGHT PER 100 FT. (LBS.)
140G70 1/4 3,150 .281 516G70 5/16 4,700 .327 380G70 3/8 6,600 .406 120G70 1/2 11,300 .531 NOTE: G-70 Transport Chain has a gold dichromate finish.
.48 .47 .54 .73
.84 .99 1.15 1.45
74 100 156 259
G-43 STANDARD TIE DOWN CHAIN HIGH TEST

Not for overhead lifting. Available in Zinc Plated and Hot Galvanized.
CODE NO. BLACK CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) DIA. INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE LENGTH WEIGHT PER 100 FT. (LBS.)
140G43 516G43 380G43 120G43 580G43 340G43 780G43 100G43
1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1
2,600 3,900 5,400 9,200 11,500 16,200 22,500 26,500
.281 .327 .390 .531 .656 .781 .875 1.00
.48 .50 .62 .82 1.01 1.13 1.38 1.51
1.01 1.11 1.24 1.51 1.88 2.13 2.52 2.77
71 98 144 278 422 606 769 1069
G-30 PROOF COIL GENERAL PURPOSE CHAIN

Not for overhead lifting.
CODE NO. CODE NO. BRIGHT ZINC PLATED CODE NO. HOT GALV. CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) DIA. (IN.) INSIDE WIDTH (IN.) INSIDE WEIGHT PER LENGTH (IN.) 100 FT. (LBS.)
316S30 140S30 516S30 380S30 120S30 580S30 340S30
316Z30 140Z30 516Z30 380Z30 120Z30 580Z30 340Z30
316G30 140G30 516G30 380G30 120G30 580G30 340G30
3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4
800 1300 1900 2650 4500 6900 10,600
.218 .276 .327 .390 .531 .656 .787
.41 .48 .50 .62 .82 1.01 1.13
.96 1.01 1.11 1.24 1.51 1.88 2.13
38 98 144 278 422 628 1069
114
CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF CHAIN

Campbell welded chain products are designed and built MINIMUM ALLOWABLE DIAMETER CHART for rugged lasting service. As with any quality product TRADE SIZE ACTUAL MATERIAL DIAMETER MINIMUM ALLOWABLE DIAMETER certain precautions and standards of treatment should INCHES MM INCHES MM AT WORN PORTION OF LINK be observed. Follow the suggestions listed below and the serviceable life may be extended considerably SYSTEMS 3 AND 4 5 .218 5.53 .171 beyond the normal life of the chain. Campbell engineers 3/16 7 .281 7.14 .234 should be consulted when heat treated chain is used at 1/4 8 .343 8.71 .265 unusual temperatures (under -20F) [-29C] or over 5/16 10 .406 10.31 .296 350F [1 77C] or where special applications are 3/8 7/16 11 .468 11.89 .343 required. 1/2 13 .531 13.49 .390 5/8 16 .656 16.66 .484 Instructions Regarding Attachments: Where attach- 3/4 20 .781 19.84 .593 ments, such as hooks or rings, are designed for use 7/8 22 .906 23.01 .703 with chain in sustaining loads, care should be taken to 1 25 1.031 26.19 .828 select the type, grade and size recommended. 1-1/4 32 1.281 32.54 1.031 Attachments shall have a rated capacity (working load SYSTEM 7 7 .281 7.14 .234 limit) at least equal to that of the steel chain with which 1/4 8 .343 8.71 .265 they are used; if not, the assembly shall be rated to the 5/16 3/8 10 .394 10.00 .296 capacity of the weakest component. 7/16 11 .468 11.89 .343 13 .512 13.00 .390 Cautions: The terms "working load limit" and "proof 1/2 SYSTEM 8 test" contain no implication of what load the chain will 7/32 5 .218 5.53 .172 withstand if either of the above factors are changed. 9/32 7 .281 7.14 .234 NEVER EXCEED THE WORKING LOAD LIMIT OF 5/16 8 .315 8.00 .250 CHAIN even when chain is new and the load is uni- 3/8 10 .394 10.00 .296 formly applied. Manufacturer denies any liability for 1/2 13 .512 13.00 .391 damage which may result from use in excess of work- 5/8 16 .630 16.00 .484 ing load limit. Any abuse or misuse of the product may 3/4 20 .787 20.00 .594 lessen the load the product will withstand. Some exam- 7/8 22 .881 22.40 .703 1 25 1.000 25.40 .813 ples of such changes and abuses are as follows: 1-1/4 32 1.250 31.75 1.000 Twisting. Disfigurement. Deterioration of the product by strain, usage or COMPARATIVE TABLE OF WIRE SIZES AND CHAIN SIZES corrosion. Shock loading. WASHBURN NEAREST CHAIN NUMBER AND MOEN FRACTIONS DECIMALS WELDLESS WELDED Use for a purpose other than that for which the WIRE OF AN OF AN EQUIV. DOUBLE LOCK particular product was intended. GAUGE INCH INCH IN MM LOOP LINK JACK COIL MACHINE Use to carry a load in excess of working load limit. No. 20 1/32 .034 0.88 No. 20 No. 18 3/64 .047 1.20 No. 7 No. 18 Purchasers will please note that all the "cautions" above No. 17 3/64 .054 1.37 No. 6 set forth apply not only to the use of the chain, but also No. 16 1/16 .062 1.59 No. 5 No. 16 to the use of attachments thereon. No. 15 5/64 .072 1.83 No. 4 No. 4 No. 14 5/64 .080 2.03 No. 3 No. 3 No. 14 No. 13 3/32 .091 2.32 No. 2 No. 2 No. 12 7/64 .105 2.68 No. 1 No. 1 No. 12 No. 11 1/8 .120 3.06 No. 1/0 No. 1/0 No. 4 No. 4 No. 10 9/64 .135 3.43 No. 2/0 No. 2/0 No. 10 No. 3 No. 3 No. 9 5/32 .148 2.77 No. 3/0 NO. 3/0 No. 2 No.2 No. 8 5/32 .162 4.12 No. 4/0 No. 4/0 No. 8 No. 1 No. 1 No. 7 11/64 .177 4.50 No. 5/0 No. 5/0 No. 1/0 No. 1/0 No. 6 3/16 .192 4.88 No. 6/0 No. 6/0 No. 6 No. 2/0 No. 2/0 No. 5 13/64 .207 5.26 No. 7/0 No. 7/0 No. 5 No. 3/0 No. 3/0 OTHER ATTACHMENTS 7/32 .218 5.56 AVAILABLE UPON No. 4 15/64 .225 5.72 No. 8/0 No. 4/0 No. 4/0 1/4 .250 6.35 No. 5/0 No. 5/0 REQUEST 9/32 .281 7.14 No. 6/0 No. 6/0 5/16 .312 7.94 No. 7/0 No. 7/0 11/32 .343 8.73 No. 8/0 3/8 .375 9.52 No. 9/0 13/32 .406 10.32 No. 10/0 7/16 .437 11.11 No. 11/0 15/32 .468 11.91 No. 12/0 17/32 .531 13.49 No. 14/0
115
CHAIN HOOKS & ACCESSORIES

HOOK SIZE 1/4 M204H M204HZ 2,600 28 M304H M304HZ 2,600 45 M804L M804ZL 2,600 40 M904L M904ZL 2,600 50 M804A 3,500 40 5/16 M205H M205HZ 3,900 55 M305H M305HZ 3,900 60 M805L M805ZL 3,900 65 M905L M905ZL 3,900 75 M805A 4,500 65 3/8 M206H M206HZ 5,400 80 M306H M306HZ 5,400 100 M806L M806ZL 5,400 100 M906L M906ZL 5,400 125 M806A 7,100 100 7/16 M207H M207HZ 7,200 132 M307H M307HZ 7,200 150 M807L M807ZL 7,200 150 M907L M907ZL 7,200 200 M807A* 6,900 150 1/2 M208H M208HZ 9,200 170 M308H M308HZ 9,200 190 M808L M808ZL 9,200 200 M908L M908ZL 9,200 280 M808A 12,000 200 5/8 M210H M210HZ 13,000 305 M310H M310HZ 13,000 380 M810L M810ZL 13,000 400 M910 M910Z 13,000 500 M810A 18,100 400 M812 M812Z 20,200 700 3/4 M212H M212HZ 20,200 610
G-43 EYE GRAB HOOK G-43 EYE SLIP HOOK G-43 CLEVIS GRAB HOOK G-43 CLEVIS SLIP HOOK G-80 ALLOY CLEVIS GRAB HOOK G-63 ALLOY CLEVIS SLIP HOOK DOUBLE CLEVIS LINK
Code No. Clear Finish Code No. Zinc Plated Rated Working Load (lbs.) Weight per 100 lbs. Code No. Clear Finish Code No. Zinc Plated Rated Working Load (lbs.) Weight per 100 lbs. Code No. Clear Finish Code No. Zinc Plated Rated Working Load (lbs.) Weight per 100 lbs. Code No. Clear Finish Code No. Zinc Plated Rated Working Load (lbs.) Weight per 100 lbs. Code No. Clear Finish Rated Working Load (lbs.) Weight per 100 lbs. *Grade 63
Not recommended for overhead lifting in sling application. Code No. Clear Finish Rated Working Load (lbs.) Weight per 100 lbs. M904A 2,750 50 M905A 3,600 75 M906A 5,500 125 M907A 6,900 200 M908A 9,400 280 M910A 14,200 500
Not recommended for overhead lifting in sling application. Code No. Zinc Plated Standard Package Rated Working Load (lbs.) Weight per 100 lbs. M605 10 4700 3.5 M605 10 4700 3.5 M606 10 6600 4.5 M608 5 11,300 5.0 M608 5 11,300 5.0 M610 5 18,000 8.5
QUICK LINKS ZINC PLATED
CODE NO.
SIZE (IN.)
STD. PKG.
INSIDE LENGTH (IN.)
INSIDE WIDTH (IN.)
SIDE OPENING (IN.)
WEIGHT WORKING PER EACH LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) (LBS.)
D81901 D81001 D81101 D81201 D81301 D81501
1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2
20 20 20 20 10 10
1-9/64 1-1/2 1-3/4 2-5/16 2-7/16 3-3/16
25/64 1/2 9/16 11/16 3/4 15/16
13/64 1/4 9/32 3/8 7/16 19/32
3 4-1/2 8 17 23 51
220 616 880 1,540 1,980 3.300
NOTE: NO ITEMS ON THIS PAGE ARE RECOMMENDED FOR OVERHEAD LIFTING.

116
CHAIN HOOKS & ACCESSORIES

COLD SHUTSNO. 1 PLAIN
Size 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4
Code No. Self Colored D50090 D50190 D40290 D50390 D50490 D50590 D50690 51790 Code No. Zinc Plated D50091 D50191 D50291 D50391 D50491 D50591 D50691 51791 Weight per 100 lbs. 3 6 10 18 26 38 78 128 Applications: As temporary repair link, use one size larger than G-30 chain with which it is to be used. Not for Lifting or Tie Down use.
CONNECTING LINKS
Size 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1
Code No.Clear Finish M613 M614 M615 M616 Code No. Electro Galv. M613G M614G M615G M616G Rated Working Load (lbs.) 800 1,300 1,900 2,650 Weight per 100 lbs. 3 8 12 20 For use on G-30 chain only. Not for Lifting or Tie Down Use.
M617 M617G 3,500 29
M618 M618G 4,500 42
M620 M620G 6,900 75
M622 M622G 9,750 116
M624 M624G 12,800 175
M626 M626G 14,000 240
REPAIR LINKS / LAP LINK

BRIGHT CODE NO. ZINC PLATED CODE NO. Size QTY. PER CARTON WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.)
653612 1/8 x 3/4 100 653180 653618 3/16 x 1 100 653211 653621 7/32 x 1-1/4 50 653251 653625 1/4 x 1-1/4 50 653253 653626 1/4 x 1-1/2 50 653255 653627 1/4 x 2 50 653281 653628 9/32 x 1-1/4 50 653312 653631 5/16 x 1-1/2 50 653315 653632 5/16 x 2 50 653373 653633 3/8 x 1-5/8 50 653375 653638 3/8 x 2 50 653506 653650 1/2 x 2-1/2 25 Applications: A temporary repair link for light applications. Not for Lifting or Tie Down use.
3-1/8 3-1/4 4-3/4 6-3/4 7-1/4 9-2/4 8-1/4 13 17 23 26 53
S HOOKS
BRIGHT CODE NO. ZINC PLATED CODE NO. NO. MATERIAL SIZE INSIDE LENGTH (IN.) WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.)
687120 687420 20 .080 27/32 5/16 687121 687421 21 .080 11/16 1/4 687140 687440 40 .134 1-1/16 1 687160 687460 60 .192 1-13/16 3-1/2 687161 687461 61 .204 1-5/8 3-7/8 687162 687462 62* .175 1-3/8 2-1/2 687172 687472 72* .225 1-1/2 4-3/4 687180 687480 80 .250 1-13/16 6-1/2 687181 687481 81 .250 2-1/2 8 687484 84* .250 1-25/32 6-1/4 687190 687490 100 .312 2-1/4 11-3/4 687192 687492 120 .375 2-3/8 19-1/2 Packed 50 pieces per carton. *See Figure 2 for these sizes only. Appliations: Used to attach accessories to chain. Light duty only. Not for Lifting or Tie Down use.
N0. 2450 SPRING HOOKS Plated formed steel N0. 2450 Diameter 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 1/2
N0. 2451 SPRING HOOKS with RINGED EYE Plated formed ste Diameter 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 1/2
Length Overall 2-1/8 2-1/2 3-1/8 4 4-3/4 5-1/2 6-3/8 Snap opening 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 Working Load Lt. 100 140 280 400 500 600 700 Wgt. per 100 4 7 15 30 43 60 80
Length Overall 2-1/8 2-1/2 3-1/8 4 4-3/4 5-1/2 6-3/8 Snap opening 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 Working Load Lt. 100 140 280 400 500 600 700 Wgt. per 100 4 7 15 30 43 60 80
N0. 2451
117
WELDED CHAIN
TWIST LINK COIL CHAIN
TWIST LINK CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET DIAMETER WIRE LINK DIMENSIONS LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING TRADE HOT FRACTIONAL DECIMAL INSIDE INSIDE PER 100 FT. LOAD LIMIT* NO. BRIGHT ZINC PLATED GALVANIZED INCHES INCHES LENGTH (IN.) WIDTH (IN.) FOOT POUNDS POUNDS
4 3 2 1/0 2/0 4/0 5/0
620709 620711 620713 620717 620719 620621 620725
620809 620811 620813 620817 620819 620821 620825
620617 620619 620621 620625
1/8 9/64 5/32 11/64 3/16 7/32 1/4
.120 .135 .148 .177 .192 .218 .250
1-3/32 1-9/64 1-9/64 1-15/64 1-15/64 1-3/8 1-15/32
15/64 15/64 17/64 19/64 21/64 11/32 3/8
11 10-1/2 10-1/2 9-3/4 9-3/4 8-3/4 8-1/8
10 13 16 24 29 36 48
195 240 295 415 495 635 835
STRAIGHT LINK COIL CHAIN

STRAIGHT LINK CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET DIAMETER WIRE LINK DIMENSIONS LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING TRADE HOT FRACTIONAL DECIMAL INSIDE INSIDE PER 100 FT. LOAD LIMIT* NO. BRIGHT ZINC PLATED GALVANIZED INCHES INCHES LENGTH (IN.) WIDTH (IN.) FOOT POUNDS POUNDS
4 3 2 1/0 2/0 4/0 5/0
620209 620211 620213 620217 620219 620221 620225
620309 620311 620313 620317 620319 620321 620325
620117 620119 620121 620125
1/8 9/64 5/32 11/64 3/16 7/32 1/4
.120 .135 .148 .177 .192 .218 .250
1-9/64 1-11/64 1-11/64 1-15/64 1-19/64 1-13/32 1-33/64
15/64 15/64 9/32 5/16 11/32 3/8 7/16
10-1/2 10-1/4 10-1/4 9-3/4 9-1/4 8-1/2 7-7/8
10 13 15 23 27 35 46
205 255 310 440 520 670 880
TWIST LINK MACHINE CHAIN

TWIST LINK CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET DIAMETER WIRE LINK DIMENSIONS LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING TRADE HOT FRACTIONAL DECIMAL INSIDE INSIDE PER 100 FT. LOAD LIMIT* NO. BRIGHT ZINC PLATED GALVANIZED INCHES INCHES LENGTH (IN.) WIDTH (IN.) FOOT POUNDS POUNDS
4 3 2 1/0 2/0 4/0 5/0
621709 621711 621713 621717 621719 621621 621725
621809 621811 621813 621817 621819 621821 621825
621617 621619 621621 621625
1/8 9/64 5/32 11/64 3/16 7/32 1/4
.120 .135 .148 .177 .192 .218 .250
33/64 9/16 37/64 11/16 23/32 55.64 1
5/32 11/64 15/64 17/64 19/64 11/32 3/8
23-1/2 21-1/2 21 17-1/2 16-1/2 14 12
13 16 20 29 34 43 57
205 255 310 440 520 670 880
STRAIGHT LINK MACHINE CHAIN

STRAIGHT LINK CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET DIAMETER WIRE LINK DIMENSIONS LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING TRADE HOT FRACTIONAL DECIMAL INSIDE INSIDE PER 100 FT. LOAD LIMIT* NO. BRIGHT ZINC PLATED GALVANIZED INCHES INCHES LENGTH (IN.) WIDTH (IN.) FOOT POUNDS POUNDS
4 3 2 1/0 2/0 4/0 5/0
621209 621211 621213 621217 621219 621221 621225
621309 621311 621313 621317 621319 621321 621325
621117 621119 621121 621125
1/8 9/64 5/32 11/64 3/16 7/32 1/4
.120 .135 .148 .177 .192 .218 .250
35/64 19/32 19/32 47/64 25/32 29/32 1-1/16
7/32 7/32 1/4 5/16 23/64 25/64 7/16
22 20 20 16-1/2 15-1/4 13-1/4 11-1/4
12 15 19 27 32 41 54
215 270 325 465 545 700 925
PASSING LINK CHAIN

TRADE NO. CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET ZINC BRIGHT PLATED SIZE MATERIAL INCHES INSIDE LENGTH INCHES INSIDE WIDTH INCHES LINKS PER FOOT WEIGHT PER 100 FT. POUNDS
2/0 4/0
623219 623221
623459 623461
3/16 7/32
7/8 7/8
15/32 15/32
13-5/8 13-5/8
33 43
*CAUTION: Working Load Limits should not be exceeded. All data approximate and subject to variation. NOTE: The grades of chain on this page are not intended for use as sling or lifting chains. For overhead lifting use CM Herc-Alloy 800 Chain Slings.
SOME TYPES AND SIZES ARE AVAILABLE VINYL COATED IN WHITE OR YELLOW
118
WELDLESS CHAIN
DOUBLE LOOP CHAIN
CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET TRADE SIZE BRIGHT ZINC PLATED HOT GALVANIZED MATERIAL DIAMETER INCHES INSIDE LENGTH INCHES LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOAD PER 100 FT. LIMIT* FOOT POUNDS POUNDS
5 4 3 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 8/0
680150 680151 680152 680153 680154 680155 680156 680157 680158 680159
680450 680451 680452 680453 680454 680455 680456 680457 680458 680459
680350 680351 680352 680353 680354 680355 680356 680357 680358 680359
.062 .072 .080 .092 .105 .120 .135 .148 .162 .225
.92 1.00 1.09 1.33 1.50 1.71 1.71 2.18 2.18 2.90
13 12 11 9 8 7 7 5.5 5.5 4.1
3-1/2 4-1/2 5-3/4 7-1/2 10 13 17 20 23 48
55 70 90 115 155 200 255 305 365 705
SINGLE LOOP CHAIN

CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET TRADE SIZE BRIGHT ZINC PLATED HOT GALVANIZED MATERIAL DIAMETER INCHES INSIDE LENGTH INCHES LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOAD PER 100 FT. LIMIT* FOOT POUNDS POUNDS
2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 5/0
681150 681151 681152 681153 681154 681155
681450 681451 681452 681453 681454 681455
681350 681351 681352 681353 681354
.092 .120 .135 .148 .162 .177
1.08 1.29 1.48 1.63 1.80 2.15
11.1 9.3 8.1 7.4 6.7 5.6
9 16 23 26 29 34
155 265 340 405 485 580
SINGLE JACK CHAIN

TRADE SIZE CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET BRASS BRIGHT ZINC PLATED (BRIGHT) MATERIAL DIAMETER INCHES INSIDE LENGTH INCHES LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOAD PER 100 FT. LIMIT* POUNDS FOOT POUNDS STEEL BRASS
18 16 14 12 10 8 6
684151 684152 684153 684154 684155 684156 684157
684451 684452 684453 684454 684455 684456 684457
684751 684752 684753 684754 684755 684756 684757
.047 .062 .080 .105 .135 .162 .192
.39 .48 .63 .75 .92 1.09 1.26
31 25 19 16 13 11 9.5
1-3/4 2-3/4 5 8-1/2 13 20 26
5 11 16 29 48 60 95
4 8 11 20 34 42 66
SASH CHAIN
TRADE SIZE CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET COPPER BRIGHT ZINC PLATED PLATED STOCK INSIDE THICKNESS LENGTH INCHES INCHES LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOAD PER 100 FT. LIMIT* FOOT POUNDS POUNDS
8 25 30 35 40 45 50
683151 683152 683153 683154 683156 683157 683158
683451 683452 683453 683454 683456 683457 683458
683551 683552 683553 683554 683556 683557 683558
.035 .042 .028 .035 .042 .050 .062
.57 .57 .57 .57 .55 .55 .62
21 21 21 21 22 22 19.5
4 5 5-1/2 7 8 9-1/2 13
75 95 80 105 150 175 225
THEATRICAL HANGING CHAIN SAFETY CHAIN

TRADE SIZE LINKS WEIGHT PER CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 STOCK FEET STOCK INSIDE LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOAD WORKING LOAD THICKNESS INSIDE INSIDE PER PER 100 100 FT. FT. LIMIT* THICKNESS LENGTH LIMIT* CODE INCHES LENGTH WIDTH FOOT FOOT POUNDS POUNDS BRIGHT # INCHES INCHES POUNDS POUNDS 033-6014 685754 685755 685756 .28 1.50 .018 .47
2/0 1/0 1
.023 .028
.44 8 27 .50 24 .60 20
63 2
1100 23
2-1/4 3
35 45
*CAUTION: Working Load Limits should not be exceeded. All data approximate and subject to variation. NOTE: The grades of chain on this page are not intended for use as sling or lifting chains. For overhead lifting use CM Herc-Alloy 800 Chain Slings.
SOME TYPES AND SIZES ARE AVAILABLE VINYL COATED IN WHITE OR YELLOW
119
BINDER CHAINS
CUSTOM MADE IN OUR SHOP
USE: U.S. Federal DOT regulations require the aggregate breaking strength (minimum ultimate strength) of the tiedown assemblies used to secure an article against movement in any direction to be at least 1-1/2 (1.5) times the weight of that article. Commercial Vehicle Safety Alliance (CVSA) guidelines state the aggregate static working load limit (WLL) of the tiedown assemblies used to secure an article against movement in any direction must be equal to at least 1/2 (.5) times the weight of that article. The information presented in Table VI is provided to assist in the proper application of binder chain assemblies.
STOCK SIZES SPECIAL LOW PRICE

CODE NO. DESCRIPTION RATED WORKING LOAD (LBS.)
BC751620 BC738020
5/16 x 20 feet G-70 3/8 x 20 feet G-70
4,700 6,600
TABLE VI MINIMUM NUMBER OF CHAINS REQUIRED TO SECURE AN ARTICLE AGAINST MOVEMENT IN ANY DIRECTION
WEIGHT OF ARTICLE LBS. 5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000 50,000
Binding G70 Alloy G80
1/4 5/16 3/8 3/8
1 1 1 1
2 2 1 1
3 2 2 2
4 3 2 2
4 3 2 2
5 4 3 3
6 4 3 3
7 5 4 3
8 5 4 4
8 6 4 4
*Commercial vehicle safety alliance (CVSA) Guidelines state the aggregate static working load limit (W.L.L.) of the tiedown assemblies used to secure an article against movement in any direction must be equal to at least 1/2 (.5) times the weight of the article. U.S. D.O.T. requires the aggregate breaking strength (Minimum Ultimate Strength) of the Tie Down Assemblies used to secure an article against movement in any direction be at least 11/2 (1.5) times the weight of that article. The data presented also complies with D.O.T. requirements.
120
CHAIN LOAD BINDERS

STANDARD LEVEL TYPE BINDER
Forged steel. Quenched and Tempered. Hooks are quenched and tempered alloy steel. Extra heavy construction at leverage point to prevent spreading. Heel of binder toggles away from load, permitting easy release. Ball and socket swivel joints at hook assemblies permit a straight line pull. L-150 available with links only; also snubbing type, releasing type and walking type binders.
CODE NO. MIN.-MAX. CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) TAKE UP INCHES WEIGHT EACH
DL140 DL380 DL120 DL580
3/16 - 1/4 5/16 - 3/8 3/8 - 1/2 1/2 - 5/8
2600 5400 9200 13,000
3 4.5 4.5 4.75
2.5 7.0 11.2 19.2
STANDARD RATCHET TYPE BINDER

Continuous take-up feature, infinite adjustment, gets the last half link of chain. One piece assembly, no bolts and nuts to loosen. Ratchet spring rust proofed. All load bearing or holding parts forged. Hooks are quenched and tempered alloy steel. Easy operating positive ratchet. Available without links and hooks.
CODE NO. MIN.-MAX. CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) TAKE UP INCHES WEIGHT EACH
DR140 3/16 - 1/4 2600 8 DR380 5/16 - 3/8 6600 8 DR120 3/8 - 1/2 9200 8 DR580 1/2 - 5/8 13,000 8 NOTE: Special Ratchets up to 2 diameter and 165,000 lb. breaking strength available.
3.5 11.0 13.7 14.6
NOTE: Other Size and Styles Binders Available.
WARNING
Failure to use this load binder properly may result in serious injury or even death to you or others. Do not operate load binder while standing on the load. Move handle with caution. It may whip Keep body clear. Keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle. You must be familiar with state and federal regulations regarding size and number of chain systems required for securing loads on trucks Always consider the safety of nearby workers as well as yourself when using load binder. While under tension, load binder must not bear against an object, as this will cause side load. Do not throw these instructions away. Keep them close at hand and share them with any others who use this load binder.
INSTRUCTIONS - LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDERS

Hook load binder to chain so you can operate it while standing on the ground. Position load binder so its handle can be pulled downward to tighten chain. Be aware of ice, snow, rain, oil, etc. that can affect your footing. Make certain your footing is secure. The Crosby Group, Inc. specifically recommends AGAINST the use of a handle extender (cheater pipe). If sufficient leverage cannot be obtained using the lever type load binder by itself, a ratchet type binder should be used. If the above recommendation is disregarded and a cheater pipe is used, it must closely fit the handle and must slide down the handle until the handle projections are contacted. The pipe should be secured to the handle, for example, by a pin, so that the pipe cannot fly off the handle if you lose control and let go. The increased leverage, by using a cheater pipe, can cause deformation and failure of the chain and load binder. During and after tightening chain, check load binder handle position. Be sure it is in the locked position and that its bottom side touches the chain link. Chain tension may decrease due to load shifting during transport. To be sure the load binder remains in proper position: Secure handle to chain by wrapping the loose end of chain around the handle and the tight chain, or tie handle to chain with soft wire. When releasing load binder, remember that is a great deal of energy in the stretched chain. This will cause the load binder handle to move very quickly with great force when it is unlatched. Move handle with caution. It may whipkeep body clear. Never use a cheater pipe or handle extender to release handle. Use a steel bar and pry under the handle and stay out of the path of handle as it moves upward. If you release the handle by hand, use an open hand under the handle and push upward. Do not close your hand around the handle. Always keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle.
INSTRUCTIONS - RATCHET TYPE LOAD BINDERS

Position ratchet binder so it can be operated from the ground. Make sure your footing is secure.
MAINTENANCE OF ALL LOAD BINDERS

Routinely check load binders for wear, bending, cracks, nicks, or gouges. If bending or cracks are presentdo not use load binder. Routinely lubricate pivot and swivel points of Lever Binders, and pawl part and screw threads of Ratchet Binders to extend product life and reduce friction wear.
121
FLATBED PRODUCTS
STANDARD WINCH STRAPS
222720 27 and 223020 30 2 Webbing with 1015 Flat Hook, Code 20. Webbing Part No. 2004. Webbing Breaking Strength 12,000 lbs. Assembly Breaking Strength 10,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 3,335 lbs.
422721 27 and 423021 30 4 Webbing with 1021 Flat Hook, Code 21. Webbing Part No. 4000. Webbing Breaking Strength 20,000 lbs. Assembly Breaking Strength 15,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 5,000 lbs. 422730 27 and 423030 30 4 Webbing with Sewn Loop, Code 30. Webbing Part No. 4000. Webbing Breaking Strength 20,000 lbs. Assembly Breaking Strength 15,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 5,000 lbs. 422710 27 and 423010 30 4 Webbing with 1026 Delta Ring, Code 10. Webbing Part No. 4000. Webbing Breaking Strength 20,000 lbs. Assembly Breaking Strength 16,200 lbs. Working Load Limit 5,400 lbs.
See Page 124 for other end Fittings. WINCH BARS

37030 STANDARD BAR (PAINTED)
10032 COMBINATION BAR (PAINTED)
SLIDING WINCH TRACK

3606 STEEL 3607 ALUMINUM
WELD-ON WEBBING WINCHES

1820 STANDARD 7820 LOW PROFILE
SLIDING WEBBING WINCHES

3820 STANDARD 5820 STORABLE
PORTABLE WEBBING WINCHES

1820P STANDARD 1820P2 STANDARD
122
WEB TIE DOWNS

HAND RATCHET TYPE TIE DOWN STRAPS
2 LONG WIDE HANDLE 804 WITH 2004 WEBBING

10,000 lb. Breaking Strength.
CODE NO. STRAP LENGTH END HARDWARE WORKING LOAD LIMIT
512720 513020 512739 513039 512784 513084
27 ft. 30 ft. 27 ft. 30 ft. 27 ft. 30 ft.
1015 Flat Hook 1015 Flat Hook 3705 Chain Anchor 3705 Chain Anchor 1006 Wire Hook 1006 Wire Hook
3,335 lbs. 3,335 lbs. 3,335 lbs. 3,335 lbs. 3,335 lbs. 3,335 lbs.

552721 553021 552740 553040 552750 553050
27 ft. 30 ft. 27 ft. 30 ft. 27 ft. 30 ft.
1020 Flat Hook 1021 Flat Hook 3705 Chain Anchor 3705 Chain Anchor 3704 Grab Hook 3704 Grab Hook

592710 593010 592721 593021 592736 593036
27 ft. 30 ft. 27 ft. 30 ft. 27 ft. 30 ft.
1026 V Ring 1026 V Ring 1021 Flat Hook 1021 Flat Hook 1016 Wire Hook 1016 Wire Hook
Webbing straps must be protected when used on rough or sharp objects. Straps that are cut, worn or damaged shall not be used and shall be replaced immediately. All strap assemblies shall be inspected prior to each use. The use of "cheater bars" or other means of increasing leverage on a ratchet bucket handle or winch, other than a Kinedyne approved device, can cause serious injury to the user and/or bystanders.
WARNING
123
HAND RATCHET END FITTINGS

1015 2 FLAT HOOK
Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4,535 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1,513 kgs. Weight: .73 lbs./.33 kgs.
1023 2 DELTA FLAT RING

1021 4 FLAT HOOK

Breaking Strength: 15,000 lbs./6,803 kgs. Working Load Limit: 5,000 lbs./2,268 kgs. Weight: 1.06 lbs./.48 kgs.
1026 4 DELTA RING 1209 2 SNAP HOOK

Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4,535 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1,513 kgs. Weight: .61 lbs./.28 kgs. Breaking Strength: 20,000 lbs./9,070 kgs. Working Load Limit: 6,670 lbs./3,025 kgs. Weight: 1.36 lbs./0.62 kgs.
1212 2 TWISTED SNAP HOOK

3704 3/8 GRAB HOOK ASSEMBLY

Breaking Strength: 16,200 lbs./7,347 kgs. Working Load Limit: 5,400 lbs./2,449 kgs. Weight: 1.22 lbs./0.55 kgs.
FE7900-1 2 SNAP HOOK

Breaking Strength: 6,000 lbs./2,721 kgs. Working Load Limit: 2,000 lbs./907 kgs. Weight: .41 lbs./.19 kgs.
1006 2 NARROW HOOK

Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4,535 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1,513 kgs. Weight: .58 lbs./.26 kgs. Note: 3" -4" Available #1016 WLL 7333 lbs
3705 18 CHAIN ANCHOR

Breaking Strength: 16,200 lbs./7,347 kgs. Working Load Limit: 5,400 lbs./2,449 kgs. Weight: 2.89 lbs./1.31 kgs.
FLATBED ACCESSORY ITEMS 37025

Plastic (2 - 4) Corner Protectors
10094
Strap Winder
124
INTERIOR VAN PRODUCTS

STANDARD LOGISTIC STRAPS
651201 12 2 Webbing with FE8306-1 Spring Fitting, Code 01. Cam Buckle 43010, Webbing 4900, Track Type Series E,A. Assembly Breaking Strength 2,500 lbs. Working Load Limit 835 lbs. 651601 16 2 Webbing with FE8306-1 Spring Fitting, Code 01. Cam Buckle 43010, Webbing 4900, Track Type Series E,A. Assembly Breaking Strength 2,500 lbs. Working Load Limit 835 lbs. 641201 12 2 Webbing with FE8306-1 Spring Fitting, Code 01. Ratchet Buckle 811, Webbing 4900, Track Type Series E,A. Assembly Breaking Strength 3,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 1,000 lbs. 641601 16 2 Webbing with FE8306-1 Spring Fitting, Code 01. Ratchet Buckle 811, Webbing 4900, Track Type Series E,A. Assembly Breaking Strength 3,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 1,000 lbs. 841211 12, 831611 16 and 832011 20 1-3/4 Webbing with FE8029-1 Spring Fitting, Code 11. Overcenter Buckle FE7707-1, Webbing FE102G, Track Type Series E,A. Assembly Breaking Strength 4,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 1,335 lbs.
LOGISTIC TRACK
43002 SERIES E TRACK HORIZONTAL High strength steel, 12 gauge. 50,000 psi minimum yield. Iron phosphate, green primer finish. Weight: 16.6 lbs./7.5 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m. 2007 SERIES A TRACK HORIZONTAL High strength steel, 12 gauge. 50,000 psi minimum yield. Iron phosphate, green primer finish.Weight: 16.6 lbs./7.5 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m. FE725-01 ALUMINUM SERIES A TRACK HORIZONTAL Aluminum. 37,000 psi minimum yield. Natural finish. Weight: 8.3 lbs./3.8 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m.
2005 SERIES F TRACK HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL High strength steel, 15 gauge. Galvanized finish. Weight: 6.9 lbs./3.1 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m. 2019 SERIES E TRACK VERTICAL High strength steel, 11 gauge. 50,000 psi minimum yield. Iron phosphate, green primer finish. Weight: 11.6 lbs./5.3 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m.
FE720-01 SERIES A TRACK VERTICAL High strength steel, 11 gauge. 50,000 psi minimum yield. Iron phosphate, green primer finish. Weight: 13.2 lbs./6.0 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m.
All ratings for Series E or A fittings are based on using 43002 or FE702-01 track. Rating may be reduced when fittings are used in other tracks.
WARNING
OTHER LOGISTIC STRAP HARDWARE
1831 F-Track
1005 Wire Hook
660002 Rope Tie Off
FE8264-1 Series E/A Fitting with 1 Round Ring. 6000 lbs. Breaking Strength. 2000 lbs. WLL.
FE8029-1 Series E/A Spring Loaded Fitting. 4500 lbs. Breaking Strength. 1500 lbs. WLL
125
INTERIOR VAN PRODUCTS

BARS AND BEAMS
SAF-T-BAR II FE8040-60 Aluminum Tube: adjusts from 87.25 to 104.25. Weight: 10.2 lbs./4.9 kgs. FE8040-90 Steel Tube: adjusts from 87.25 to 104.25. Weight: 12.1 lbs./5.5 kgs.
SERIES E/A ALUMINUM DECKING/SHORING BEAM FE8066-1 adjusts from 85 to 94.7. Weight: 20.5 lbs./9.3 kgs. FE8066-3 adjusts from 90.2 to 100. Weight: 21.0 lbs./9.5 kgs.
HEAVY DUTY SERIES E/A ALUMINUM DECKING/SHORING BEAM FE8000-1 adjusts from 85 to 94.7. Weight: 23.5 lbs./10.6 kgs. FE8000-12 adjusts from 90.2 to 100. Weight: 24 lbs./10.8 kgs.
STRAP-ALL ONE-INCH STRAPS

Kinedyne offers a full line of one-inch ratchet and utility straps.These versatile tie-downs can be used on pick-up trucks, utility trailers, car top racks, boat trailers or anywhere a strong secure tie-down is needed. All one-inch straps are easy to use and have the same quality and durability features of Kinedyne's heavy duty tie-downs used on flatbed and van trailers. Offered bulk packed or individually packed in vinyl display bag with Strap-All brand header card.
RATCHET STRAP WITH 800 RATCHET, WIRE HOOKS AND D RINGS

711681 16 length. Breaking Strength: 2,500 Ibs./1,134 kgs., Working Load Limit: 835 Ibs./379 kgs.
RATCHET STRAP WITH 800 RATCHET AND S HOOKS

711587 15 length. Breaking Strength: 1,200 Ibs./544 kgs., Working Load Limit: 400 Ibs./181 kgs.
126
GENERAL INFORMATION
Breaking strengths shown in this catalog are based on the minimum load a component or assembly will withstand before failing. WORKING LOAD LIMITS SHOWN IN THIS CATALOG ARE RATED AT ONE-THIRD OF THE MINIMUM BREAKING STRENGTH. Unless otherwise specified all ratings are based on a straight tensile pull. Load directions other than straight can result in a significant reduction in breaking strength. The ratings shown in this catalog are contingent upon using Kinedyne track, beams, webbing or hardware as a system. The weakest link (sew patterns, webbing, hardware, etc.) determines the minimum breaking strength rating of the strap assembly or tie-down system. Tie-downs must be attached to securing points of equal or greater strength for break-strength rating to be maintained. NOTE: All straps shown in this catalog are intended to be used as cargo securing devices. No straps are to be used for lifting purposes. All ratings are for products in new condition. Age, wear or damage to any tie-down system can greatly reduce its rating. All products should be inspected on a regular basis. CAUTION: Webbing straps must be protected when used on rough or sharp objects. All worn, deformed or damaged products should immediately be removed from service and replaced. All Kinedyne products should be used in accordance with local, state, federal, and industry regulations. IT IS THE OWNER'S AND/OR USER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO EVALUATE THE SUITABILITY OF ANY CARGO SECURING PRODUCT FOR THEIR PARTICULAR APPLICATION. Failure to comply with recommended usage guidelines may result in personal injury or cargo damage.
Winches & Winch/Combination Bars
WARNINGS
WARNING: When tightening or loosening winches, always maintain a firm grip on the winch bar. Never release a winch bar without checking the pawl to ensure that it is fully engaged between ratchet teeth. Releasing a winch bar without the pawl being properly engaged can cause serious injury to the user or bystanders. The use of a slip resistant handle winch bar, specifically designed to tighten or loosen winches, is recommended. Kinedyne winch bars (page 118) shall be used to tension and release tie-down assemblies. "Cheater Bars" ("extenders") shall not be used with the winch bars. Users shall stand clear of the winch bar handle during operation of the winch bar in case the winch bar slips. The tip of the winch bar shall be inserted through both holes in the end cap to prevent the winch bar from "slipping out" and overloading the tip and/or end cap. Winches shall not be loaded in excess of their working load limit. Winches shall not be used as pulling or lifting devices. A minimum of 12" of Webbing shall be inserted through the slot, and a minimum of two (2) wraps shall be on the winch mandrel. CAUTION: Excessive wraps of webbing on the mandrel will reduce the working load limit of the winch. PORTABLE WINCH WARNING: Set screws on portable winches are designed to position the winch while the tie-down assembly is being tightened. They shall only be snug tight. Overtightening of screws may cause the bracket to bend, weakening the winch and causing it to fail. Portable winches shall be removed and stored when not in use.
Logistic Track Series E, A and Kaptive Beams Series F Shoring Bars
WARNING: Welding galvanized material may form toxic fumes. Welding shall be done with adequate ventilation. WARNING: Do not overload beams or create a top-heavy, unstable trailer.
WARNING: When Series F bars are used in the vertical position, the spring end of the bar must be up to avoid bouncing out of the rack. Shoring bars shall not be used in decking applications, unless otherwise specified. WARNING: Cargo bars are not intended for the use with cargo on wheels. Overtensioning of ratchet mechanism may cause damage to trailer sidewalls. NOTE: Cargo bars do not have load ratings due to varying conditions of trailer sidewalls. WARNING: The use of cheater bars or other means of increasing the leverage on a ratchet bucket handle, other than a Kinedyne approved device, can cause serious injury to the user and/or bystanders.
Cargo Bars
Ratchet Buckles
127
3-STRAND FIBER ROPE

NYLON ROPE
These ropes are the strongest ropes manufactured. Size for size, they are over twice as strong as Manila. Nylon ropes are extremely elastic, in fact, their working elasticity is almost four times as much as Manila and Dacron and about twice that of monofilament Polypropylene.This provides excellent energy absorption. However, Nylon is not recommended where elasticity is a problem. Being rot and mildew resistant, these ropes can be stored wet. This rope is white and is available in a full range of sizes. Stock color is white.
CODE NO. DIAMETER LINEAR DENSITY (LBS./100 FT.) STD. REEL MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH (LBS.)
N3166 3/16 1.00 600 N1406 1/4 1.50 600 N5166 5/16 2.50 600 N3806 3/8 3.50 600 N7166 7/16 5.00 600 N1206 1/2 6.50 600 N9166 9/16 8.15 600 N5806 5/8 10.5 600 N3406 3/4 14.5 600 N7806 7/8 20.0 600 N1006 1 26.4 600 N1146 1-1/4 40.0 600 N1126 1-1/2 55.0 600 N1346 1-3/4 83.0 600 N2006 2 95.0 600 N2126 2-1/2 149. 600 N3006 3 210. 600 1200 ft. and longer lengths available. See Page 128 for working load information.
900 1,490 2,300 3,340 4,500 5,750 7,200 9,350 12,800 18,000 22,600 33,800 47,800 70,000 83,000 126,000 180,000
POLYESTER ROPE
Recommended wherever minimum stretch, high strength and durability are required. Polyester Rope is manufactured from 100 percent polyester fibers. These ropes have strengths more than twice those of Manila. Their working elasticity and stretch characteristics are less than those of Nylon and about one-half those of monofilament Polypropylene. As with all synthetics, Polyester is resistant to rot and organisms and is available in all sizes. Stock color is white.
PE3166 3/16 1.20 600 PE1406 1/4 2.00 600 PE5166 5/16 3.10 600 PE3806 3/8 4.50 600 PE7166 7/16 6.20 600 PE1206 1/2 8.00 600 PE9166 9/16 10.2 600 PE5806 5/8 13.0 600 PE3406 3/4 17.5 600 PE7806 7/8 25.0 600 PE1006 1 30.4 600 PE1146 1-1/4 46.2 600 PE1126 1-1/2 67.0 600 PE1346 1-3/4 98.0 600 PE2006 2 118. 600 PE2126 2-1/2 181. 600 PE3006 3 258. 600 1200 ft. and longer lengths available. See Page 128 for working load information.
900 1490 2300 3340 4500 5750 7200 9000 11,300 16,200 19,800 29,800 42,200 61,000 72,000 110,000 157,000
POLY-DAC
The most well known combination rope in the world. POLY-DAC with its two red tracers combines the best properties of synthetic fibers, as the cover yarns of each strand are hi-tenacity polyester wrapped over polyolefin giving good abrasion resistance and strength. The core yarns are polyolefin for economy and light weight. Stock color is white.
PD1206 1/2 6.7 600 PD5806 5/8 9.2 600 PD3406 3/4 12.5 600 1200 ft. and longer lengths available. See Page 128 for working load information.
5400 7200 9800
128
3-STRAND FIBER ROPE & SOLID BRAIDED NYLON ROPE

POLYPROPYLENE ROPE
This monofilament line is the most widely used of the synthetics today. It is by far the most economical. Polypropylene incorporates many of the advantageous qualities of all other synthetics and natural fiber ropes. It possesses excellent strength characteristics, remarkable durability and handling ease. However, it is not recommended for use on bitts and capstans where heat is a factor because it will tend to stick and fuse. This rope has outstanding chemical resistance and dielectric properties. Its working elasticity lies between Nylon and Manila. It will not rot, mildew or shrink and it floats. Polypropylene is available in a full range of sizes. Stock rope is yellow in color.
PP3166 3/16 .70 600 PP1406 1/4 1.20 600 PP5166 5/16 1.80 600 PP3806 3/8 2.80 600 PP7166 7/16 3.80 600 PP1206 1/2 4.70 600 PP9166 9/16 6.10 600 PP5806 5/8 7.50 600 PP3406 3/4 10.7 600 PP7806 7/8 15.0 600 PP1006 1 18.0 600 PP1146 1-1/4 27.0 600 PP1126 1-1/2 38.4 600 PP1346 1-3/4 59.0 600 PP2006 2 69.0 600 PP2126 2-1/2 107. 600 PP3006 3 153. 600 1200 ft. and longer lengths available. See Page 128 for working load information.
720 1,130 1,710 2,440 3,160 3,780 4,600 5,600 7,650 10,400 12,600 18,900 26,800 38,800 46,800 72,000 103,000
MANILA ROPE
Our Manila Rope isis a superior product. It meets Federal Specification T-R-605b, amendment 3, for tensile and weight Manila Rope a superior product. It meets Federal Specification T-R-605b, amendment 3, for tensile requirements. It is specially lubricated lubricated to give longlife. Manila Rope is Rope is durable, and flexible.flexible. It is engiand weight requirements. It is specially to give long service service life. Manila durable, strong strong and It is engineered to meetto meet the exacting requirements of marine and fishing usage. Manila is extremely popular inindustrial and agricultural neered the exacting requirements of marine and fishing usage. Manila is extremely popular in the the industrial and agriculfields. It is It is alsoexcellent all-purpose rope. tural fields. also an an excellent all-purpose rope.
CODE NO. DIAMETER LINEAR DENSITY (LBS./100 FT.) STD. COIL MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH (LBS.)
M14012 1/4 2.00 1250 M5166 5/16 2.90 600 M3806 3/8 4.10 600 M7166 7/16 5.25 600 M1206 1/2 7.50 600 M9166 9/16 10.4 600 M5806 5/8 13.3 600 M3406 3/4 16.7 600 M7806 7/8 22.4 600 M1006 1 27.0 600 M1146 1-1/4 41.6 600 M1126 1-1/2 60.0 600 M1346 1-3/4 89.5 600 M2006 2 108. 600 M2126 2-1/2 167. 600 M3006 3 242. 600 1200 ft. and longer lengths available. See Page 128 for working load information.
540 900 1,220 1,580 2,380 3,100 3,960 4,860 6,950 8,100 12,200 16,700 23,800 28,000 41,800 57,500
WHITE SOLID BRAIDED NYLON ROPE

An extremely strong, soft, lightweight cord with excellent resistance to rot, abrasion, mildew, petroleum products and many chemicals, and with shock-absorbing elasticity that allows it to withstand great strain. Solid braided construction. stays round and works well in pulleys. Natural silvery white color. Working loads are derived by taking 15-20% of approx. avg. new rope tensile strength.
CODE NO. SIZE NO. DIA. (IN.) REC. WORK LOAD (LBS.) UNIT WT. (LBS.)
SB18010 4 1/8 SB31610 6 3/16 SB14010 8 1/4 SB3805 12 3/8 SB1205 16 1/2 NOTE: Other spool lengths are available
69 135 169 450 714
1000 FT. SPOOL 1000 FT. SPOOL 1000 FT. SPOOL 500 FT. SPOOL 500 FT. SPOOL
5 12 17 19 16
129
DOUBLE BRAIDED ROPES

Double braids are actually two ropes in one. The jacket is braided over a braided core. Braid on Braids are very flexible and have a high strength to weight ratio. The jacket also serves to protect the core. Braid on braids remain round and firm and will not rotate under load. They are spliceable. Sizes from 1/4 to 1-5/8 diameter.
POLYESTER DOUBLE BRAID

is constructed of a polyester cover and core. This braid provides high strength with low stretch and excellent abrasion resistance. Applications: mooring lines, stringing lines, winch lines, underground pulling lines, guy lines, slings, bull ropes.
CODE NO. DIA. CIRCUM. WEIGHT AV.TENSILE LBS./100 FT. STRENGTH CODE NO. DIA. CIRCUM. WEIGHT AV.TENSILE LBS./100 FT. STRENGTH
PB140 PB516 PB380 PB716 PB120 PB916 PB580 PB340
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4
3/4 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4
2.5 3.6 5.0 6.4 8.9 11.6 14.2 18.0
2,800 4,200 5,550 7,400 9,900 12,600 15,600 19,600
PB780 7/8 2-3/4 27.0 29,000 PB100 1 3 36.8 37,500 PB118 1-1/8 3-1/2 45.0 46,000 PB114 1-1/4 3-3/4 54.0 54,500 PB1516 1-5/16 4 61.0 61,500 PB112 1-1/2 4-1/2 73.0 71,500 PB158 1-5/8 5 86.0 87,200 600 ft. standard reel. See Page 128 for working load information.
NYLON DOUBLE BRAID

is constructed of a nylon cover and core. This braid provides high strength as well as excellent shock absorbing elasticity. Applications: mooring lines, towing lines, anchor lines.
NB140 NB516 NB380 NB716 NB120 NB916 NB580 NB340
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4
3/4 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4
1.7 2.6 3.7 5.0 6.4 8.4 12.0 16.0
2,330 3,400 4,800 6,600 8,300 11,800 14,700 20,000
NB780 7/8 2-3/4 21.8 27,400 NB100 1 3 26.0 33,000 NB118 1-1/8 3-1/2 35.8 44,000 NB114 1-1/4 3-3/4 41.0 50,600 NB1516 1-5/16 4 46.8 57,400 NB112 1-1/2 4-1/2 59.8 72,000 NB158 1-5/8 5 74.0 88,200 600 ft. standard reel. See Page 128 for working load information.
POLYESTER/NYLON DOUBLE BRAID

is constructed of a polyester cover and a nylon core. Due to balanced load distribution this combination provides higher strengths than our standard double braid ropes. Applications: mooring lines, stringing lines, winch lines, purse lines, hoisting lines.
PN140 PN516 PN380 PN716 PN120 PN916 PN580 PN340
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4
3/4 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4
2.3 3.4 4.7 6.1 7.8 10.4 12.8 17.6
2,950 4,300 5,660 7,400 10,500 13,100 16,300 23,500
PN780 7/8 2-3/4 23.5 30,800 PN100 1 3 31.5 40,600 PN118 1-1/8 3-1/2 39.0 49,900 PN114 1-1/4 3-3/4 47.0 59,100 PN1516 1-5/16 4 57.5 73,500 PN112 1-1/2 4-1/2 68.5 87,000 PN158 1-5/8 5 80.0 99,200 600 ft. standard reel. See Page 128 for working load information.
TRICK LINE (BLACK THEATRICAL ROPE)

Black cotton jacked rope used in stage rigging.
CODE NO. SIZE BREAKING STRENGTH SPOOL LENGTH WT./100 LBS.
TR1806 TR18025 TR18030
1/8 1/8 1/8
99 lbs. 99 lbs. 99 lbs.
600 2500 3000
.3 .3 .3
OTHER STYLES, SIZES, COLORS AND PUT UPS AVAILABLE

130
ROPE AND FIBER COMPARISON GUIDES

ROPE CONSTRUCTION SELECTION GUIDE
WARNING: This guide is designed for general reference only. The construction comparisons assume using the same rope fiber and size. Expert advice should be sought when choosing a rope where protection of life or property is involved.
CHARACTERISTICS SOLID BRAID HOLLOW BRAID DOUBLE BRAID MAYPOLE BRAID/ DIAMOND TWISTED
Number of Strands or Carriers Spliceable Strength to Weight Flexibility Flattens Under Load Rotates Under Load Mechanical Elongation Cost Per Size Working Load (a % of Tensile) Abrasion Resistant Best - 1 Worst - 5
9, 12 or 16 No 5 3 No No 1 2 15-20% 1
8, 12 or 16 Yes 2 1 Yes No 4 4 15-20% 5
16, 24 or 32 Yes 1 2 No No 5 1 15-20% 2
8 or 16 No 4 4 Yes No 3 3 15-20% 3
3 Yes 3 5 No Yes 2 5 8-15% 4
CORDAGE FIBER PROPERTIESTYPICAL VALUES

MANIL SISAL COTTON NYLON POLYESTER POLYPROPYLENE POLYETHYLENE KEVLAR1 SPECTRA2
STRENGTH Breaking Tenacity - Dry (Grams/Denier) Wet Strength vs. Dry Strength Shock-Load Absorption Ability WEIGHT Specific Gravity Floats ELONGATION Percent at Break Creep (Extension Under Sustained Load) EFFECTS OF MOISTURE Water Absorp. of Individual Fibers Dielectric Properties DEGRADATION Resistance to UV in Sunlight Resistance to Rot and Mildew Storage Requirements ROPE ABRASION RESISTANCE Surface Internal THERMAL PROPERTIES3 Melts at
5.0 - 6.0 Up to 120% Poor 1.38 No 10 - 12% Very Low Up to 100% Very Poor Good Poor Dry Only Good Fair
4.0 - 5.0 Up to 120% Poor 1.38 No 10 - 12% Very Low Up to 100% Very Poor Good Poor Dry Only Fair Fair
2 - 3.0 Up to 120% Very Poor 1.54 No 5 - 12% Up to 100% Very Poor Good Poor Dry Only Poor Fair
7.8 - 10.4 85 - 90% Excellent 1.14 No 20 - 34% Moderate 2 - 8% Poor Good Excellent Wet or Dry Very Good Excellent
7.0 - 9.5 100% Very Good 1.38 No 12 - 15% Low
6.5 100% Very Good 0.91 Yes 15 - 25% High
6.0 100% Fair 0.95 Yes 15 - 25% High None Excellent
18 - 26.5 95% Poor 1.44 No 1.5 - 3.6% Very Low 3.5 - 7.0% Poor Fair Excellent Wet or Dry Fair Fair 800 Begins to Decompose Fair Fair Very Good
30.0 100% Fair 0.97 Yes 3.5% Moderate None Excellent Fair Excellent Wet or Dry Very Good Excellent 297
Less than 1% None Good Excellent Excellent Excellent Wet or Dry Excellent Excellent 490 - 500
Poor Fair Black Best Black Best Excellent Excellent Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Good Good 330 Good Good 275
Does Not Melt Does Not Melt Does Not Melt 420 - 480 Chars at 350 Chars at 350 Chars at 300 Fair Very Good Very Good
RESISTANCE Resistance to Acids Poor Poor Poor Resistance to Alkalis Poor Poor Fair Resistance to Oils and Gas Poor Fair Poor 1 Based on Dupont Kevlar Data 2 Based on Allied/Signal Spectra Data, Type 900 3 Resistance is relative to the length of exposure, percent of concentration and temperature.
Good Fair Very Good
Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Very Good Very Good
Excellent Excellent Very Good
131
ROPE SPECIFICATIONS
(*RWL) RECOMMENDED WORKING LOADS
Recommended working loads should be exceeded only with expert knowledge of conditions and professional estimates of risks. If the rope has not been subjected to dynamic loading or other excessive use and has been inspected and found to be in good working condition, it can be used in the following recommended manner. The recommended working loads for twisted rope are derived by taking 8-11% of new rope tensile strength for nylon and 1~14% for other twisted ropes in this catalog. The recommended working loads for braided rope are 15-20% of new rope tensile strength. The percentages vary according to rope size and type.
USE OF RECOMMENDED WORKING LOADS

Because of the wide range of rope use rope conditions, exposure to several factors affecting rope behavior, and the degree of risk to life and property involved, it is impossible to make blanket recommendations as to working loads. However, to provide guidelines, recommended working loads are tabulated for rope in good condition with appropriate splices, in non-critical applications and under normal service conditions.
NEW ROPE TENSILE STRENGTHS

New rope tensile strengths are based on tests of new and unused rope of standard construction in accordance with Cordage institute Standard Test Methods. All figures are "Average" The minimum is 10% below stated amount.
CAUTION
"Never allow anyone to stand in line with or within 45 on either side of a rope under tension. Should the rope fail or other parts of the assembly fail, the recoil force could cause serious injury or damage, especially if the rope is nylon. FAILURE OF A TENSIONED ROPE AND/OR CONNECTIONS IS A SERIOUS HAZARD. SUDDEN LOSS RELEASE FROM A TENSIONED ROPE CAUSES SNAPBACK, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. Recoiling rope may oscillate violently in an unpredictable path,away from the failure point hitting anything in its way with great impact. Personnel in the path of the recoiling rope may be seriously hurt or even killed. Rope and its connecting hardware must be selected with sufficient safety factors for the specific dynamic use conditions, and the rope and/or connector must be inspected before each use and replace if worn, frayed or cut.
PROPER USE AND CARE OF CORDAGE

AVOID OVERLOADING
Working loads should be exceeded only with expert knowledge of conditions and professional estimates of risk. Working loads should be reduced where life, limb or valuable property are involved; or for exceptional service conditions such as shock loads, sustained loads, etc.
AVOID ABRASION
Outer and inner rope fibers contribute equally to the strength of your rope. When worn, your rope is naturally weakened. Where it is necessary for a rope to rub over an object, protect it with chafing gear, such as canvas wrapped and tied around the rope.
AVOID SUDDEN STRAIN

Rope that is strong enough under a steady strain can be broken with a sudden jerk. Care when working with rope is extremely important.
AVOID KINKS
When rope is repeatedly turned or twisted in one direction, it is certain that kinks will develop, unless twists are repeatedly thrown in, or out of rope. Pulling a kink through a restricted space such as a tackle block will seriously damage the rope fibers.
AVOID SHARP ANGLES

Sharp bends greatly affect the strength of a rope. Any sharp angle is a weak spot. Pad it for safety, and even then, Be Careful.
REVERSE ENDS
Prolonged use, or wear, of one part of a rope will naturally decrease its effectiveness at that point. Occasionally reverse your rope, end-for-end, to distribute the wear more evenly. A good example is an anchor line aboard a boat.
BRAIDED AND TWISTED ROPE SPLICING AVAILABLE IN OUR SHOP

132
AVOID CHEMICALS
Virtually all synthetic fiber ropes are resistant to damage from oil, gasoline, paint and most chemicals.To be on the safe side, however, keep your rope free of any type chemical. Natural fiber ropes are, of course, severely damaged by exposure to chemicals
KEEP ROPE CLEAN

Dirt on the surface and imbedded in rope acts as an abrasive on fibers. When rope becomes dirty, wash it thoroughly with clean water. Be sure to dry natural fiber ropes before storing.
AVOID IMPROPER STORAGE

Synthetic fiber ropes require no special storing conditions other than keeping them out of direct sunlight, away from the elements and out of extremely hot rooms.The ultra-violet rays of sunlight have a weakening effect on rope that is exposed for prolonged periods of time. Natural fiber ropes must, of course, be kept dry or they will rot in a very short time.
PROPER USE AND CARE OF CORDAGE

CRITICAL CONDITIONS OF USE
Design factors at the high end of the range or larger shall be used when: 1. Small ropes are used (because they can be more severely damaged by cutting, abrasion and sunlight). 2. Loads are not accurately known. 3. Operators are poorly trained. 4. Operation/use procedures are not well defined and/or controlled. 5. Inspection is infrequent. 6. Abrasion, cutting or dirt are present. 7. Shock loads or extreme dynamic loadings are likely. 8. High temperatures are present. 9. Chemicals are present. 10. Ropes are kept in service indefinitely. 11. Tensions on the rope is maintained continuously for long periods. 12. Rope can be subject to sharp bends or is used over pulleys or surfaces with too small a radius. 13. If knots are used (because strength is reduced by up to 50%.) 14. Death, injury or loss of valuable property may result from failure. For critical applications, a design factor greater than 12 may be necessary. Users must determine the design factor as they are the only ones who can assess service conditions and establish operating procedures. The load applied to the rope shall not exceed the working load. If uncertain, contact the rope manufacturer or a qualified engineering consultant for assistance. In all cases where any such conditions are present, or there is any question about the loads involved or the risks of use, the working load should be substantially reduced and the rope inspected frequently.
WATCH ROPE CONDITION

Inspect rope frequently, whether working or in storage. Occasionally reverse your rope, end-for-end, to distribute the wear more evenly. Use worn rope only where strength failure will not cause injury or damage.
HOW MUCH LINE CAN BE STORED IN BOX OR BIN?

(Assuming line is to be dropped into and not carefully laid in) V = Cubic footage required C = Rope circumference in inches L = Length of rope in feet Example: 2 circ.2 = 4 x 15,000 = 60,000 = 72 Cu. Ft. Required. 830 Box will hold entire length.
2 V= C xL 830
PERCENT OF STRENGTH LOSS

Lines should not be subjected to bending radius less than 3 x diameter of line. Preferably 8 x diameter will extend life of line. Eye Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10% In Line Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10% Bowline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-40% Square Knot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45-50% Two Half Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30%
HOW MUCH LINE ON A DRUM OR REEL?
BENDS/SHEAVE SIZES
Sharp bends significantly reduce rope strength. A working rope should never be subjected to a bend of less than 3 times rope diameter. A bend ratio of 4 times, or more, will prolong rope life. Eye-splice length should be at least 3 times the diameter of the cylinder (bitt, etc.) over which the eye is used. A length of 5 times diameter is even better. Sheave diameter should be 8 times braided rope diameter and 10 times twisted rope diameter. Sheave groove must be wider than rope diameter. Never use wire rope or V-belt sheaves because they pinch fiber ropes and cause excessive friction and damage. CAUTION: Do not put line on reel under tension. To do so can cause extreme contracting forces to crush drum.
DO NOT USE WIRE ROPE OR V BELT SHEAVES FOR SYNTHETIC ROPE AS ROPE IS PINCHED INSIDE.
Never allow anyone to stand in line with or within 45 on either side of a rope under tension. Should the rope fail or other parts of the assembly fail, the recoil force could cause serious injury or damage, especially if the rope is nylon.
133
ABOUT FALL PROTECTION

A COMPLETE FALL PROTECTION SOLUTION
We supply high quality fall protection equipment that is specifically designed to insure your safety and comfort. Our equipment complies with OSHA and ANSI fall protection regulations.
Read carefully and understand all instructions before using. A fall could result in serious injury or death. Do not use unless properly trained.
WARNING
GENERAL GUIDELINES AND WARNINGS

Here are some general imperatives and cautions regarding the use of fall protection equipment.
EMPLOYER RESPONSIBILITIES:
Ensure that all employees understand all aspects of fall protection equipment before using it. Make fall protection part of your overall safety program. Appoint a competent person on site to inspect all fall protection equipment at regular intervals and keep a record of inspection results. Make sure all components of your fall protection system are compatible; the safest method is to acquire all equipment from one supplier. Permit only trained personnel to use the equipment. Ensure that rescue takes place at once should a fall occur.
PERSONAL FALL-ARREST SYSTEM

A system used to arrest a worker in a fall from a working level. It consists of an achorage point, connectors, and body harness.
POSITIONING SYSTEM
A system used to position a worker at an appropriate work level. It consists of an anchorage, body belt or body harness, and connecting device.
EVERYONES RESPONSIBILITIES:
Read and understand all instructions and warnings before using the equipment. Inspect all products before each use. Discard any equipment showing excessive wear or deformation. Replace any equipment which has been involved in a fall. Use fall protection any time you are at a level 6 feet above the ground or above a lower level. Never use fall protection equipment for towing, hoisting or lifting. Understand OSHA regulations and ANSI standards pertaining to the work environment before using fall protection equipment.
RETRIEVAL SYSTEM
A system used for non-entry rescue from permit-required spaces. It consists of a retrieval line, chest or full-body harness, and a lifting device or anchor.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A system used to lower and support a worker while allowing a handsfree work environment. It consists of a personal protective gear, connecting device, and anchor point.
SPECIFIC PRODUCT INFORMATION AND WARNINGS FULL BODY HARNESSES

Only the back dee ring may be used for fall protection. Side, front and chest dee rings should be used for positioning only Shoulder dee rings should be used for retrieval only All straps must be secure before utilizing the harness.
OSHA (1926-501, SUBPART M)

Effective February 6, 1995 any employee engaged in construction activities or on a walking/working surface of 6 feet or more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by a Personal Fall guard rail system or safety net system.
LANYARDS AND RELATED CONNECTING DEVICES

The use of shock-absorbing lanyards is highly recommended for fall protection. Shock-absorbing lanyards may reduce fall arresting forces to less than 900 pounds, a reduction of 50-70% compared to traditional lanyards. Shock absorbers may elongate up to 3.5 feet. Always tie off in a manner which limits a free fall to 6 feet or less. Always use lanyards containing locking snaphooks. Do not tie knots in lanyards as it may reduce strength 50%. Do not wrap lanyards around sharp surfaces. Make sure that worker will not strike a lower level should a fall occur
ANCHOR POINTS
Anchor point must have ability to support 5,000 pounds per worker Always work directly under the anchor point. Do not wrap lanyards around sharp or rough surfaces. Use a tie-off strap to wrap around the surface and connect the lanyard to the strap. Anchor point must be at an elevation that limits free fall to 6 feet or less. Anchor point must be suitable for use with the snaphook and must not allow the load to shift to the snaphook keeper.
134
FULL BODY HARNESS

The most effective way to prevent injury or death in the event of a fall is to wear a full body harness as part of a total fall protection system. Harnesses are engineered to dispurse impact forces evenly among shoulders, torso, buttocks, and legs. When using full body harnesses, be aware of these guidelines: Only the back dee ring may be used for fall protection. Side, front and chest dee rings should be used for positioning only. Shoulder dee rings should be used for retrieval only. All straps must be secure before utilizing the harness. Never attach more than one snap to a dee ring. Please review safe use and inspection information on Pages 141-143. Chest strap with pass thru adjuster buckle Identification and wearer instruction label Side D-rings for restraint or positioning (if present) Leg strap adjuster buckles Leg strap
ULTRA-LITE HARNESS
Our most popular model, the Ultra-Lite harness weighs only about 2 pounds, making it ideal for workers who are switching from body belts to harnesses or who are wearing a harness for the first time. The Ultra-Lite harness is designed to fit S-L and is also available in L-XL.
CODE NO. DESCRIPTION SIZE
UH1DSL UH1DLXL UH3DSL UH3DLXL
Single Dee Ring Single Dee Ring` Three Dee Rings Three Dee Rings
Small-Large 28 - 38 Large-XLarge 36 - 46 Small-Large 28 - 38 Large-XLarge 36 - 46
NOTE: XXL AND XXXL ALSO AVAILABLE
DH30 SERIES
The DH30 series is a strong, rugged, comfortable, yet lightweight full body harness developed for use in the industrial and construction environments. The DH30 combines four separate functions into one full body harness: A removable tool belt, a great looking, comfortable, adjustable 6 body/back pad, a shoulder strap system that will relieve the weight of the tool belt from the users waist/back, a full body harness for the ultimate in fall protection, sub pelvic strap, and grommeted buckle leg straps. Back D-ring for fall arrest Back pad Slotted hip pad
CODE NO. SIZE
DH3DS DH3DM DH3DL DH3DXL DH3DXXL
30 - 36 36 - 44 40 - 48 44 - 52 48 - 56
Small Medium Large XLarge XXLarge
Sub pelvic strap for added support
MANY OTHER STYLES AND SIZES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE. SEE SAFETY INFORMATION PAGES 145-147.
Heavy duty harness, DH3D. Removable waist belt.
Heavy duty harness, DH3D.
Adjustable comfort pad.
Shoulder pads.
135
SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS

STANDARD SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS
One inch wide nylon web lanyard with shock absorbing pack and double locking lanyard snap each end.
CODE NO. LENGTH
LOOP TYPE ATTACHMENT SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS

One inch web lanyard with shock absorber pack and attachment loop one end and lanyard snap other end. Loop is placed through back Dee ring, then the lanyard is fed through the loop to snug down for a secure attachment. Used where a lanyard snap is not desired.
CODE NO. LENGTH
Z901-3 Z901-4 Z901-6
3 4 6
One inch wide nylon web lanyard with shock absorbing pack and double locking lanyard snap one end. 1-3/4 throat ladder hook other end.
CODE NO. LENGTH
ZE901-3 ZE901-4 ZE901-6
3 4 6
Z902-3 Z902-4 Z902-6
3 4 6
One inch wide nylon web lanyard with shock absorbing pack and double locking lanyard snap one end. 2-1/4 throat rebar hook other end.
CODE NO. LENGTH
Z903-3 Z903-4 Z904-6
3 4 6
One inch web lanyard with shock absorber pack and attachment loop one end and lanyard snap other end. Loop is placed through back Dee ring, then the lanyard is fed through the loop to snug down for a secure attachment. Used where a lanyard snap is not desired. 1-3/4 throat ladder hook.
CODE NO. LENGTH
100% TIE-OFF SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS

One inch wide 2-leg 100% tie-off lanyard with shock absorbing pack and three double locking lanyard snaps.
CODE NO. LENGTH
ZE902-3 ZE902-4 ZE902-6
3 4 6
ZY901-3 ZY901-4 ZY901-6
3 4 6
One inch web lanyard with shock absorber pack and attachment loop one end and lanyard snap other end. Loop is placed through back Dee ring, then the lanyard is fed through the loop to snug down for a secure attachment. Used where a lanyard snap is not desired. 2-1/4 throat rebar hook.
CODE NO. LENGTH
One inch wide 2-leg 100% tie-off lanyard with shock absorbing pack and double locking lanyard snap, plus two 1-3/4 throat ladder snaps.
CODE NO. LENGTH
ZE903-3 ZE903-4 ZE903-6
3 4 6
ZY902-3 ZY902-4 ZY902-6
3 4 6
ROPE TYPE SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS

1/2 nylon rope lanyards can also be supplied by using Code #s Z701, Z702, Z703, or ZE701, ZE702, ZE703.
One inch wide 2-leg 100% tie-off lanyard with shock absorbing pack and double locking lanyard snap, plus two 2-1/4 throat rebar snaps.
CODE NO. LENGTH
ZY903-3 ZY903-4 ZY903-6
3 4 6
SEE SAFETY INFORMATION PAGES 141-143.
NOTE: OTHER STYLES AND LENGTHS ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST

136
SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS

TIE-BACK STYLE SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARD
One inch wide nylon web lanyard with shock absorbing pack and double locking lanyard snaps plus an adjustable tie-back ring.
CODE NO. LENGTH
ZTB901-3 3 ZTB901-4 4 ZTB901-6 6 NOTE: Also available in ZTB902 with 1-3/4 throat ladder hook or ZTB903 with 2-1/4 throat rebar hook
STRETCH TYPE LANYARD WITH SHOCK ABSORBING PACK

Elastic Lanyard with a 4-6 range. Keeps lanyard from tangling and out of the way.
CODE NO. LENGTH
ZS901-6
6 ft. Extended, 4 ft. relaxed
Note: Other lengths and styles available
WEB ADJUSTERS
Available on all web lanyards. Can decrease length up to 50% of maximum.
REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLIES (FOR POSITIONING ONLY)

NO. 56S #11 REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLY
MODEL 56 1-3/4 throat opening, drop-forged steel, 5000 lb. test rebar snap hook. Two 5/8 throat double locking snap hooks. CAUTION: Do not use on attachments less than 1-1/4 diameter.
NO. 56G #18 REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLY

Same construction as No. 56S except it incorporates a 2-1/4 throat rebar snap hook, which is compatible with the #18 rebar. CAUTION: Do not use on attachments less than 1-1/4 diameter.

Chain assembly eliminates the need for a swivel attachment. 1-3/4 throat opening, drop-forged steel, 5000 lb. test rebar snap hook. Two 5/8 throat opening double locking snap hooks. CAUTION: Do not use on attachments less than 1-1/4 diameter. MODEL 81

Same construction as No. 81S except it incorporates a 2-1/4 throat rebar snap hook, which is compatible with the #18 rebar. CAUTION: Do not use on attachments less than 1-3/4 diameter.

1-3/4 throat opening, drop-forged steel rebar snap hook. Complete with swivel and Dee-ring. CAUTION: Do not use on attachments less than 1-1/4 diameter. MODEL 93

Same construction as 935 except incorporates a 2-1/4 throat rebar snaphook, which is compatible with the #18 rebar. CAUTION: Do not use on attachments less than 1-3/4 diameter.
NOTE: Rebar chain assemblies are to be used as positioning devices only. A secondary approved lanyard must be used to prevent falls.
137
RETRACTABLE LIFELINE AND LANYARDS

RETRACTABLE LANYARDS
State-of-the-art in fall arrest technology, and highly recommended where durability and high mobility are essential. This webbing lanyard offers up to 8 feet of movement, while eliminating lanyard slack. A spring keeps a slight constant tension on the lanyard, thus keeping it from dragging and eliminating the tripping hazard. Should a fall be detected, an internal braking system engages and arrests the fall. A free fall situation is virtually nonexistent with this unit. The unit is covered by a durable, highly visible vinyl jacket to extend service life. A carabiner is included for anchorage attachment.
CODE NO. DESCRIPTION
8327A
8 foot length 134 webbing retractable lanyard w/carabiner
RETRACTABLE LIFELINES
Self Contained Retractable Lifelines provide freedom of movement and a cushioned fall protection for individuals working at heights. Just attach the Retractable Lifeline overhead, out of the way; the retractable will maintain a light constant tension on the cable. Should a fall occur, an inertia brake will automatically activate to arrest the workers fall within a maximum of two feet. Retractables are available in 25, 30, 50, 65 and 100 ft. and come standard with galvanized steel cable. The FCP Retractables are compatible with all full body harnesses. For ease of attachment, consider ordering the tie-off strap. Stainless steel cable and Kevlar rope are available upon request.
CODE NO. DESCRIPTION WEIGHT EA. (LBS)
R10 10 ft. wire rope retractable lifeline R20 20 ft. wire rope retractable lifeline R25 25 ft. wire retractable lifeline R30 30 ft. wire retractable lifeline R50 50 ft. wire retractable lifeline Units require periodic recertification by the manufacturer. Please check your owners manual for instructions. NOTE: Longer lengths available on request
6 9 10 11 14
SELF RETRACTING DEVICES

All self retracting devices perform a tethering function which allows unrestricted vertical movement to the device while arresting the users fall.These devices have a housing normally anchored to the anchorage of a fall arrest system containing a drum-wound lifeline. The retracting end of the lifeline will unwind from the drum under slight tension during normal movement below the device.When tension is removed, the drum will automatically retract the lifeline. Quick movement, which is typically applied at the onset of a fall, will lock the drum and arrest the users motion. The self retracting device is designed to arrest a fall while minimizing fall distance and impact forces. OSHA regulations state "Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0. 61 m) or less, rip-stitch lanyards, and tearing and deforming lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum load of 5,000 Ibs. (22 kN) applied to the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position". (OSlIA, 29 CFR Parts 1910 and 1926.)
SELF RETRACTING LIFELINES

The self retracting lifeline (as defined by ANSI Z359.1-1992) is a device which contains a drum-wound line which may be slowly extracted from or retracted onto the drum under slight tension during normal movement of the user. The line has means for attachment to the fall arrest attachment on the body support. After onset of a fall, the device automatically locks off and arrests the fall. The retractable lifeline, or fall arrest block is a device which is usually long in length (6.0 to 100 m, 20 - 320 ft. bearing point length). It is specifically engineered for fall arrest in the vertical plane of motion. When the user falls at more than approximately 1.2 m (4.5 ft) per second, the device automatically locks off to arrest the fall. The device will remain locked until released, and then resume normal operation. Note: The unit should be inspected following loading or fall arrest. Most units have an indicator which changes appearance in the event of severe loading. The unit must be sent to an authorized dealer or manufacturer for servicing in the event that the indicator activates. The retractable lifeline is available in varying lengths depending on the manufacturer and required use. This device anchors above the work area for fall arrest protection during vertical movement of a single individual. In many units the arrest force is minimized by an intemal shock absorbing mechanism. We supply a number of retractable lifelines for various applications, uses, and personnel.
RETRACTABLE LANYARDS
Retractable Lanyards Retractable lanyards or web retractors are shorter in length and more compact than the retractable lifeline. These devices range between 1.5 to 6.0 m (5 - 20 ft.) bearing point length.
COMPONENTS AND WORKINGS OF SELF RETRACTING DEVICES

Most self retracting devices can be broken down into a number of basic components: a) the anchorage point or handle; b) the housing including: i) drum containing excess spooled line; ii) locking mechanism; and iii) spring mechanism; c) the line itself; d) the connecting means; and e) the fall indicator. The anchorage point or handle must be durable and meet ANSI standards for anchorage strengths. Some include swivels which greatly reduce the chances of the line becoming entangled or twisted. The housing can be made of any number of materials including: stainless steel, cast aluminum and/or syntlhetics. The housing is very important because it sheilds the inner workings of the device from contaminants and debris which could cause corrosion or prevent the unit from functioning properly. Our lifelines have a housing and inner components that are environmentally sealed for added protection. The drum contains the spooled line and, on many units, an additional reserve line which prevents use of the lifeline at its end, while allowing additional energy absorption. When the reserve line is deployed, an indicator should appear to show that the reserve line has been deployed and requires servicing.
138
ANCHORS TIE-OFF STRAPS BOATSWAINS CHAIRS BEAMER

TIE-OFF STRAPS
Important components of fall arrest systems are tie-off straps. Designed as a portable and versatile tie-off, to provide a compatible anchorage point for fall arrest. They easily exceed the 5,000 pound tie-off requirement and are lightweight, available in lengths to suit your individual needs.
81CR3 81CR4 81CR5 81CR6
3 ft. tie-off strap, dee ring on each end 4 ft. tie-off strap, dee ring on each end 5 ft. tie-off strap, dee ring on each end 6 ft. tie-off strap, dee ring on each end
NOTE: Other Styles and Sizes Available.
BOATSWAINS CHAIR
Constructed from 1-3/4 wide polyester and 12 x 24 x 1 board. Work seat comes with a waist belt. A secondary lifeline with a rope grab and harness must always be used with the Boatswains Chair
1204BC
Boatswains Chair
BEAMER STRUCTURAL STEEL FALL PROTECTION

Beamer Fall Arrester, hereafter referred to as Beamer, has been designed and approved as a fall arresting device for use on I and H beams during steel erection/and building construction. Beamer will provide Fall Arrest for one (1) person when used Beamer is not to be used on any type of WOOD attachment point. per manufacturers recommendations and specifications. Beamer is not to be used on any type of WOOD attachment point. Including shock absorber and hooks, lanyard may not exceed six feet (6) in overall length. IMPORTANT: Including shock absorber and hooks, lanyard may not exceed six feet (6) in overall length.
CODE NO. CODE NO. DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
BMR-2000 BMR12-1 BMR18-2 BBC24-4
3-1/2 14 11 thick flange Fits 4-1/2 to 12 wide beam with up to a 14thick flange Fits 8 to 18 wide beam with up to a 2 thick flange Fits 12 to 24 wide beam and up to a 4 thick flange
top or bottom of I or H beam top of I beam only bottom flange only
NOTE: Other Styles and Sizes Available.
CONCRETE D-RING ANCHOR

For added versatility, this anchor can be used for permanent or temporary applications - it also incorporates a re-useable D-ring assembly, just install a new bolt and its ready to go again. Flexible anchor is ideal for use with DBI/SALA shock absorbing lanyards, self retracting lifelines or even horizontal lifeline systems. Rugged design for harsh environments with no moving or fragile parts for dust or debris to foul-up. For jobsite flexibility & ease-of-use, the device can be installed into 11/16 in., 18mm, or 3/4 in. holes. - only standard drill bits needed! 5,000 lb. rated, OSHA compatible connection point swivels 360 degrees for ultimate safety & useability. Extremely simple installation - drill hole, screw-in the anchor until red torque indicator cap shears off revealing a green hex-head which notifies the user the anchor has been installed properly. Exceeds all OSHA and ANSI requirements including ASTM E488 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors for added safety. CODE NO. DESCRIPTION
2104560
Concrete D-Ring Anchor
ANCHORAGE STRENGTH
Anchorages selected for personal fall arrest systems (PFAS) shall have a strength capable of sustaining static loads, applied in the directions permitted by the PFAS, of at least: (A) 3,600 lbs. (16kN) when certification exists (Reference ANSI Z359.1-1992 for certification definition), or (B) 5,000 lbs. (22.2kN) in the absence of certification. When more than one PFAS is attached to an anchorage, the anchorage strengths set forth in (A) and (B) above shall be multipled by the number of personal fall arrest systems attached to the anchorage. Per OSHA 1926.500 and 1910.66Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest systems (PFAS) shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least 5,000 lbs. (22.2kN) per user attached, or be designed, installed and used as part of a complete PFAS which maintains a safety factor of at least two and is supervised by a qualified person.
139
ROPE GRABS CABLE GRABS LADDER SYSTEMS

FALL ARREST ROPE GRABS
RG5834 For vertical fall arrest protection. Features dual cams for double safety. For use with 5/8 and 3/4 dia. synthetic rope. Patented design pivots open for easy attachment anywhere on life line. Automatically travels up with user on pre-tensioned life line. Incorporates spring-loaded cams to hold rope grab in parked position.
RG5834 *19200 19200
Fall Arrest Rope Grab 58 or 34 synthetic rope Fall Arrest Rope Grab 58 synthetic rope only (MOST COMMON ITEM)
WIRE ROPE GRABS

For vertical fall arrest protection. Features dual cams for double safety. For use with 3/8 dia. solid core wire rope. Automatically travels with user. Conforms to OSHA specifications and ANSI recommendations.
TTWG500 VW655 TTWG500
Wire Rope Grab Wire Rope Grab
For 3/8 wire rope with wire core For 5/16" & 3/8" wire rope with wire core
CABLE SAFETY CLIMB SYSTEM

TTCSCS Cable Safety Climb System NOTE: Please specify ladder length.
Sealed anchor head w/impact attenuator Permanently secured forged eye bolt
CROSS-OVER STYLE FRONT VIEW
Permanently swaged cable sleeves Adjustable clamp brackets H.D. steel square tubing supports Removable wire rope grab included w/each system Cable stand-off (every 25 ft.) 3/8 dia. galvanized wire rope Removable cable clamps & thimble Galvanized HD steel anchor bracket Adjustable anchor eye bolt
NOTE: RAIL TYPE LADDER SYSTEMS ALSO AVAILABLE

140
LIFELINE ROPE AND CONNECTORS

VERTICAL LIFELINE ROPE
Ropes used for vertical lifelines require a minimum breaking strength at the termination of at least 22kN (5,000 lbs.). This means that ropes with spliced terminations must have a breaking strength of at least 27kN (6,000 lbs.). Lifelines should be made from synthetic rope, usually nylon, Poly Pro, or Poly Dac. Check rope grab operating instruction for the proper size and type of rope.
*LL580N 5/8 3-Strand Nylon Rope *LL340N 3/4 3-Strand Nylon Rope *LL580PP 5/8 3-Strand Poly Pro Rope *LL340PP 3/4 3-Strand Poly Pro Rope *LL580PD 5/8 3-Strand Poly Dac Rope (MOST COMMON ITEM) *LL340PD 3/4 3-Strand Poly Dac Rope NOTE: 1) See Rope section, pages 124-129 for more information on rope. 2) Please specify the end termination you want from the list below. 3) Rope shall remain knot free as knots can reduce strength up to 50%. 4) Any size and length available. 5) Check manufacturers recommendations on rope grabs.
HORIZONTAL LIFELINE SYSTEM

HORIZONTAL LIFELINE SYSTEM CONSIST OF THE FOLLOWING: * UnitensionerTM * 5/8" Dia. synthetic rope * Two-anchorage webbing or cable slings * Two carabiners * Two steel o-rings * Nylon carrying bag This unit performs the following functions: 1. Stretching the synthetic rope 2. Maintaining and controlling desired tension 3. Absorbing motive energy of the fall 4. Permitting adjustments to the system. These adjustments to the system will substantially reduce the forces on the anchorages in case of a fall. 96952-30 96952-60 30' System 60' System
Other Horizontal Lifeline Systems Available For Special Needs.
141
ROOF ANCHORS AND END TERMINATIONS

ROOF ANCHOR
Reusable roof anchor, steel construction. Adjusts to any roof pitch. NOTE: Use in conjunction with harness, rope grab, lifeline, and lanyard. Other roof anchor and fall protection devices are also available.
4000RA
Reusable Roof Anchor
Many Other Roof Fall Protection Items Available Please Call

END TERMINATIONS
CODE NO. DESCRIPTION CODE NO. DESCRIPTION
RB214
2-1/4 throat large rebar hook
DR100
Standard Dee ring
RB134
1-3/4 throat ladder/rebar hook
EY10
Standard 10 long spliced eye
DL100
Double locking Lanyard snap hook TPT Teardrop style plastic thimble for 5/8 to 3/4 rope
Break Strength
21001A Auto locking carabiner 11,400 lb. 21001AR Auto locking carabiner 5,500 lb.
RPT
Round plastic thimble for 1/2 and 5/8 rope
Many Other Hardware Items Available on Request

142
SAFETY NETS
SAFETY NETS
Leading Edge's 300 Series Personnel Safety Nets are made of durable high tenacity nylon. Leading Edge's exclusive net design utilizes double strand construction for optimum strength and durability. This unique design provides the highest degree of performance while maintalning a lightweight product that is as easy to install as it is strong. The personnel safety nets can be combined with a debris liner to provide both personnel and debris protection in one system. The nets are available for a wide range of applications which include: High Rise Construction, Bridge Construction and Repair, Roof Replacement and Repair, Railroad Bridges, Shafts and Openings, Steel and Concrete Construction, and General Fall Protection COLUMN ADAPTER FLOOR MOUNT
ENGINEERED SOLUTIONS
Leading Edge provides custom designed systems to meet site specific needs. In many cases, systems provide several areas of protection, thus encompassing personnel, debris and public protection in one package. Debris Net Systems often replace unsightly or restrictive sidewalk sheds and platforms. Debris Net Systems generally assure an unrestricted flow of traffic and access to and around construction or restoration areas. In many cases this allows facilities to continue to operate with little or no interruption. Special attachments, loading and clearance are examples of areas where Leading Edge's manufacturing and design excel. Systems are available on rental or purchase basis. WALL MOUNT RETRACTED
STANDARD PERSONNEL & DEBRIS NET SIZES:

Leading Edge's 300 Series Personnel Safety Nets are made of durable high tenacity nylon. Leading Edge's exclusive net design utilizes double strand construction for optimum strength and durability. This unique design provides the highest degree of performance while maintalning a lightweight product that is as easy to install as it is strong. The personnel safety nets can be combined with a debris liner to provide both personnel and debris protection in one system. The nets are available for a wide range of applications which include: High Rise Construction, Bridge Construction and Repair, Roof Replacement and Repair, Railroad Bridges, Shafts and Openings, Steel and Concrete Construction, and General Fall Protection
DEBRIS NETS
Leading Edge's Debris Nets are manufactured from the most advanced materials in a wide range of meshes which range from 31/2" to solid. Debris Nets are available fire retarded, or with the exclusive Envirocoat treatment for superior performance and durability in sun, wind and the demanding environments. Debris Nets are used in a diversity of applications which include:Scaffolding Enclosures, Facade Protection and Containment, Ceiling and Roof Containment, Sidewalk Overhead Protection, Protection Over Roadways and Streets, Separation of Trades, Public Protection, Adjacent Property Protection, General Debris Protection.
INDUSTRIAL GUARDS
Rack and conveyor guards are available in a wide range of materials and mesh sizes. The guards can be dyed to meet your specific requirements. Leading Edge's support services are available to aid you in selecting materials and developing or selecting hardware specific to your needs. Stationary and moveable systems are available. Guards are used in a wide range of applications.Conveyor Guards, Storage Rack Guards, Mezzanines, Secured Storage Areas, Temporary and Permanent Enclosures, Equipment Guards,Retracting Guards, General Guarding Applications.
SPECIALTY NETS STANDARD PERSONNEL & DEBRIS NET SIZES

U.S. SIZES 5' x 10' 5' x 15' 10' x 10' 10' x 15' 10' x 20' 10' x 25' 10' x 30' 10' x 40' 15' x 20' 15' x 25' 15' x 30' 15' x 40' 15' x 60' 20' x 20' 20' x 25' 20' x 30' 20' x 40' 25' x 25' 25' x 50' 30' x 30' 30' x 40'
Nets and netting systems are available for special applications like heliports, mezzanines, and other areas with special requirements. System design assistance is available. Heliports, Mezzanines, Conveyor Guards, Cargo Nets, Barrier Nets, Vertical Nets
CUSTOMIZED SYSTEMS
Lightweight aluminum and steel construction - Reduces installation, moving and transportation costs. Fully engineered and tested system - Complies with ANSI A1011, OSHA & The Army Corps of Engineers. Specially designed mounting adapters - Assures the correct attachment to your structure. Split Pole design allows easy storage, shipping and fits in most conventional hoists. Incorporates a 17 ft. wide Safety and Debris Combo Net. Approximate weights of Hardware: Poles (21' long) - 38 Ibs. ea. Mounting Brackets -15 Ibs. ea. Corner Mounting Brackets - 30 Ibs. ea. Spreader Poles - 30 Ibs. ea.
CEILING AND ROOF CONTAINMENT

Leading Edge net systems provide protection from debris falling from ceiling areas during reconstruction or as an interim solution The systems can provide protection for personnel, the public and equipment below, as well as workers above the system. In most cases costly down time or relocation of operations, can be eliminated. Systems are custom designed to meet your specific needs Systems are available for all levels of containment including:Weather Protection, Water Collection, Sandblast, Public Protection, Dust Protection, Debris Containment
143
CONFINED SPACE RESCUE SYSTEMS LARGE CAPACITY
GATOR-MAX & GATOR-LAID
RESCUE AND RECOVERY SYSTEMS

The FrenchCreek Rescue Recovery Tripod System meets all the OSHA requirements for confined space rescue. The R50 Rescue/Recovery unit has raising and lowering capabilities as well as acting as a retractable lifeline. In the event a fall occurs, the unit is easily converted to a rescue device, enabling the injured worker to be raised or lowered to safety at a rate of 20 ft. per minute. Each component of the system is available individually. When ordered as a system, a tripod, recovery unit, mounting bracket, carabiner and a carrying bag for the rescue device are included. The R50 winches and systems are available in 25' or 50' lengths, with Galvanized, Stainless Steel or Synthetic Rope.
To Order Tripods:
Maximum Static Load Maximum Work Load Height at Max Extension Height at Min Extension Distance between feet at Max Extension 55 68 at Min Extension 35 48 Aluminum Leg Extrusions 6061T6 6061T6 Upper 1-3/4 x 1-3/4 x 1/8 Lower 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/8 Adjustment Lengths 2-3/4 2-3/4 Wire lock Pin Steel Steel Feet Aluminum Aluminum Head Steel Steel Leg Chains 1/8 x 165 1/8 x 192 Weight 33 38 TP7 7 Tripod 5000 lbs. 350 lbs. 85 49 TP9 9 Tripod 5000 lbs. 350 lbs. 109 73
To Order Recovery Unit:

Model Capacity Lbs. Cable Length Cable Dia./inch Size (w,h,d) inch Weight Lbs. Tensile Strength: G S.S. Synthetic Rope Locking Speed, ft/sc Arrest Force, lbf Arrest Distance, inch #204 Bag R50 350 50 3/16 Gal. 9 x 15 x 9 23.4 4200 lbs. 3700 lbs. 4200 lbs. 4.5 900 18 - 24
To Order Recovery Systems:

R50 G TP7 R50 SS TP7 R50 K TP7 R50 G TP9 R50 SS TP9 R50 K TP7 (50 Galvanized + 7 Ft Tripod) (50 Stainless Steel + 7 Ft Tripod) (50 Synthetic Rope + 7 Ft Tripod) (50 Galvanized + 9 Ft Tripod) (50 Stainless Steel + 9 Ft Tripod) (50 Synthetic Rope + 9 Ft Tripod)
The above systems include a recovery unit, a tripod, a mounting bracket, a carabiner, pully and carrying bag.
144
SWING HAZARD & TOTAL FALL DISTANCE

SWING FALL HAZARD
Swing fall is a pendulum-like motion that can occur when a worker moves in a horizontal direction away from a fixed anchorage, and then falls. While the force generated in a swing fall is the same as the force in a vertical fall, there is a potential hazard of colliding with a structure such as a building or platform.
TOTAL FALL DISTANCE

Total fall distance is the maximum vertical change in distance from the bottom of the individuals feet at the onset of a fall to the position of the feet after the fall is arrestedincluding free fall distance and deceleration distance. Total fall distance can be affected by many factors including: (a) Length of connecting means, (b) Position and height of anchorage relative to work platform, (c) Position of attachment and D-ring slide on the full body harness, (d) Deployment of shock absorber, (e) Movement in lifeline, (f) Initial position of worker before free fall (i.e. sitting, standing, etc.)
ENERGY ABSORBER
A fall of even a few feet will create tremendously high impact forces to both the fallen worker and the entire fall protection system. High impact forces could cause significant injury, even if a worker is in a full body harness.This force could also stress the anchor point beyond a safe working load. The best method of reducing impact force is to use a personal energy absorber (EAP); this is usually achieved by creating friction as it dissipates energy of the fall through distance. The energy absorber will reduce impact forces considerably, effectively reducing impact loading to the fallen individual, connecting means, anchorage connector and the anchor. A lanyard with an integrally connected energy absorber offers uncomplicated use; this type of lanyard is also less likely to be altered. NOTE: With the use of an energy absorber, one must take into account extended fall distance with elongation and deployment.
FORCE VECTOR
Recognizing a force vector is very important when tensioning ropes or cables in the horizontal plane, as occurs with a lifeline or deflection line. Allowing sufficient sag in the line is one method of reducing forces to end anchorages. Other methods would include the use of inline energy absorbers. Follow manufacturers recommendations for erecting temporary horizontal lifelines. It should be noted that there are no defined standards for horizontal lifeline anchorages. When an energy absorber is not used, the anchorages should each be rated for at least 16,000 lbs., unless the entire system is designed by a professional engineer. Engineering considerations include length of span, nature of lifeline, number of users, amount of pretension required, inline energy absorption, and the dynamic or static nature of the connecting means.
HORIZONTAL LIFELINE SAFETY

Horizontal lifelines often act as a floating anchorage allowing a worker to travel horizontally for long distances without the risk of large pendulum or swing falls. When a worker falls into a horizontal lifeline, the forces acting on the anchorages are multiplied several times from their vertical component. This must be taken into account when selecting the anchorages and the anchorage connectors. The lifeline must be made of low stretch material to limit the amount of sag produced during a fall thereby limiting the amount of required clearance to obstructions below.
FAS HLL MAL FFD MAF TFD
= = = = = = = +
Fall arrest system Horizontal lifeline Maximum arrest load Free fall distance Maximum arrest force Total fall distance Sag + Free fall distance Deceleration distance
145
INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE

HARNESS INSPECTION
FREQUENCY Before each use, visually inspect per steps listed below. The full body harness must be inspected by a competent person other than the user at least annually. See section 5.2 and 5.3 for guidelines. Record the results of each formal inspection in the inspection log found in section 9.0. IMPORTANT If the Full Body Harness has been subjected to fall arrest or impact forces, it must be immediately removed from service and destroyed. Extreme working conditions (harsh environments, prolonged use, etc.) may require increasing the frequency of inspections. INSPECTION STEPS Step 1. Inspect harness hardware (i.e. buckles, D-rings, back pad, keepers, etc.); these items must not be damaged, broken, distorted, or have any sharp edges, burrs, cracks, worn parts, or corrosion. Check any PVC coated hardware for cuts, rips, tears, holes, etc. in the coating. Make sure buckles work freely. Inspect parachute buckle spring. Step 2. Inspect webbing; material must be free of frayed, cut, or broken fibers; check for tears, abrasions, mold, burns, discoloration, etc. Inspect stitching; check for pulled or cut stitches. Broken stitches may be an indication that the harness has been impact loaded and must be removed from service. Step 3. Inspect labels; all labels should be present and fully legible. Labels must be replaced if illegible or missing. Step 4. Inspect each system component or subsystem per associated manufacturers instructions. Step 5. Record the inspection date and results in the inspection log. If inspection reveals a defective condition, remove unit from service immediately and destroy or contact factory authorized service center for repair.
LANYARD INSPECTION
IMPORTANT Extreme working conditions (harsh environment, prolonged use, etc.) may require increasing the frequency of inspections. INSPECTION STEPS Step 1. Inspect Energy Absorbing Lanyard or Energy Absorber component hardware (i.e. snap hooks, adjusters, swedges, thimbles, etc.) These items must not be damaged, broken, distorted, or have any sharp edges, burrs, cracks, worn parts, or corrosion. Make certain the connecting hooks work properly. Hook gates must move freely and lock upon closing. Make certain adjusters (if present) work properly. Step 2. Inspect the Energy Absorbing Lanyard or Energy Absorber component per the following, as applicable: WEBBING AND STITCHING: Inspect webbing. Material must be free of frayed, cut, or broken fibers. Check for tears, abrasions, mold, burns, discoloration, etc. Inspect stitching. Check for pulled or cut stitches. Broken stitches may be an indication the Energy Absorbing Lanyard or Energy Absorber component has been impact loaded and must be removed from service. The webbing must be free of knots, excessive soiling, heavy paint buildup, and rust staining. Check for chemical or heat damage (this type of damage may show up as a brown, discolored, or brittle areas). Check for ultraviolet damage (this type of degradation is indicated by discoloration and the presence of splinters or slivers on the webbing surface). All of the above factors are known to reduce webbing strength. Damaged or questionable webbing should be replaced. NOTE: For Model ZM901, inspect for cuts or tears in the tubular jacket, if core web (white color) is exposed, remove from service immediately. SYNTHETIC ROPE: Inspect rope for concentrated wear. Material must be free of frayed strands and broken yarns, cuts and abrasions, burns, discoloration, etc. The rope must be free of knots, excessive soiling, heavy paint buildup, and rust staining. Rope splices must be tight, with five full tucks, and thimbles shall be held by the splice. Check for chemical or heat damage (this type of damage may show up as brown, discolored, or brittle areas). Check for ultraviolet damage (this type of degradation is indicated by discoloration and the presence of splinters and slivers on the rope surface). All of the above factors are known to reduce rope strength. Damaged or questionable ropes should be replaced. WIRE ROPE: Inspect entire length of wire rope. Always wear protective gloves when inspecting wire rope. Inspect for broken wires by passing cable through your gloved hands, flexing it every few inches to expose breaks. Broken wires can be removed by bending the wire back and forth parallel to the rope length. Do not attempt to pull wires out of rope. Replace the wire rope if there are six or more randomly distributed broken wires in one lay, or three or more broken wires in one strand in one lay (A lay of wire rope is the length of wire rope that it takes for a strand [the larger groups of wires] to complete one revolution or twist along the rope). Replace the wire rope if there are any broken wires within 1 inch of the metal compression sleeves (swedges) at either end of the assembly. Wire rope should be free of corrosion. Step 3. ENERGY ABSORBING COMPONENT: Inspect Energy Absorber to determine if it has been activated, there should be no evidence of elongation. Make certain energy absorber cover is secure and not torn or damaged. BEFORE EACH USE of any fall protection equipment, carefully inspect it to assure that it is in serviceable condition. Check for worn or damaged parts; ensure all hardware (i.e. snap hooks, swedges, thimbles, etc.) are present and secure and are not distorted, or have any sharp edges, burrs, cracks, or corrosion. Make sure self locking snap hooks or carabiners work properly. Inspect rope/webbing/wire rope for wear, cuts, burns, frayed edges, breaks or other damage. Do not use if inspection reveals an unsafe condition.
HARNESS MAINTENANCE, SERVICING, STORAGE

Clean full body harness with water and mild soap solution. Wipe off hardware with clean, dry cloth, and hang to air dry. Do not force dry with heat. An excessive buildup of dirt, paint, etc. may prevent the full body harness from working properly, and in severe cases, degrade the webbing to a point where it weakens and should be removed from service. If you have any questions concerning the condition of your harness, or have any doubt about putting it into service, contact Bairstow. Additional maintenance and servicing procedures (i.e. replacement parts) must be completed by a factory authorized service center be in writing. Do not attempt to disassemble the unit. Store full body harnesses in a cool, dry, clean environment out of direct sunlight. Avoid areas where chemical vapors may exist.Thoroughly inspect the full body harness after any period of extended storage.
146
LARGE CAPACITY
Safety Standards for Fall Protection in the Construction Industry (OSHA 1926.501 - Duty to have fall protection)
(a) General. (l) This section sets forth requirements for employers to provide fall protection systems. All fall protection required by this section shall conform to the criteria set forth in 1926.502 of this subpart. (b)(l) Unprotected sides and edges. Each employee on a walking/working surface (horizontal and vertical surface) with an unprotected side or edge which is 6 feet (1.8m) or more above a lower level shall be protected from falling by the use of guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems. Editors Note: The requirements stated in (b)(l) are similar for: leading edges, hoist area, holes, formwork and reinforcing steel, ramps, runways and other walkways, excavations, dangerous equipment, overhead bricklaying and related work, roofing work on low-slope roofs, steep roofs, precast concrete erection, residential construction and wall openings.
OSHA STANDARDS (EXCERPTS) GATOR-MAX & GATOR-LAID

Fixed Ladders (OSHA 1910.27)
(d.5) Ladder safety devices may be used on tower, water tank and chimney ladders over 20 feet in unbroken length in place of cage protection. No landing platform is required. All ladder safety devices, such as those that incorporate life belts, friction brakes, and sliding attachments, must meet the design requirements of the ladders that serve.
Ladder Safety Devices (ANSI A14.3-1992)

7.1.3 The ladder safety device shall be designed to absorb the impact of a solid object weighing at least 500 pounds in a free fall of 18 inches. 7.1.4 Design and installation of mountings shall not reduce the design safety factors of the fixed ladders. 7.3.1 The safety sleeve shall be of a type which can be operated entirely by the person using the ladder safety device. It shall permit the person using the ladder safety device to ascend or descent without having to continually manipulate the safety sleeve. 7.3.3 The maximum length of the connection between the centerline of the carrier and the point of attachment to the body belt shall not exceed 9 inches.
(OSHA 1926.502 - Fall protection system criteria and practices)

(a) General. (l) Fall protection systems required by this part shall comply with the applicable provisions of this section. (2) Employers shall provide and install all fall protection systems required by this support for an employee, and shall comply with all other pertinent requirements of this subpart before that employee begins the work that necessitates the fall protection. (d) Personal fall arrest systems. Personal fall arrest systems and their use shall comply with the provisions set forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, body belts are not acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest system. Note: The use of a body belt in a positioning device system is acceptable and is regulated under paragraph (e) of this section. (5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member, or shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent disengagement of the snaphook by the contract of the snaphook keeper by the connected member. Effective January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall be used. (15) Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached, or shall be designed, installed, and used as follows: (i) as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of at least two; and (ii) under the supervision of a qualified person. (16) Personal fall arrest systems, when stopping a fall, shall: (i) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used with a body belt; (ii) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used with a body harness; (iii) be rigged such that an employee can neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8m), nor contact any lower level; (iv) bring an employee to a complete stop and limit maximum deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07m); and, (v) have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy of an employee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8m), or the free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less. (e) Positioning device system. Positioning device systems and their use shall conform to the following provisions: (l) Positioning devices shall be rigged such that an employee cannot free fall more than 2 feet (.9m). (2) Positioning devices shall be secured to an anchorage capable of supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee's fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater.
Powered Platforms For Building Maintenance (OSHA 1910.66)

(j) Personal Fall Protection. Employers must provide personal fall arrest systems meeting the requirements outlined. Requirements include the following: Anchorages to which personal fall arrest equipment is attached shall be capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached, or shall be designed, installed and used as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of at least two, under the supervision of a qualified person. Personal fall arrest systems shall, when stopping a fall: 1) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used with a body belt; and 2) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used with a body harness. Personal fall arrest systems shall be rigged such than an employee can neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8m), nor contact any lower level. Personal fall arrest systems or components subjected to impact loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee protection unless inspected and determined by a competent person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse. Before using a personal fall arrest system, and after any competent or system is changed, employees shall be trained in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 1910.66 (i)(l), in the safe use of the system. Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected prior to each use for mildew, wear, damage and other deterioration. Defective components shall be removed from service if their strength or function may be adversely affected.
Permit-Required Confined Spaces (OSHA 1910.146)

(a) Scope and application. This section contains requirements for practices and procedures to protect employees in general industry from the hazards of entry into permit-required confined spaces. (k)(3) To facilitate non-entry rescue, retrieval systems or methods shall be used whenever an authorized entrant enters a permit space, unless the retrieval equipment would increase the overall risk of entry or would not contribute to the rescue of the entrant. Retrieval systems shall meet the following requirements: (i) Each authorized entrant shall use a chest or full body harness, with a retrieval line attached at the center of the entrant's back near shoulder level, above the entrant's head, or at another point which the employer can establish presents a profile small enough for the successful removal of the entrant. Wristlets may be used in lieu of the chest or full body harness if the employer can demonstrate that the use of a chest or full body harness is infeasible or creates a greater hazard and that the use of wristlets is the safest and most effective alternative. (ii) The other end of the retrieval line shall be attached to a mechanical device or fixed point outside the permit space in such a manner that rescue can begin as soon as the rescuer becomes aware that rescue is necessary. A mechanical device shall be available to retrieve personnel from vertical type permit spaces more than 5 feet deep.
(OSHA 1926.503 - Training requirements)

(a) Training Program. (l) The employer shall provide a training program for each employee which might be exposed to fall hazards. The program shall enable each employee to recognize the hazards of falling and shall train each employee in the procedures to be followed in order to minimize these hazards.
147
HARRINGTON HEAVY DUTY CB HAND CHAIN HOIST

HEAVY DUTY INDUSTRIAL QUALITY HOIST (CB)
Harrington CB Chain hoists combine a rugged exterior shell with machined interior components to handle your most demanding lifting operations. An efficient drive train minimizes effort, while double enclosed brake cover, standard slip clutch, and double pawl springs enhance performance and reliability. Many Benefits From More Features:
Experience exceptional durability thanks to all-steel construction featuring rugged gear case enclosure and handwheel cover. Enjoy increased lifting height thanks to low headroom. Compact design results in lightweight and easy portability. Minimize manual effort thanks to efficient drive train. Standard slip clutch device prevents the hoist from being used to lift damaging loads beyond rates capacity. Double pawl springs provide redundancy for reliable operation of brake mechanism. Get reliable braking with double enclosed brake cover that keeps out dust, rain, and dirt.
Options:
Chain container Corrosion-resistant chain Inspection hook
Capabilities To Count On:

8-foot standard lift (12-foot for 10 Ton and greater), nonstandard lifts and hand chain drops are also available. Grade 100 heat-treated manganese alloy load chain resists abrasion and wear while minimizing chain weight. Forged and heat-treated alloy steel hooks are designed to open slowly, without fracturing under excessive loads. Test certificate verifies that every hoist has been factory load tested to 125% of rated capacity. in accordance with ASME B30.21 requirements.
CODE NO.
CAPACITY (TONS)
STD. LIFT (FT.)
CHAIN PULL TO LIFT FULL LOAD (LBS.)
OVERHAUL RATIO TO LIFT LOAD ONE FT. (FT.)
NET WEIGHT (LBS.)
SHPPING WEIGHT (APPROX.) (LBS.)
LOAD CHAIN FALLS (LINES)
WEIGHT IN LBS. FOR ADDITIONAL ONE FT. OF LIFT (LBS.)
CB005 1/2 8 48 25 CB010 1 8 58 43 CB015 1-1/2 8 70 57 CB020 2 8 72 70 CB025 2-1/2 8 66 99 CB030 3 8 72 114 CB050 5 8 68 198 CB080 8 8 75 297 CB100 10 12 72 396 CB150 15 12 74 594 CB200 20 12 72 X 2 396 X 2 CB300 30 12 86 X 2 495 X 2 CB400 40 12 86 X 2 693 X 2 CB500 50 12 98 X 2 792 X 2 CB800 80 12 86 X 4 693 X 4 CB1000 100 12 98 X 4 792X 4 *Any lift of chain is available on request. When ordering, specify the length of chain.
22 25 32 41 56 49 85 124 186 346 524 690 1068 1422 3392 6525
23 26 33 43 58 53 89 131 203 368 678 889 1398 1752 -
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 5 6 10 14 18 28 36
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 3.0 4.2 5.5 7.9 10.9 13.3 18.2 20.6 36.3 41.2
148
HARRINGTON CF CHAIN HOIST

STANDARD DUTY CHAIN HOISTS (CF)
1/2 Through 5 Ton capacity Harrington CF hand chain hoists give you a practical alternative thanks to an economical design using fewer parts trouble-free service. Outstanding durability is due to a die-cast aluminum body and high-strength, heat-treated main pinion shaft and load gear. Prelubricated ball bearings, precision machined gears, and Weston-style load brake make lifting smooth and easy while allowing long service and low maintenance.
Many Benefits From More Features:

Experience exceptional strength with a thick die-cast aluminum body. Handle tough demands with high-strength, heat-treated main pinion shaft and load gear. Get positive braking action with Weston-style load brake incorporating two moisture-resistant brake pads with four braking surfaces. Minimize manual effort thanks to smooth running, pre-lubricated ball bearings, and precision machined drive train components. Simplify maintenance with fewer parts and an easy-to-work-on demand.

10-foot lift is standard, 15- and 20-foot lifts are also stocked; nonstandard lifts and hand chain drops available as well. Grade 100 heat-treated alloy steel hooks are designed to open slowly and not fracture under excessive loads. Test certificate verifies that every hoist has been factory load tested to 125% of rated capacity, in accordance with ASME B30.21 requirements.
Options:
Chain container Corrosion-resistant chain Inspection hook
CF HAND CHAIN HOIST SPECIFICATIONS

Cap. (Tons) Product Code Headroom C (in) Std. Lift (ft) Pull to Lift Load (lbs) Overhaul Ratio Load Chain Diameter (mm) x Chain Fall Lines Net Weight (lbs.) Shipping Weight Approx. (lbs.) Weight for Addl One Foot of Lift (lbs.) a (in) b (in) d (ft) e (in) f (in) g (in)
1/2 CF005 12.8 10 60 19 5.0 x 1 24 1 CF010 14.6 10 72 31 6.3 x 1 29 1-1/2 CF015 17.3 10 84 41 7.1 x 1 4 2 CF020 20.1 10 80 63 6..3 x 2 47 3 CF030 23.2 10 92 81 7.1 x 2 62 5 CF050 24.4 10 92 134 7.1 x 3 82 Please Note: Special lengths of load and hand chain available upon request.
26 31 42 49 66 86
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.9
5.4 5.8 6.0 5.8 6.0 6.0
5.9 6.9 8.0 8.0 9.4 13.5
10 10 10 10 10 10
2.0 2.3 2.4 2.3 2.4 2.4
2.4 2.9 3.4 2.3 2.7 4.5
1.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.7 1.8
149
HARRINGTON HEAVY DUTY LB LEVER HOISTS

THE TOUGH ONE INDUSTRIAL-CONTRACTOR QUALITY (LB)
3/4, 1,11/2, 2, 3, 6, and 9 Ton Capacity Plus New Compact Design 23/4 Ton
& New ed ov Impr
Harrington LB lever hoists combine easy operation with a compact, reliable design that easily handles the real-world demands of contractor and industrial applications. Examples include day-to-day maintenance, machine repair, construction, service, and manufacturing operations. youll find every job goes easier thanks to smooth, reliable lifting and pulling actions. Compact size and easy operation make the LB lever puller the cumalong to take along wherever you have a load to move.
Many Benefits From Move Features:

Take and use this hoist anywhereincluding tight quartersthanks to a compact design with low headroom. Shed weight , not rugged, all steel construction that actually weighs less than comparable aluminum models. Get positive braking action with Weston-style load brake incorporating two moisture-resistant brake pads with four braking surfaces. Includes two brake pawls for additional reliability. Enjoy protection against dirt and moisture with a totally enclosed brake mechanism. Realize long life with machined, heat-treated, split load double reduction gears. Operation in close quarters with short, 15-degree recovery strokes, short steel handle and positive rubber grip. Patented spring-loaded freewheel mechanism allows easy adjustment of the load chain while safeguarding against inadvertent freewheel under load.
New Design
Lighter Weight Compact Size Lower Headroom Nickel Plated Chain Easy to Operate Trouble Free
Options:
Load limit warning handle Point load hook Top hook extender Inspection hook

5-foot lift is standard, 10-, 15- and 20-foot lifts also stocked; nonstandard lifts available as well. Nickel plated load chain resists abrasion and wear while minimizing chain weight and corrosion. Forged and heat-treated alloy steel hooks open slowly without fracturing under excessive loads. Test certificate verifies that every hoist has been factory load tested to 125% of rated capacity, in accordance with ASME B30.21 requirements.
3/4 - 234 Ton
3 Ton
6 Ton
9 Ton
150
LB CHAIN COME-A-LONG SPECIFICATIONS
LB015
LB030
LB060
LB090
SPECIFICATIONS
Headroom C (in) 11.0 11.8 13.2 14.8 14.8 15.6 21.3 26.8 Std. Lift (ft) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Pull to Lift Load* (lbs) 54 (36) 72 (46) 64 (45) 59 (42) 81 (57) 69 72 78 Load Chain Dia. (mm) x Chain Fall Lines 5.6 x 1 5.6 x 1 7.1 x 1 8.8 x 1 8.8 x 1 10.0 x 1 10.0 x 2 10.0 x 3 Net Weight (lbs) 13 13 18 25 25 33 57 88 Shipping Weight Approx (lbs) 13 14 18 26 26 35 60 93 Weight for Additional One Foot of Lift (lbs) 0.5 0.5 0.7 1.1 1.1 1.5 3.2 4.7
Cap. (Tons) 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 2 3/4 3 6 9
Product Code LB008 LB010 LB015 LB020 LB028 LB030 LB060 LB090
a (in) 5.7 5.7 6.3 6.8 6.8 7.5 7.5 7.5
b (in) 4.7 4.7 5.0 5.9 5.9 6.3 8.5 12.0
D* (in) 9.6 9.6 10.4 10.4 10.4 16.3 16.3 16.3
e (in) 3.8 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.0 4.4 4.4 4.4
f (in) 1.6 1.6 1.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.3 4.1
g (in) 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.5 2.0 2.9
HEAVY DUTY PUSH AND GEARED TROLLEYS

Harrington push geared trolleys help you maneuver easily on your most demanding lifting operations. They feature specially designed contoured wheels that ensure reliable tracking, and their sealed ball bearings avoid maintenance hassles and provide smooth operation.
Many Benefits From More Features:

Get sure trolley with specially designed contoured wheels that fit both tapered and flat-flanged beams. Maintenance-free, sealed precision ball bearings are lubed-for-life and offer smooth movement, with low friction and long life. Get strength and rigidity from a lightweight, compact and long life. Easily adjust trolley to fit a wide variety of bea flange widths. Wide standard flange ranges reduce the need for optional extended shaft kits. Match the needs of the job with a variety of trolley hoist suspensions.
PT
PUSH TROLLEY (PT)

CODE NO. CAP. (TONS) ADJUSTABLE FOR*: FLANGE WIDTH (IN.) WHEEL TREAD DIAM. (IN.) MIN. RADIUS TRACK CURVE (IN.) NET WEIGHT (LBS.)
GT
PT005 1/4 - 1/2 PT010 1 PT020 1-1/2 - 2 PT030 2-1/2 - 3 PT050 5 PT080 8 PT100 10 *Up to 12 inch flange widths available.
2.28 - 4.92 2.28 - 4.92 3.94 - 5.91 3.94 - 5.91 4.92 - 6.89 5.91 - 8.66 5.91 - 8.66
2.2 2.8 3.4 3.9 4.6 6.1 6.1
32 39 47 59 79 118 118
13 24 40 57 99 226 226
NOTE: GT Flange Widths Are The Same As PT
151
HARRINGTON ER ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS

CAPACITIES 1/4 TO 20 TONS VOLTAGES 220/460-3-60
Load-supporting frame is sturdy double-steel plate construction for capacities 1/2 ton and over. Aluminum frame with fins allows better radiation and permits frequent operations. Two brakes: a Pull Rotor Motor Brake and a Weston Mechanical Load Brake supplied as standard. All Harrington ER Series Electric Hoists meet NEMA 3R Specifications. The duty rating is class H3. Where NEMA 3S or a duty rating class of H4 is required, consult factory. Meets International Electric Code 1.P.54. Insulation Class B. Optional voltages available. Special chain guide allows smooth load chain movement. Chain container. ER HOOK SUSPENSION TYPE CAPACITY 1/4 TO 20 TONS The load chain is made of specially developed case hardened alloy steel. Excellent in durability, the super-high strength chain complies with ISO specifications. Nickel Diffused chain is available for use in such applications as rain, sea water, steam, chemical or other harmful atmospheres. Built-in bearing in bottom hook permits easier 360 swiveling. The hooks are drop-forged from special alloy steel and heat treated for strength and toughness. They are designed to open slowly when overloaded.
New Wire Rope Hoists

Electric Wire Rope Hoists 2,3,5,71/2,10,15,20 Tons are now available from Harrington along with crane systems and end trucks.
ERP PLAIN TROLLEY TYPE CAPACITY 1/4 TO 20 TONS
ERG GEARED TROLLEY TYPE CAPACITY 1/4 TO 20 TONS
ERM MOTORIZED TROLLEY TYPE CAPACITY 1/4 TO 20 TONS
152
HARRINGTON ED ELECTRIC CHAIN HOIST

CAPACITIES: 125 TO 525 LBS. SINGLE PHASE AC 120V 60 HZ
Features: 120V Single Phase power supply Lifting Speeds available to suit any handling operation Low headroom Light, die cast aluminum, compact body Dual speed adjustable cylinder control is ergonomically designed and has a compact speed selector control device. Incorporates a double braking systema regenerative brake and the Weston brake A mechanical braking system using a unique high performance clutch brake with overtravel protection High strength, zinc plated load chain Chain container (standard) Forged, alloy steel hooks with latches Gears are immersed in an oil bath with deep groove ball and needle bearings used to support all rotating components Permanent magnet DC motor Benefits: Easy and inexpensive installation can be used where no three phase power is available The chance for injuries and product damage can be minimized by using the applicable combination of speed and lift. Can be used in close quarters Product is easily moved, stored or installed Comfortable for operator use Allows for accurate placement of load Prevents damage to unit that can occur when load is overlifted or overloaded Lightweight and long-lasting chain Offers protection for load chain out of operators way Will open slowly in an overload situation Smooth, quiet operation Smaller size contributing to overall compactness of unit
MODEL ED - S & DS
MODEL ED - DA
MINI TROLLEY
153
LUG-ALL CABLE WINCH-HOIST

In 1949, LUG-ALL pioneered a new concept . . . a portable cable ratchet winch-hoist with strong aluminum frame, self-storing aircraft cable, a reversible safety handle, and an interlocking pawl system. The LUG-ALL has been imitated. It has never been surpassed. When you want a winch-hoist, specify LUG-ALL. Theres a big difference. FEATURES: Operates smoothly right side up or upside down in most positions. Forged-steel safety hooks straighten if overstressed.Three workable hooks instead of two. Factory tested to 50% overload. Easily rigged and carried by one man. Interlocking pawl system will not slip even if wet or oily. Free releaseworks only when hoist is unloaded. Operates at two speeds. Adjusts for close control.
3-TON CAPACITY WITH TELESCOPIC HANDLE

The new Lug-All cable winch-hoist costs less, weighs less (only 34 lbs.) and is easier to operate than a chain hoist of the same capacity. It stores 15 ft. of cable right on its drum and provides 50% more reach than the average chain hoist. The new hoist has a unique reversible handle that telescopes from 37-1/2 to 57 to provide extra leverage when needed. Permits pulling from a standing position. Available in marine grade. 100% American made. 1/2 ton to 3 ton capacities. Lightweight and portable.
LUG-ALLS HAVE 3 BASIC RIGGING POSITIONS

A
double cable lift
B
single cable lift
C
minimum distance 13
LUG-ALL CABLE MODELS SPECIFICATIONS

A RIG B RIG C RIG CABLE HANDLE MIN. HANDLE MIN. HANDLE MIN. PULL FOR DISTANCE PULL FOR DISTANCE PULL FOR DISTANCE TOTAL CAPACITY CAPACITY FULL LOAD LIFTING BETWEEN CAPACITY FULL LOAD LIFTING BETWEEN CAPACITY FULL LOAD LIFTING BETWEEN WEIGHT CODE NO. (TONS) LBS. (LBS.) DISTANCE HOOKS LBS. (LBS.) DISTANCE HOOKS LBS. (LBS.) DISTANCE HOOKS DIAM. LENGTH (LBS.)
1000-15* 1/2 1000 77 15 16 3/16 16 7 115-R* 1/2 1000 77 15 16 3/16 16 7 1500-25 3/4 1500 67 12-1/2 21 750 65 25 16 750 67 25 10 5/32 26 8-1/2 125-R 3/4 1500 67 12-1/2 21 750 65 25 16 750 67 25 10 5/32 26 8-1/2 2250-15 1-1/8 2250 86 7-1/2 21 1125 83 15 16 1125 86 15 10 3/16 16 8-3/4 215-R 1-1/8 2250 86 7-1/2 21 1125 83 15 16 1125 86 15 10 3/16 16 8-3/4 2250-20 1-1/8 2250 86 10 21 1125 83 20 16 1125 86 20 10 3/16 21 9-1/4 3000-10 1-1/2 3000 100 5 21 1500 97 10 16 1500 100 10 10 7/32 11.5 9 310-R 1-1/2 3000 100 5 21 1500 97 10 16 1500 100 10 10 7/32 11.5 9 2250-38 1-1/8 2250 100 19 23-1/2 1125 83 38 18 1125 86 38 10 3/16 39.5 13-3/4 238-R 1-1/8 2250 100 19 23-1/2 1125 83 38 18 1125 86 38 10 3/16 39.5 13-3/4 3000-30 1-1/2 3000 100 15 23-1/2 1500 97 30 18 1500 100 30 10 7/32 31.5 13-3/4 330-R 1-1/2 3000 100 15 23-1/2 1500 97 30 18 1500 100 30 10 7/32 31.5 13-3/4 4000-20 2 4000 115 10 26-1/2 2000 110 20 18-1/2 2000 115 20 13 1./4 22 15-1/2 420-R 2 4000 115 10 26-1/2 2000 110 20 18-1/2 2000 115 20 13 1./4 22 15-1/2 6000-15 3 6000 105 7-1/2 34 3000 105 15 26-1/2 3000 105 15 17 5/16 18 34 Stocked in our warehouse. Suffix R denotes rapid lowering units. *Without pulley block. For marine grade (with stainless steel cable, anodized castings, and oiled-for-life bearings throughout) add suffix M to model number. Specifications and dimensions are subject to change without notice. WARNING: These hoists are intended for industrial use and not for lifting or supporting human cargo.
154
LUG-ALL WINCH-HOISTS
LUG-ALL INSULATED MODELS
Designed for line construction work, Lug-All insulated winch-hoists make it safer to work with live wires. These lightweight hoists have one-hand portability and are easy to use in any position. Insulated straps and handles protect against shock, and the easily replaceable stress link that breaks on a 50% overload is an excellent accident preventative. Our hoists with hot stick rings widen the safety margin by eliminating direct contact with the hoist. Six 1 diameter rings on the hooks, handle and pawl shafts allow the lineman to position the hoist with a holding stick or shot gun.
MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN HOOKS W/STRAP HANDLE PULL W/STRAP HANDLE PULL NET DOUBLE W/FULL IN SINGLE W/FULL WEIGHT REEVED (IN.) DRUM (LBS.) LINE (IN.) DRUM (LBS.) (LBS.)
CAPACITY CODE NO.(TONS)
DESCRIPTION
STRAP LENGTH
2 2B 2U 3 3B 3U 3PS 4 4B 4U 4PS
1 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 2 2
w/Safety Hooks w/Safety Hook and Hot Stick Rings w/Gate Type Safety Hooks w/Safety Hooks w/Safety Hooks and Hot Stick Rings w/Gate Type Safety Hooks w/Turnbuckle Jaws w/Safety Hooks w/Safety Hooks and Hot Stick Rings w/Gate Type Safety Hooks w/Turnbuckle Jaws
24-1/2 24-1/2 29 25 25 29-1/2 24-1/2 26 26 30-1/2 25
67 67 67 93 93 93 93 105 105 105 105
17-1/2 17-1/2 23 19-1/2 19-1/2 23-1/2 19 20-1/2 20-1/2 23-1/2 19
65 65 65 90 90 90 90 100 100 100 100
10-1/4 10-1/4 12 13 13 14-3/4 13-1/2 14-3/4 14-3/4 16-1/2 14-3/4
95 95 95 118 118 118 118 98 98 98 98
LUG-ALL WEB STRAP WINCH HOIST

Approved by the countrys major utilities for line construction work. 1, 1-1/2 and 2-ton capacities. Lightweight. From 10-1/4 to 161/2 lbs. Equipped with 8 or 10 ft. nylon web straps and reversible fiberglass handles. Available with HOT STICK RINGS. Many models equipped with six 1 hot stick rings for remote operation with a linemans stick
PARTS & REPAIR AVAILABLE IN OUR SHOP
the RIGHT way and the WRONG way to use a Lug-All!
WARNING: These hoists are intended for industrial use and not for lifting or supporting human cargo.
155
GRIPHOIST CONTINUOUS CABLE PULLERS

T-508
Material hoisting capacity 1 ton.
INCREASE OF LIFTING AND PULLING POWER

Griphoist machines used in conjunction with sheave blocks will efficiently solve most of your pulling and lifting problems. By using sheave blocks on the hauling rope, the nominal capacity of Griphoist machines can be multipled 2, 3 and even 4 times as shown in the diagram. As a rule, it is not difficult to figure the number of line parts to be used for a given load. It is however important, especially when there is a greater number of line parts, to take into account the friction in the sheaves, which can have a nonnegligible influence on the strain exerted on the hoist and the top anchoring hook of the block.
TU-17
N.S.N. 3950-00-724-6156. 3/4 ton manriding. U.L. classified.
T-516
TU-28
N.S.N. 3950-00-226-9444. 1-1/2 ton manriding. U.L. classified.
T-532
TU-32
N.S.N. 3950-01-006-0733. 3 ton manriding. U.L. classified.
MATERIAL LIFTING CAPACITY CODE NO. (LBS.)
WEIGHT (LBS.) HOIST STAND. WIRE ROPE** OPERAT. HANDLE TOTAL WEIGHT SHIP OVERALL DIM. (IN.) LENGTH OF OPERATE HANDLE (IN.)
GRIPHOIST WIRE ROPE DIAM. IN. (MM) BREAK. LOAD (LBS.) APPROX. SPEED PER MIN. (FPM)
T-508 2,000* 14.25 30 ft. @8 2.5 26 16-1/2x9-7/8x3-7/8 22/28 5/16 (8.4) ref. C8 10,000 7-9 TU-17 2,000* 18.5 30 ft.@8 2.2 32 20-3/4x9-3/4x4-1/2 22/28 5/16 (8.4) ref. C8 10,000 7-9 T-516 4,000* 30 60 ft.@28.9 5 61 20-7/8x12-7/16x5 25-5/8-45-1/4 7/16(11.6)ref.C12 20,000 6 TU-28 4,000* 41 60ft.@28.9 5.3 80 26x13x5-3/4 31-1/2-47-1/2 7/16(11.6)refC12 20,000 7-8 T-532 8,000* 51 30ft.@28 5 77 24-7/17x14x5-1/8 25-5/8-45-1/4 5/8(16.3)refC16 40,000 6 TU-32 8,000* 59.5 30ft.@28 5.3 105 27x13x6-1/8 31-1/2-47-1/2 5/8(16.3)ref.C16 40,000 5 *Capacity calculated for materials hoisting. For manriding, conform to all safety regulations. **Any odd lengths supplied on request. Unless specified otherwise, wire rope is fitted with its standard safety hook at one end and welded point the other end. A lightweight metal reel, supplied with the wire rope, facilitates carrying and stowing. As a rule GRIPHOIST units are not sold without their wire rope.
Stake Out Kit Available For Anchoring To The Ground

156
SUSPENDED PERSONNEL PLATFORMS

SUSPENDED PERSONNEL SUPERCAGE
All Supercage products were designed to incorporate the following as standard equipment: Removable components for easy maintenance and repairs. High strength steel 2 square tubing construction. Inward swing door, self-closing, self-latching (with outward stop plate). Grab rail on entire inside perimeter. Anchors for personnel safety belts or body harness. 6 steel toe plate (entire inside perimeter). Expanded metal from floor deck to top of midrail. Non-slip material floor. Exterior pad eyes for anchoring and tagline use. Eight upper reinforcing gussets at bail area (for added strength). Special warning decals and permanent metal ID plate. Polyurethane paint, high durability, safety yellow. Operating manual furnished. Options available at additional cost: Easily detachable test weight assembly for load test procedure. 5-part wire rope lifting attachment (bridle). Protective roofexpanded or solid metal. Fixed crosshead with lifting eye (for direct attach to hook). Forklift attachment with safety restraint. Rubber bumpers on external perimeter. Tool/storage shelf (inside). Video for safe operation. Alternate paint colors and finishes. CAUTION: Platforms are to be used only in compliance with Federal rules and regulations. SUPERCAGE products are designed, engineered, manufactured, and certified to meet or exceed all existing Federal and State codes. Title 29CFR Part 1926.550(g), Crane and Derrick Suspended Personnel Platform. Inspection, load test and certification documents furnished. SUPERCAGES can be ordered in any size, shape or material to meet your specific applications. We also manufacture nonpersonnel medical evacuation, and welding equipment Supercages. Ask about our Supercage DFA (Direct Fixed Attached) personnel platforms (cages) which attach directly to the end of the boom on most cranes. DFA models do not require a bridle assembly or anti-two block device when used in this manner.
CODE NO. L DIMENSIONS W H SAFE WORKING LOAD (SLW) CAPACITY TEST WEIGHT LBS. OPTIONAL
MODEL S-R7 36 O.D. x 88
S-30 S-36 S-50 S-60 S-75 S-100 S-125 S-150 S-160 S-170 S-200 S-400 S-1000 S-R5 S-R7 S-AL1 S-AL2 S-NP60 S-NP603
30 36 36 36 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 72 84 18 36 36 48 60 60
30 36 48 60 48 48 54 60 96 108 72 144 84 DIA DIA 36 48 60 60
44/88 44/88 44/88 44/88 44/88 44/88 44/88 44/88 44/88 44/88 44/88 44/88 96 88 88 44/88 44/88 72 60
500 750 750 750 750 1,000 1,250 1,500 1,500 1,500 2,000 4,000 10,000 300 500 500 1,000 1,000 3,000
625 938 938 938 938 1,250 1,563 1,875 1,875 1,875 2,500 5,000 12,500 375 625 625 1,250 N/A N/A
MODEL S-100 48 x 48 x 88 Shown with optional expanded metal roof and test weight assembly
MODEL S-160 48 x 96 x 88
157
THERN HAND WINCHES
158
THERN HAND WINCHES
159
THERN HAND WINCHES
160
MY-TE POWER WINCHES
THE MAX SERIES

Model AC 36 shown
HYDRAULIC MODEL
Model HY1 shown
THE I-BEAM SERIES

Model 800 shown
THE UTILITY SERIES

Model 30-12 shown
PNEUMATIC MODEL
Model Air 1000 shown
THE VERSATILE SERIES

Model 520 shown
NOTE: Pole Mount Kits Available.
MODEL SPECIFICATIONS
REQUIREMENT STANDARD HYDRAULIC PNEUMATIC ELECTRIC HY1 AIR 1000 100A 10-12 MAX ELECTRIC AC 36 DC 48 UTILITY I-BEAM ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC ELECTRIC 300A 30-12 HY3 800 500 VERSATILE ELECTRIC 510 520 520***
Lift Capacity (lbs.) (double line) first layer Motor Voltage No Load Drum Speed (FPM)
3000
2500
2000
2500
6000
6000
1600
1600
1600
2000
2000
2000
3000
3000
Full Capacity Single-Line Lift Speed Full Load (amps) 19 100 19 100 19 100 Duty Cycle 50% 50% 25% 25% 25% 25% 25% 25% 25% 1/4 Cable 250 250 250 250 250** 250** n/A N/A N/A Capacity (ft.) Dimensions 9x9x21 12x11x22 12x14x22 12x14x23 13x13x27 13x13x28 12x14x18 12x14x18 8x8x16 (WxHxL) Shipping 60 77 67 69 128 138 54 65 60 Weight (lbs.) I-Beam size must be specified at time of order. See separate sheet for air consumption. See catalog for multiple layer ratings. *Shipped with 40 foot 1/4 cable. **110 foot capacity 3./8 cable; 3/8 cable recommended on this model. ***Three phase.
115V or 230V 17 32 10 4 21 29 8 Constant speed 10 FPM 15 FPM 20 FPM 9 FPM 7.25 FPM 4 FPM 30 FPM 15 FPM 29 FPM 20 FPM 8 FPM @1500 lbs. @1250 lbs. @1000 lbs. @1250 lbs. @3000 lbs. @3000 lbs. @800 lbs. @800 lbs. @800 lbs. @1000 lbs. @1000 lbs. 19 25% 250* 15x14x25 143 9 50% 250
Hydraulic
N/A
115V or 230V AC 30
12V DC
115V or 230V AC 11
12V DC
115V or 230V AC 59
12V DC
Hydraulic
115V or 230V AC 30
115V or 230V 12 Constant speed 12 FPM @1000 lbs. 17 50% 250
13x11x32 13x11x32 13x11x32 13x10x38 98 115 115 165
161
SAFETY CLAMPS INC. LIFTING CLAMPS

MODEL VL
Horizontal to vertical lift. Capable of turning a single steel plate from horizontal to vertical to horizontal through a 180 arc. Locks open and closed. to facilitate loading and unloading clamp. Locks closed onto material for a more secure lift. Gripping cams. 2 through 20 ton lift capacities incorporate dual gripping cams. Increases grip on load for a more secure lift. Self aligning pivoting die for increased surface contact between load and clamp. Wide jaw openings within rated lift capacity. High strength shock resistant steel provides for longer clamp life. Working parts enclosed. Protects parts for longer use.
CODE NO. RATED CAPACITY (TONS) GRIP OPENING (IN.) WEIGHT (LBS.)
AVL1/2 AVL1 VL1/2 VL1 VL2S VL2L VL3S VL3L VL4S VL4M VL4L VL6S VL6M VL6L VL8S VL8M VL8L VL10S VL10M VL10L VL12S VL12M VL12L VL20S VL20M VL20L
1/2 1 1/2 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 12 12 12 20 20 20
0 - 7/8 0 - 7/8 0 - 1-3/8 0 - 1-3/8 0 - 1-5/8 1-1/2 - 2-3/4 0 - 1-5/8 1-1/2 - 2-3/4 0 - 1-1/8 2 - 3-3/4 3-3/4 - 5-1/2 0 - 2-1/8 2 - 3-3/4 3 - 5-1/2 0 - 2-5/8 2-1/2 - 4-1/2 4-1/2 - 6-1/2 0 - 2-5/8 2-1/2 - 4-1/2 4-1/2 - 6-1/2 1/2 - 3-1/8 3 - 5-1/4 5 - 7-1/4 1/2 - 4-1/4 4-7 7 - 10
10 10 10 10 23 25 27 29 45 47 49 49 50 53 60 67 74 72 80 88 92 101 112 302 322 345
INSPECTION MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

It is important to establish a regular procedure for clamp inspection. Frequency of inspection will depend upon the amount of use the clamp receives, and may well vary from one department or area to another. Merrill clamps are built to withstand rough treatment. Grit, dirt, sludge and mud should be removed, however. This may be done easily by immersing the entire clamp in a can of degreaser and leaving it there overnight. Also, periodic oiling of all pins and rivits will improve performance and help to extend the life of the clamp. You may wish to maintain a written record, indicating inspection dates, condition of the clamp on each of those dates, and any repairs made. Inspection records should be reviewed periodically.
Many Other Styles and Sizes Abailable
WARNING
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Do not exceed Working Load Limit. Inspect clamp before each lift. Do not lift more than one plate or sheet at a time. Position clamp to balance load. Insert plate or unit to full depth of throat opening. Lift slowly and smoothly. Do not jerk load. Stand clear of load when lifting. Do not use a damaged clamp. Read manufacturers instructions before using clamps. Do not use any Merrill clamp to lift tapered plates or beams. When lifting plates with a hardness over 43 Rockwell C/400 Brinnell, consult the clamp manufacturer.
CAUTIONS
The clamps in this catalog are not intended to serve as a permanent connection to a plate or other object. The grip depends on friction and a camming action. If the gripping surfaces are not properly maintained and the clamp is improperly used, the load may fall. Use extreme caution where overhead lifting is involved or where a failure could cause property damage or personal injury. Read maintenance and use instructions.
162
BEAM CLAMPS
BEAM CLAMPS (STOCKED IN OUR WAREHOUSE)
2,000 to 20,000 lbs. 1 to 10 ton. Reliable and rugged. All steel construction is durable yet lightweight. Portable for permanent or temporary mounting. Adjustable. Fits securely on a wide range of flange widths and beam sizes. Special design. Clamp jaw design reduces flange stress by distributing load away from flange edge. Low headroom. Built in suspension bar provides close mounting.
CODE NO. LMBC-1 LMBC-2 LMBC-3 LMBC-5 LMBC-10 CAPACITY (LBS.) 2000 4000 6000 10000 20000 CAPACITY (TONS) 1 2 3 5 10 FLANGE WIDTH (IN.) 3 - 8.25 3 - 8.25 3.1 - 12.6 3.1 - 12.6 3.5 - 12.6 NET WEIGHT (LBS.) 10.6 12.3 24 27.1 46.3
PERMANENTLY FIXED ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS

Permanently fixed adjustable SUPERCLAMP Girder Clamps (PFC) are designed for light industrial applications, particularly where a permanent overhead anchor point is required. These high-strength inexpensive lightweight clamps are excellent for application in small garages and hobbyist workshops.
S.W.L./WLL AT 0 VERTICAL CODE NO. PFC1 PFC1 PFC1 METRIC 1000 KG 1000 KG 1000 KG US/IMP. 1T 1T 1T JAW GRIP ADJUSTMENT MIN.-MAX. MIN.-MAX. METRIC US/IMP. 75-190mm 3-7-1/2 75-190mm 3-7-1/2 75-190mm 3-7-1/2 JAW APERTURE METRIC 22mm 22mm 22mm US/IMP. 3/4 3/4 3/4
SWIVEL JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS

Swivel Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps incorporate the additional benefit of horizontal jaw adjustment. This enables the full length and a maximum width of the swivel jaw to anchor evenly on a considerable surface area of the beam flange. Additional tools or width adjusting components are not required.
S.W.L./WLL AT 0 VERTICAL CODE NO. S5 S5A S6 S6A S11 METRIC 3000 KG 3000 KG 5000 KG 5000 KG 10000 KG US/IMP. 3T 3T 5T 5T 10T JAW GRIP ADJUSTMENT MIN.-MAX. MIN.-MAX. METRIC US/IMP. 80 - 315mm 80 - 315mm 80 - 315mm 80 - 315mm 80 - 315mm 3-1/2 - 12 3-1/2 - 12 3-1/2 - 12 3-1/2 - 12 3-1/2 - 12 JAW APERTURE METRIC 26mm 26mm 26mm 28mm 30mm US/IMP. 1 1 1 1 1
FIXED JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS

These Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps are truly versatile in application and may be used for lifting, pulling, or as an anchor point. Designed specifically to provide maximum jaw grip adjustment.These products are engineered for practical use where mobility is essential. The clamps are speedily applied and do not require additional tools or width adjusting components, such as spacing washers.
S.W.L./WLL AT 0 VERTICAL CODE NO. S1 S2 S2A S3 S3A S4S S4A S12 S14 METRIC 2000 KG 3000 KG 3000 KG 4000 KG 5000 KG 6000 KG 10000 KG 15000 KG 15000 KG US/IMP. 2T 3T 3T 4T 5T 6T 10T 15T 15T JAW GRIP ADJUSTMENT MIN.-MAX. MIN.-MAX. METRIC US/IMP. 75 - 190mm 75 - 190mm 75 - 190mm 150 - 254mm 150 - 315mm 200 - 457mm 200 - 457mm 200 - 457mm 406 - 610mm 3 - 7-1/2 3 - 7-1/2 3 - 7-1/2 6 - 10 6 - 12 8 - 18 8 - 18 1 - 18 16 - 24 JAW APERTURE METRIC 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 50mm 63mm US/IMP. 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 2 2-1/2
ADJUSTABLE RUNWAY BEAM TROLLEY WITH ANTI-DROP PLATES

SUPERCLAMP Adjustable Runway Beam Trolleys are of acknowledged and experienced design. the unique quality features of the new range of manual traveling gear are the Anti-Drop Plates (ADPS) which are incorporated into the practical design of these transferable and mobile security attachments.
S.W.L./WLL AT 0 VERTICAL CODE NO. BA1 BA2 BA3 B1 B2 B3 METRIC 1000 KG 1500 KG 2000 KG 3000 KG 6000 KG 10000 KG US/IMP. 1T 1.5T 2T 3T 6T 10T WIDTH ADJUSTMENT MIN.-MAX. MIN.-MAX. METRIC US/IMP. 63 - 203mm 75 - 203mm 75 - 203mm 75 - 203mm 100 - 315mm 100 - 315mm 2-1/2 - 8 3 - 8 3 - 8 3 - 8 4 - 8 4 - 8 TO ACCOM. BEAM FLANGE THICK MAX. METRIC US/IMP. 26mm 26mm 26mm 28mm 30mm 30mm 1 1 1 1-1/8 1-3/18 1-3/18
163
RIGGING INSTRUCTION VIDEO TAPE COURSE AND TRANING MATERIALS

RIGGING SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT!
All rigging operations involve some element of danger. As todays rigging requirements become more complex (i.e. heavier and/or awkward loads to lift) greater emphasis must be placed on specifying and using the correct sling necessary for hoisting each particular load. Choosing the right rigging gear requires adequate training in safety procedures for all management and field personnel. THE PREVENTION OF RIGGERS MORTIS SERIES has been developed to educate riggers and companies about specifying and using rigging gear correctly and safely. It is divided into the following three segments: 1) #PMR-1 An introductory course entitled Introductory Prevention of Riggers Mortis designed to fit into a two-hour safety meeting. Includes 30 Handbooks & Tests, an Instructors Manual & answer key, an 80-minute video, and 30 riggers handbooks for reference. 2) #PMR-2 The rigging instruction course entitled PREVENTION OF RIGGERS MORTIS can be tailored to a companys needs from four hours to two full days. This course is on CD and covers such topics as: load control, sling loading, and rigging design. It includes 30 Workbooks & Tests, an Instructors manual & answer key, and 30 riggers handbooks for reference and certificates of completion. 3) #PMR-3 The hardware inspection course entitled Prevention of Riggers Mortis: Sling & Rigging Hardware Inspection is an advanced course that is independent of the rigging instruction course. Rigging hardware inspectors do not have to be riggers. This course comes on CD and includes 30 workbooks & Tests, Instructors Manual & answer key. There is a list of samples required to make this course a hands-on experience for the participants. SUCCESSFULLY PRESENTED AT MANY COMPANIES INCLUDING: Atlantic Refining Millstone Nuclear Plant Bechtel Corporation Westinghouse Electric Philadelphia Area OSHA Office General Electric Company Philadelphia Electric Company Peach Bottom Nuclear Plant Limerick Nuclear Plant Del Marva Power Company Salem Nuclear Training Facility Sun Oil Company Gulf Oil Company Sun Shbuilding Public Service Electric & Gas Company Transamerica Delaval Company West Valley Nuclear Service Company
21st For The Century
Crosby Training Materials
Crosby Literature-Your best training material and selling tools. These product specific brouchures contain important imformation on rigging requirements, product application and warning instructions plus engineering specifications, definitions, illustrations, photos and drawings.
Crosby Training Packs Provides the best product information for your own in-house programs. Includes videos, naterial to make overhead transparencies, and a workbook with test questions and answers. All materials are the same as you would receive in our product training seminars. Crosby Reference Material Tie Down Calculator - contains details on various tie downs required for your type system. Detail inspection criteria adapted from the CVSA Cargo Securement Tie Down Guidelines. Lifting Guides - pocket size, laminated folding card with information on rigging, inspection, capacities and design factor. Each card is packed with information on sling angle, load distribution and hardware.
164
GENERAL INFORMATION AND DEFINITION OF TERMS

GENERAL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
All ratings shown in this literature are based upon the item being new or in as new condition. Catalog ratings are considered to be the greatest load that should be applied to the item; therefore, any shock loading must be considered when selecting the item for use in a system. Catalog ratings are based upon usual environmental conditions and consideration must be given to item selection when unusual conditions are to be encountered. In general, the products displayed within this literature are used as a part of a system being employed to accomplish a task. Therefore, we can only recommend the utilization of such products to accomplish the desired task, within their working load limit. The products shown are subject to wear, misuse, overloading, corrosion, deformation, intentional alteration and other usage factors which may necessitate a reduction in the products Working Load Limit rating or a reduction in its Safety Factor. Therefore, it is recommended that all products be regularly inspected to determine their condition as a basis for deciding if the product may continue to be used at the catalog assigned WLL, a reduced WLL, a reduced safety factor, or removed from service. The products shown are, in general, items intended to be used in a tension or pull manner, so, caution must be used so that the product is not subjected to a side loading that will cause an additional and unintended loading. All hook latches shown are intended to retain loose slings or fittings under slack conditions. They are not intended to be antifouling devices, so, caution should be used to prevent the latch from supporting any of the load. Periodic inspection of latches must be made tonsure their proper operating condition. Welding of or to load supporting parts or products can be a source of a problem. It is necessary to have knowledge of materials, heat treatment and welding procedures before welding of any item is to be considered.We suggest consulting us for information, and proof testing if necessary.
DEFINITIONS
WORKING LOAD LIMIT The maximum recommended load that should be exerted on the item.The following terms are also used for the term Working Load Limit: SWL, Safe Working Load, Working Load, Rated Load, and the Resultant Safe Working Load. All Working Load Limit values, unless noted otherwise, are for in-line pull with respect to the centerline of the item. PROOF LOAD The average load to which an item may be subjected before visual permanent deformation occurs or a load that is applied in the performance of a proof test. PROOF TEST A term designating a tensile test applied to the item for the sole purpose of detecting injurious defects in the material or manufacture. BREAKING STRENGTH That total force (lbs. or kg.) at which the sling fails. The total weight strain which can be applied before failure. In the USA, it is usually at five times the rated capacity; it is seven times rated capacity. Also known as Ultimate Load. SHOCK LOAD A resulting load from the rapid change of movement, such as impacting or jerking, of a static load. A Shock Load is generally significantly greater than the static load. SAFETY FACTOR An industry term denoting theoretical reserve capability. Usually computed by dividing the catalog stated ultimate load by the catalog stated working load limit and generally expressed as a ratio, for example 5 to 1. Also called Design Factor. ABRASION The mechanical wearing of surface resulting from frictional contact with materials or objects. COMPETENT PERSON A person designated for inspection who is trained and qualified by knowledge and practical experience and who has the necessary instructions to enable the required test or examination to be carried out. ELONGATION The measurement of stretch, expressed as a percentage of the finished length. FITTING A load bearing metal component which is fitted to the sling. Can be of steel, aluminum or other material that will sustain the rated capacity of the sling. SYNTHETIC FIBER Man-made material used for the cover, the core and the thread of the Twin-Path sling products. TELL-TAILS Extensions of the load core yarns. When the sling is stretched beyond its elastic limit, they shrink and eventually disappear under the tag. Take out of service if less than 1/2 is exposed. THREAD The synthetic yarn which is used to sew the sling cover and tag and to provide the stitch which separates the individual load cores. TWIN-PATH A patented and trademarked product which is composed of two separate load bearing cores and two separate seamless covers in a single sling. All ratings given in tons refer to short tons of 2,000 lbs. unless otherwise noted. There is always a safe way to lift every load. For any of your special lifting requirements, please contact your technical sales representative. NOTE: The right is reserved to make changes in product design, material and specifications without incurring obligations.
FITTING MAINTENANCE
All fittings are subject to wear and disfigurement in the form of nicks and gouges, and should be inspected periodically for these conditions. Any detection of a crack or permanent deformation in a fitting (i.e., hook, shackle, link, etc.) is cause to remove the fitting from service and have it destroyed.
165
SUMMARY OF COMMON CONVERSIONS

FACTORS
IF YOU KNOW: inches inches feet yards miles millimeters centimeters meters meters kilometers metric tons U.S. tons kilograms pounds metric tons metric tons Fahrenheit (temp.) Celsius (tem.) MULTIPLY BY: 25.4 2.54 0.30 0.9144 1.61 .0394 .39 3.28 1.09 .62 1.102 .9072 2.204 .453 2204.62 1000.0 5/9 (after subtracting 32) 9/5 (then add 32) TO FIND: millimeters (mm) centimeters (cm) meters (m) meters (m) kilometers (km) inches inches feet yards miles U.S. tons metric tons pounds kilograms pounds kilograms Celsius (temp.) Fahrenheit (temp.)
DECIMAL/METRIC EQUIVALENT TABLE

FRACTION (IN.) 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 DECIMAL (IN.) .0625 .1250 .1875 .2500 .3125 .3750 .4375 .50900 .5625 .6250 .6875 .7500 .8125 .8750 .9375 1.0000 METRIC (MM.) 1.588 3.175 4.762 6.350 7.938 9.525 11.112 12.700 14.288 15.875 17.462 19.050 20.638 22.225 23.812 25.400
BREAKING FORCE 1 kN (Kilonewton) = 101.972 kgf (kilogram/force) 1 kN (Kilonewton) = 224.809 pounds/force 1 kip = 1,000 lbs 1kpf = .4536 lbs. pounds/force MASS/UNIT LENGTH 1 inch = 25.4 mm 1 mm (millimeter) = 1 foot = .3048 m (meter) 1 cm (centimeter) = 1 yard = .9144 m (meter) 1 m (meter) = 1 mile = 1,609 M (meter) 1 km (kilometer) = 1 rod = 5.5 yards 1 chain = 22 yards 1 shot = 90 ft. AREA 1 sq.in.(square inch) = 645.16 mm2 (square millimeter) 1 sq.ft.(square feet) = .0929 m2 (square meter) 1 m2 (square meter) = 10.7639 ft2 (square feet) 1 acre = 45,560 sq.ft. = 4,046.86 sq.meters 1 hectare = 10,000 sq.meters = 2.47 acres TENSILE GRADE 1770 N/mm2 = 180 kp/mm2 = IPS breaking strength 1960 N/mm2 = 200 kp/mm2 = EIPS breaking strength 2160 N/mm2 = 220 kp/mm2 = EEIPS breaking strength
Fahrenheit
806 608 212 100 86 75 68 59 50 41 32 14 -4 -22 -40 -50 -250
Celcius
430 320 100 38 30 24 20 15 10 5 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -58 -418
.03937 inch .3937 inch 3.28084 ft 1,000 meters
DISCLAIMER
The information contained herein as to the products offered, including without limitation their technical descriptions, dimensions, specifications, physical characteristics and suitability for various uses are based solely and entirely upon information provided to us by the manufacturers of such products. Furthermore, we point out that the manufacturers of the products offered in the present catalogue may change such information without notice at any time. While we have made every effort to verify the accuracy of such information, we make no representation or warranty in this regard and take no responsibility in the event of any inaccuracies, misdescriptions or changes in the product information contained herein. In no event shall we be liable to you for any injury, loss or damage of any kind or nature whatsoever including but not limited to general or special damages, direct, indirect or consequential damages, punitive damages, loss of anticipated profits or revenues or any liability of yours calculated by reference to any loss of anticipated profits or revenues of any third party, which in any case may arise, directly or indirectly, as a result of the use or application of the product or of any information provided by us, negligently or otherwise, or by the infringement of any proprietary rights. All products ordered from us on the basis of this catalogue shall be sold to you subject to the terms and conditions, including without limitation the exclusion and limitation of liability clauses, contained in our standard invoice.
166
TO I-285 TO I-285
AR ANT ATL OAD
TH SOU
O OL T
O N R
AD
Exit 252
TO I-285
NORTHSIDE DRIVE
TO I-285
HOWELL MILL RD.
I-85 I-75
CHATTAHOOCHE
. LVD
E AVE.
ELLSWORTH IND.
HOLMES
IETT MAR
AB
HUFF RD.
ATLANTA WATER WORKS
I-75 I-85
14TH STREET
10TH STREET
1785 Ellsworth Industrial Drive
404-351-2600
WARRANTY
Bairstow Lifting Products Company will guarantee our products to be free of defects in workmanship and material at time of shipment. Our obligation under this warranty is limited to replacement F.O.B. Atlanta, Georgia. No other firm, person, or corporation is authorized to assume for us, any other liability in connection with the sale or use of these goods. Bairstow Lifting Products Company is not liable for damages which may result from misuse, abuse, or physical alteration of the product, nor do we accept any liability resulting from usage in excess of working load limits. If the user is unfamiliar with the proper use of our products, we will be glad to supply full information for proper usage upon request (free).
DOWNTOWN ATLANTA
TERMS OF SALE
1. F.O.B.: Point of Shipment 2. Minimum Invoice Charge: $25.00 3. No material may be returned for credit without our written consent. A 25% restocking charge and full outgoing and incoming freight charges will apply to material accepted for return. Material returned without prior consent will not be accepted. 4. All deviations or shortages on shipments must be reported within thirty (30) days, or credit will not be allowed. 5. Special items ordered outside of the regular stock items may not be returned for credit. 6. Custom fabricated items may not be returned.
See us online at www.bairstow.com

TOLL FREE: 1-800-241-8990 PHONE: 404-351-2600 E-MAIL: info@bairstow.com WEBSITE: www.bairstow.com FAX: 404-355-2046
167
1785 ELLSWORTH INDUSTRIAL DRIVE, N.W., ATLANTA, GEORGIA 30318
BAIRSTOW SERVICES OFFERED
FREE INSPECTIONS
WIRE ROPE RIGGING GEAR FALL PROTECTION SLINGS
PROOF TESTING CERTIFICATION & TAGGING 650,000 LBS. CAPACITY HOIST REPAIR AND TESTING FALL PROTECTON TRAINING
TRAINING VIDEOS, LITERATURE, AND CDS AVAILABLE PRODUCT USE DEMONSTRATIONS
RIGGING PRODUCTS TRAINING

CROSBY CERTIFIED TRAINER VIDEOS, BOOKS, AND CDS AVAILABLE HANDS-ON TRAINING
168

Bairstow Rigging

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bairstow Rigging

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SAFE USE & INSPECTION

SEE US ONLINE AT WWW.BAIRSTOW.COM

TOLL FREE: 800-241-8990 PHONE: 404-351-2600

TWIN-PATH EXTRA LIFTING SLINGS w/HIGH PERFORMANCE FIBERS & TELL-TAILS

VERTICAL CODE NO.

NOTE: See pages 15-17 for Safe Use Information

Capacities up to 500,000 lbs. Vertical 1,000,000 lbs. Basket Available on Request

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

TWIN-PATH EXTRA SLINGS SAVE TIME AND MONEY

MADE EXTRA TOUGH AND EXTRA SOFT

EXTENDED USE MAKES THEM MORE ECONOMICAL

SOFT AND FLEXIBLE FOR ADDED LOAD PROTECTION

UNIQUE SAFETY FEATURES

Fiber optic Tell - Tails for inspection

Tell-Tail Tags Retract When Sling Is Overloaded

Side By Side Roundslings For Backup Protection

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

FIBER OPTIC TELL-TAILS

FIBER OPTIC INSPECTION FOR ALL TWIN-PATH SLINGS

TWIN PATH POLYESTER SLINGS

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

TWIN PATH EYE & EYE SLING

VERTICAL CODE NO.

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.) CHOKER BASKET HITCHES

TWIN PATH TWO-LEG BRIDLES

TWIN-PATH 2-LEG BRIDLES WITH K-SPEC

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

TWIN-PATH ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE SPECIFICATIONS

TPA 6 TPXA 12 TPXA 20 TPXA 40 TPXA 60 TPXA 90

6,000 12,000 20,000 40,000 60,000 90,000

1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/4

5/8 7/8 1-1/4 1-3/4 2 2-1/4

3-1/4T 6-1/2T 12T 25T 35T 55T

4.40 6.80 13.60 31.10 60.00 86.00

1.35 1.95 2.70 4.20 5.70 8.10

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

CHOKER SLING WIDTH STOCK NUMBER

2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 4

1,600 3,200 4,800 8,000 16,000 24,000

2,000 4,000 6,000 10,000 20,000 30,000

4,000 8,000 12,000 20,000 40,000 60,000

.20 .24 .28 .31 .55 .80

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

CM-SL (Sliding Type)

CM-RM (Removable Sliding Type)

CM-EE (Sleeve to make an Eye & Eye sling)

CM-RMT (Removable Sliding Tubular Pad)

CM-SEW (Single Ply Sewn into Place)

Performance Pad Wear Pads (Style PK)

Nylon Web Wear Pads (Style NW)

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

CORNERMAX WEAR PADS

The photo shows the formation of a tunnel

SHACKLE PIN-PAD WEAR PADS

Easy Attachment with hook & loop straps

Protects Sling from cutting

Part # PIN-PAD + Shackle Size (example 112" shackle = PIN-PAD 112)

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

MODEL NUMBER SC200L SC300L SC400L SC500L SC600L

WGT. (LBS.) 2 3-1/2 7 15 29

Connect Two Slings Connect Hook or Oblong to Sling Choker Sling

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. 1-800-241-8990 WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

GUNNEBO WEB & ROUNDSLING HARDWARE